TEMS™ INVESTIGATION 14.

0 USER'S MANUAL

This manual is provided by Ascom Network Testing AB without any kind of warranty. Improvements and changes in this description due to typographical errors or inaccuracies in current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment may be made by Ascom Network Testing AB at any time without notice. These changes will, however, be incorporated into new editions of this manual. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, nor translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyrighted owner, Ascom Network Testing AB. TEMS is a trademark of Ascom. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. © Ascom 2012. All rights reserved. Document number: NT12-2533 ver 1.0

Contents

Contents

1. Introduction

1

1.1. Fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.1.1. Package Options – Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1.1.2. Connectable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2. What’s in This Manual (and What’s Not) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3. Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation

8

2.1. What’s New in TEMS Investigation 14.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.1.1. Control Functions for Smartphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2.1.2. New Logfile Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.3. Speech Quality Measurement with POLQA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.4. Searching, Filtering, and Highlighting in Message Windows . 10 2.1.5. Expansion of Scanning Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.1.6. Improved Service Testing Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.7. Logfile Export Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.8. Improved HASP Soft License Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.9. New Connectable User Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.1.10. Enhancements in Recent Maintenance Releases . . . . . . . 13 2.2. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.2.1. Alternative Mobile-to-mobile AQM Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.2.2. CS Fallback Events and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.2.3. Extended Set of LTE RACH Information Elements . . . . . . . 14 2.2.4. Improved Handling of Qualcomm-based LTE Devices . . . . 14 2.2.5. CDMA/EV-DO Rev. B Measurement and Analysis . . . . . . . 14 2.2.6. New Connectable User Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.2.7. WCDMA Scanning with Rohde & Schwarz . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.2.8. CDMA Scanning with PCTel SeeGull MX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.2.9. New Connectable Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.2.10. Software Update Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

i

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

2.2.11. Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.1.1 . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.2.12. Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.1.2 . . . . . . . . . . 17 2.3. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.3.1. TD-LTE Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.3.2. Data Service Performance Verification with Generic Device. 18 2.3.3. Selection of Preferred Workspace at Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.3.4. New Utility for Sharing Script Configuration Settings . . . . . . 19 2.3.5. New LTE Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.6. New Connectable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.6.1. UMTS Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.3.6.2. LTE Scanner: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . . . . . 20 2.3.7. Support for SSH2 Protocol in Iperf Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.3.8. Support for 64-bit Windows 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.3.9. Performance Improvements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.3.10. Additional New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.3.11. New Features in TEMS Investigation 13.0.1 . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3. Basics of TEMS Investigation

23
23 23 23 23

3.1. Recommended Skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. Installing TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3. Starting TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4. Quick Guide to the User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. User Interface

26
26 27 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 29 30 30 30 30 31

4.1. User Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2. Workspaces and Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1. Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.1. Opening Workspaces from a Command Prompt . . . 4.2.1.2. Predefined Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2. Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3. The Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1. Record Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2. Replay Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.3. Report Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.4. File and View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4. The Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1. Help Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2. “Play” Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3. “Record” Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii

Contents

4.5. The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 4.6. Keyboard Shortcuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

5. The Navigator

33

5.1. Equipment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 5.2. Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 5.3. Info Element Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.3.1. Presentation Attributes of Information Elements . . . . . . . . . 34 5.3.2. Editing the Color Ranges of Information Elements . . . . . . . 34 5.3.2.1. Automatic Setup of Color Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 5.3.2.2. Manual Setup of Color Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.3.3. Editing the Marker Sizes and Symbols of Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.4. Logfile Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 5.5. Worksheets Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

6. Cell Data

38

6.1. Creating a Cell File in XML Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 6.2. Creating a Cell File in CEL Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 6.3. Loading Cell Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 6.4. Loading Cell Data from Mentum CellPlanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 6.5. Use of Cell Data in Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

7. Managing External Equipment: General

41

7.1. Connectable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7.2. Overview of User Interface Components Dealing with External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

8. Activating External Equipment

43

8.1. Plugging In External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 8.1.1. Plugging In Phones and Data Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 8.1.2. Plugging In Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals . . . . . . . . . . 44 8.1.3. Plugging In Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 8.1.4. Plugging In GPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 8.1.5. Plugging In Equipment Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 8.1.6. Plugging In Stand-alone AQM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

iii

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

8.2. Starting TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3. The Navigator Equipment Tab: Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1. Top Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1.1. Device Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2. Bottom Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2.1. “Activities” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.2.2. “Information” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3. Detection of Equipment: Special Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.1. Detection of PCTel SeeGull EX Scanner . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.2. Detection of PCTel SeeGull MX Scanner . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.3. Detection of DRT Scanners and Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.4. Detection of HTC Touch Pro2 Phones . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.3.5. Detection of Equipment Not Covered by License . . . 8.3.3.6. Detection of Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4. User-assisted Detection of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4.1. Mapping Device Ports to Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.4.2. Qualcomm Devices with LTE/TD-LTE Capability . . . 8.3.4.3. LG and Samsung Devices with LTE Capability. . . . . 8.3.4.4. Data Service Testing with Arbitrary Devices . . . . . . . 8.4. Activating and Deactivating External Equipment in TEMS Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1. Activating External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2. Deactivating External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5. Managing GPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6. Further Features of the Navigator’s Equipment Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1. The Refresh Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2. Re-pairing Phones with AQM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2.1. Details and Limitations of the Re-pairing Function . . 8.6.3. Device Detection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7. Saving of the Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

45 45 45 46 47 47 47 48 48 48 48 48 49 49 50 52 53 54 55 55 55 56 57 58 58 58 59 59 60

9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

61
61 62 62 62 63

9.1. Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.1. Control Function Support by Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.2. AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.3. Band Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1.4. Cell Barred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

Contents

9.1.5. Cell Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 9.1.5.1. Cell Lock in GSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 9.1.5.2. Cell Lock in WCDMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 9.1.6. Nonvolatile Item Read/Write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9.1.7. PESQ Device Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 9.1.8. Radio Access Technology Lock (Lock on RAT) . . . . . . . . . . 69 9.1.8.1. RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Sony Ericsson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 9.1.8.2. RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Nokia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 9.1.9. RRC WCDMA Capability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 9.2. Voice/Video Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 9.3. Data Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 9.3.1. Presentation of Data Service Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 9.4. Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

10. The Status Control Monitor

73

10.1. Equipment Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 10.2. Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 10.3. Service Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 10.4. Computer Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 10.5. Logfile Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 10.6. Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

11. Logfiles

76

11.1. Recording Logfiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 11.1.1. Inserting Filemarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 11.1.2. Further Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 11.1.3. Positioning Logfiles by Pinpointing in the Map Window . . . 79 11.1.3.1. Basic Pinpointing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 11.1.3.2. Advice on Pinpointing and Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 81 11.2. Loading Logfiles for Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 11.2.1. Opening a Logfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 11.2.2. Logfile Metadata and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 11.2.2.1. “General” Subtab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 11.2.2.2. “Equipment” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 11.2.2.3. “Activities” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 11.2.2.4. “Statistics” Subtab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

v

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

11.2.3. Loading Logfile Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 11.2.3.1. Play Section of Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 11.3. Loading Logfiles from Other Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 11.4. Viewing Logfile Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 11.5. Logfile Transfer via FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 11.5.1. Setting Up Logfile Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 11.5.1.1. FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 11.5.1.2. Logfile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 11.5.1.3. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 11.5.1.4. Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11.5.2. Starting Logfile Transfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11.6. Exporting Logfiles in Other Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 11.6.1. Preparing an Export Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11.6.2. Specifying the Contents of Export Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 11.6.2.1. Selecting Information Elements to Export . . . . . . . . 92 11.6.2.2. Text File Specific Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 11.6.2.3. MapInfo Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 11.6.2.4. ArcView Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 11.6.2.5. Marconi Planet Specific Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6.2.6. Ethereal (Wireshark) Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6.2.7. MDM Specific Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6.2.8. Saving and Loading Export Setups. . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 11.6.3. Executing Export Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 11.6.4. Command Line Controlled Logfile Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 11.6.4.1. Mandatory Command Line Switches . . . . . . . . . . . 99 11.6.4.2. Optional Command Line Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 11.6.4.3. Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 11.7. Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles (UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 11.7.1. Retrieving Uplink AQM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 11.7.2. Preparing and Performing a Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 11.8. Generating Logfile Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 11.8.1. IE Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 11.8.2. Events Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 11.8.3. Mobiles Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 11.8.4. Scanned Channels Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 11.8.5. User Details Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.8.6. Saving and Loading Report Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.8.7. Generating the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 11.8.8. Report Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

vi

Contents

12. The Pinpoint Window

112

12.1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 12.2. Creating Planned Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 12.2.1. Opening a Map Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 12.2.1.1. Supported File Formats Holding Map Sets . . . . . . 112 12.2.1.2. Map Set Metadata Shown in Pop-out Pane . . . . . 113 12.2.2. Map Handling and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 12.2.3. Creating a New Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 12.2.4. Editing a Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 12.2.5. Deleting a Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 12.2.6. Unloading a Map Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 12.3. Walking Planned Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 12.3.1. Loading and Walking a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 12.3.2. Repeating Parts of a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12.3.3. Skipping Waypoints of a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 12.4. Relation to Other TEMS Investigation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 12.4.1. Data Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 12.4.2. Coexistence Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

13. Scanning: General

123

13.1. Setting Up a Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 13.2. Performing a Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 13.3. Recording Scan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 13.4. Presenting Scan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 13.5. Technical Data on Scanning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 13.6. Notes on Scanner Multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 13.6.1. PCTel Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 13.6.2. DRT Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 13.6.3. Rohde & Schwarz TSMW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 13.6.4. Sony Ericsson Phones and SRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 13.7. Notes on GPS Units in Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

14. GSM Scanning

127

14.1. Scanning Methods and Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 14.2. RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 14.2.1. Setup of RSSI Scan: General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 14.2.2. Setup of RSSI Scan: Sony Ericsson, SRU. . . . . . . . . . . . 128

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

vii

. . . .3. .2. . . . . . .2. Scanning Methods and Capabilities . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . SRU . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . 15.2. . . .2. . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . . .3. . . . . . .1. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . Presentation: Spectrum Analysis Bar Charts. . . . . . . . Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart. . . . .3. .3. 15. . . . . . . . . . .2. . .2. . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . General Settings . . 15. .3. . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Presentation . . . . . . . . . 15. . .1. . . . . . .2. . . . . . .2. . . 15. . . . . .4. . . . . . Pilot Scanning (with SCH Scanning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation: “CPICH Data” Status Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context Settings . 15. . . . 15. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . 129 130 131 131 15. . .1.6. . . . . .1.13. . .2. . . . . . SCH Timeslot Scanning . . . .1.5.1. . . . . . . . . . . Presenting Scrambling Codes from Multiple UARFCNs . . . . . .10. . . . Presentation: General . . . .2. . 15. . . . . .13. . . . . . . .13. . Presentation: SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15. . . . . . . . 14. . . . Presentation: “Finger Info” Status Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .1. .5.3. . . . 15. . . . . 15. .2. . . . . . . . . . .5. . Setup of Pilot Scan: General . . . 15. RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation: BCH Scanning . . .5. . 15.8. 15. . . . . . . 15. . . . . .2. . .7. 15.4. Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Bar Charts . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . .2. . . . .2. .3. 15. . . . . . . . . . . . 15. General Settings . . . . . . . . Context Settings . .2. . Spectrum Analysis . Setup of Pilot Scan: Anritsu .2. Setup of SCH Timeslot Scan . Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel . . .2. . . . .4.12. Spectrum Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . . . . .3. . .4. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9. . . . . . . . . . Presentation: Synch Channel Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1. 15. .1. . . . Context Settings . . . . . Sorting of Scrambling Codes . 14. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 15. . .2. . 15. . . . . .4.11.2. . .4. . . . . 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel SeeGull . . . . 15. 15. . Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Line Charts. .2. . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Sony Ericsson. . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of RSSI Scanning . WCDMA Scanning 132 132 134 134 134 136 138 139 140 141 141 142 145 146 146 146 146 147 147 147 147 148 148 149 149 149 150 150 151 151 151 151 152 15.2. . . 15. . . . . . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . 15. . . . . . .2. .1. . . .0 User’s Manual 14. .5.

. . . . 163 16. . . 169 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . .3. . .4. .4. . . 168 17. . . 160 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: PCTel . 164 16. . . . . . . . . . . Customizing the Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 17. . . . . . . . . . 164 16. . . . . . . . . . . 164 16. . . . . . . .3. . . . .2.1.2. . . . Scanning Methods. . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: Andrew . .5. . . . . . . . .5. . .0 ix . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . 165 16. . . . . . . . . . Presentation of RSSI Scan. . . 165 16. . . . . . . . Pilot Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel . . . . . . . . .6. . . . .6. . . Network Scanning . . . . .3. . . . . . . .1. 154 16. . . . . . 168 17. . . . . . . . . . . LTE Signal Scanning. .1. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Andrew . . . . . . . . . .3.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .2. Setup of Spectrum Scan: PCTel . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: DRT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . .4. . . .2. . . . . Spectrum Scanning . . . . . . . Setup of Enhanced Power Scan: General . . . . . . . . .1. .1. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . 165 16. . . . .1. 152 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . Presentation: Network Search Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 153 15. LTE Scanning 155 16. . 157 16. . . . . . . . Sorting of Cells .1. . . . . . . . . 169 NT12-2533 ver 1. . .3. . .2. . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 15. . . . .3. . . . . . .6. . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . Setup of Enhanced Power Scan . 3”) . . 155 16.4. . . . . . .4.1. . Context Settings . . . . . . . Presentation of Enhanced Power Scan . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . Presentation of LTE Signal Scan . . . . .4. . . . . . . .2. . . . Setup of RSSI Scan: General. 163 16. . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . 165 16. 153 15.2. . . . . 166 16. . TD-SCDMA Scanning 168 17. . . . . . 165 16. . . . . .3. . . .2. . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . 156 16. . . . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Scan: DRT . . . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan. . 164 16. . . . . . . . 161 16. . . .5. . . .2. . . . . . . . . 166 16. . . 166 16. . 157 16. . . . . RSSI Scanning . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 16. . Spectrum Scan Presentation . . .2. .Contents 15. . . . . 163 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . UARFCN Ranges (“Interval 1.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning Methods and Capabilities . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.2. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 156 16. . . . Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW . . . . .7. . . . Setup of Network Scan. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced Power Scanning . .1. . . . . .2. . . 153 15. . . . . . .2. .3. Setup of RSSI Scan: DRT . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . 164 16.

. . . Setup of Pilot Scan: Andrew . . . . . . . . . . . General Settings . . . . . 18. . 18. . . . . . . . . . . . 17. . . . . . . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan . . .1. . . . 18. . .3. . .1. . . . 18. . . Presentation: Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart . . . Presentation: Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 User’s Manual 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . .5. . . . . .1. . . . .4. . . . . .4. . . . . . 17.6. . . . . . . 18. . General Scan Settings . . . . . . . . Preamble Scanning. . . . . Presentation of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA Scanning 172 172 173 173 173 174 178 178 178 178 179 179 179 180 180 180 180 180 180 181 181 181 182 182 18. . . Pilot Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . 18. . . . . . 18.1. . . . . . Interference Offset . . . . . .2. . General Settings . . . 18. . . .1. . . WiMAX Scanning 183 183 183 184 184 187 187 19. . . . . . . 18. . . . Setup of Preamble Scan . . . . . . .1. . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel . . . . . . . . . . . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting of Pilots . . . . . . . . . .4. . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 170 171 171 171 18. . . 17. . . 18. . . . . . .4.1. .3. . . . . . Narrowband Interference Scanning . .4. . . . . . . . . . 18. Presentation of Pilot Scan .4. . . . . . . .2. . Scanning Methods . . . Presentation: “PN Scan” Bar Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . Sorting of Cells . . . . . . . Context Settings . . . . Setup of RSSI Scan . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . x . . . .5. . . .2. . . . Customizing the Presentation . .3.3. . . . . . . General Scan Settings . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . 19. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . .3. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . 18. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .1. . .2. . . .1. . . . . . . .3. . . Setup of RSSI Scan . . . . 18. . . . . 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . .1. . .2. . . RSSI Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup of Narrowband Interference Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 18. .TEMS Investigation 14. Spectrum Analysis . .4. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . 19. .3. . . . . . . 17. . .2. . .2. .1. . .6. . . Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart.3. .5. .5. . . .2. . .1. . .5. Presentation of RSSI Scan . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18. . 19. . . . . . .6. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . Scanning Methods . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .3.4. . . .1. . .

. . . . . Workflow Control Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 20. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . 196 20. . Terminate . . . . . . . . 192 20. . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .2. . 211 20. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . While Loops . . . . . . . Waiting For a Given Outcome of an Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . 202 20. . .4. . . . . 216 20. . . . . . . . . 213 20. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 189 20. . General Aspects of Script Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . .5. . . Snippets . . . . Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Scripts from the Service Control Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . .6. Editing Workflows and Script Settings. . 190 20. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . .2. .1. .8. . 200 20. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .6. . Example 3: Concurrent Activities on the Same Device . . . . .1. . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 19. . . . If–Else Constructs . . .14. .3. . . . . . 201 20. . The Service Control Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13. . . . . . . . . . Parallel Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Data Service Activity. . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 20. . . . . 190 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Network Connection . . . . . . . Basics of Creating Scripts (with Voice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . . .10. . . . . . . . 187 19. . . . . Validating Scripts. Waiting For a Scheduled Point in Time . . . . . .10. Windows 7/Windows Vista and IPv6 . . . . . .5. . . . .11. . . .7. . 215 20.1. . .15. 189 20. . . . . . . . .5.6. . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 20. .6. . . . . . . Wait For . . 205 20. .9. .2. . . . .1. .10.10. . . . UE Control Functionality . 198 20. . . . .6. Running Scripts . .10. . . . Stand-alone PS Attach and Detach. Monitoring Equipment Status . . . . 211 20. . . . . 215 20. . . .3. . . . 215 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectrum Analysis. . . . . . . Wait . .15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . .15. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . .5. . 187 20. . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . Example 1: CS Voice/Video – Caller and Receiver . . . . . . .2. . . . 216 20. . . .7. . 210 20. .10. . . .15. . . . . . . . . . . . .15. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . 216 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 xi . . 216 20. . . . . . . . 199 20. . . . . Capabilities of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Services by Cellular Technology .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . 204 20. . . . . . . . . . .12. .15. . . . . . Example 2: Concurrent Activities on Different Devices . . . 204 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . Presentation . . . . Introduction to Service Control . Service Control 189 20. . . .10. . Activity Properties That Control Execution . . . 200 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 20. . .

. . . . . . . . UDP . . 20. Messaging Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAP Get .16. . . . . . 20. .2. . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . Network Connect. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . HTTP Get . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . FTP Download .16. . . . .16. . . . .3. .2. . . . . . . .16. .1. . 20. . . . . PS Attach . . . . . . . .5. Viewing Statistics on Script Execution . . . . . 20. . . . . .3. . Activities (Reference Section). . . . . . . . . . . . . Deactivate . . . Network Bandwidth (Iperf Testing) . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . .5. . If–Else . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .4. . Predefined Snippets for IP . . .3. . . . 20. . .15. . . . . . Notes on Script-controlled Logfile Recording . . . .15. . .15. . . . . . . .6. . . .1. .3. . .16. 20. . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . Band Lock . . 20. . . . . .5. . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Activities . . . . . . . 20. . . .16. . . . Activate . . .16. . . . . . . . . .16. . . .3.1. . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . Network Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . Filemark . . . . . . . . . . E-mail Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . .16. . .3. . . . 20. . . . . 20.16. . . . . .2.2.9. . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . .16. . . . . . . . . . .14. . .8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . .16. . .3. . . . . . .6. . . 20. . . . . . . .16. 20. . . . .1. Control Activities . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of Data Service Testing . . . . . . . 20. . .16.16. . . . Terminate .16. . . . . . .16. . . Start IP Sniffing .3. . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . .7. .16. . . . . . .3. . . .3. 20. . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 20. . . 20.1. . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. Control Flow Activities .8. . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel . 20.4. . . . . . .16. . . . . Running Scripts from the Service Control Designer . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIP Register . . . .2. . . . . . 20.16. . 20. . . . . . . . .9. . . . . While . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . 20. . . .2. . . . FTP Upload .4. . . . SIP Unregister. 20. .16. . . . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14.15.2. . . .1. .3. . . . . 20. . . .5.15. . . .3.0 User’s Manual 20. . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . Radio Access Technology Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . .1. . . .16. Suppressing Parts of a Script . . . .2. . . . .16.16. . .3. 20. . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT . . . . . . . .6.16. . . . .16. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . Ping . . . . . Start Recording . Stop Recording . .11. . . .16. Wait . .3. . . .3.3. . . . . . . . . 20. . . PS Detach . . . 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . 20. 217 218 218 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 221 221 221 221 222 222 223 223 223 223 224 224 226 226 230 230 230 231 231 231 232 232 233 235 236 237 237 239 241 241 241 xii . . . . .3. . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .13. . . Wait For .1. . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stop IP Sniffing . . .7. . . . . . . 20.1. . . . . . . 20. .1.

. . . .17. .4. . . . .4. . SMS Receive. . . . . Hang Up . . . . PESQ Measurement . . 252 20. . 242 20. . . . . . . . . . .20. 243 20. . . . . . 254 20. . .2. . . . . . . . . .6. .6. . . . . .16. . . . Voice Activities . . . . . . . . . WAP Streaming. . . .1. . . 252 20. . . . . . Predefined Snippets for Messaging . . 246 20.4. . . . . . . . .10.4. .5. . . . . . . . . . . . 256 20. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . .1. Streaming . . . . VoIP Hang Up .2. . . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 20. . . .6. .18. . . . . . .16. .1. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 xiii . .19. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . 247 20. .5. . SMS Send . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . 245 20.18. . . . . . . . . . .1.16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17. . . . .16. . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .6.16. . . . Further Functionality in the Service Control Designer Window . . . . . . . 246 20. . . . . . . . 248 20. . . . . . . . . 249 20. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 20. . . . .16. . .16. . . .Contents 20. . . . . . . . . . .2.4. . .16. . MMS Send. . 247 20. . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . .19. . . . . . . . . Video Activities . . . 245 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . . . 254 20. . . .18. . . . . . . . . .17. .16. . . Video Dial . . . . . . . . . 251 20. . . .4. . . . 251 20.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP Answer . .16. . . . . . . . 251 20. . Answer . . . .18. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . How to Set Up VoIP Testing . . . . . 248 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . E-mail Receive . 245 20. . . . . . . . . . . . .20. . . . . . . . . . General Activity Properties . . .6. . . . . . .6. . . . .2. . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing Configuration Sets. . . .9. . . Activity Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.20. Descriptions of Configuration Sets . . . Predefined Snippets for Voice. . . Answer . . . . 256 20.2. . VoIP Dial . . . . . . . . 242 20. . . .6. .5. . 245 20. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .6. .16. . . . . .16. 250 20. . . . . 250 20.16. . .2. . .4. . .16. . Failure Handling Section . . . . . . . . .5. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . Hang Up . .2. . .5. . . 255 20. . . .16. . . . . Tutorial on Porting Scripts between PCs . . . . . . . . . .16. . . . . 247 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . Exporting Configuration Sets.18. 253 20. . . . . . . . . . Predefined Snippets for Video. . . . . . . . . .16. . . . Saving Workflow as Image. . .7. . . . Deleting Configuration Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VoIP Voice Quality . . . . . . Saving and Loading Scripts. . 248 20. .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16. 253 20. . .3. . .7. . . . . .20.3. . . . . . . . . Zooming the Workflow Pane . . . 256 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Sets. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . 246 20. . 257 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . . .19. . . . . . . . 244 20. . . . . Context Menu in Workflow Pane .17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 20. . . .18. Dial . .3. Termination Section . . . .5.4. . 249 20. . .4. . .6. . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . .16. . . . . . . . . . . .6. . Activity Filter . . Managing Configuration Sets . . . . . . . . . MMS Receive . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 20.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .3. . GSM Cell Barring Control . . . 21. . . . . . CAS Lock on PLMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .1. . . . .2. . . .5. .3. . . . . . 22. . . . . . . GSM Tx Power . . . . Channel Lock Control (GSM) . . . . .10. 21. . 21. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 21. 22. . . . .2. . .6. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . .2. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . Extended Reports . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 21.2. . . . . . . . . . . 21.2. . . . . .6. . . . . Common Controls . . . . . WCDMA BLER Target . . . . . . . WCDMA RRC Radio Capability . . . . . . .2.2. . . CAS Access Class . . . . . . . . .14.7. .1. . .3. . . . . 21. . . . . . . 22. . . . . . Properties of GPS Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . Adding an Information Element Criterion to the Event Expression . . . 22. . . . . . . Properties of Qualcomm Chipset Based Devices . . . . Sector Lock Control (WCDMA) . Device Properties 258 258 260 260 260 261 261 261 262 263 263 264 264 265 265 265 266 266 267 268 268 268 268 269 269 269 21. . . . . . . 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .2. . . . . Editing User-defined Events . . . . GSM Cell Selection . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . .2. . . . . .5. . . . . . . . 21. . .3. .2. WCDMA Cell Selection . . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . .1. GSM Barred Cells . . .2. . . . . . . . . Properties of ST-Ericsson Chipset Based Phones . . . . . . .12. . . . . . .3. . WCDMA Barred Cells . . Example of Event Definition . . 22. . 22. . . CAS Speech Codec . . . . . . 21. . . 21. .8. . . . 21. . . . . . . 21. . . . . 21. . . . 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Properties by Device. . . . . .3. . .2. . . . . . . . . . Presentation of Events . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Setting Up a User-defined Event . . . . . . . .2. . .2. . . . . .2. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . GSM Handover . .5. . Events 270 270 270 270 271 271 272 272 273 273 273 22. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . .11.9. 21. . . . . . . . . Properties of Nokia Phones (NTM3) . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . . . . xiv . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. .4. . 22. . Adding an Operator/Delimiter to the Event Expression . . . . . . . . . .2. . 21. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . .13. . Properties of Samsung LTE Modems . . . . . . . 21. . . . . .6. Adding an Event to the Event Expression .2. . . . . . . . .2. GSM EDGE Capability . 21. .4. Predefined and User-defined Events .2. . . Deleting User-defined Events .2. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Layer 3 Message to the Event Expression . . . . . . . . .2. .2.2. . . . . . . . . . 21. . . . . . . . .3. 21. . . 22. . . . . . . . . GSM Adjacent Scan . . . . . . . . . . . 22. Layer 3 Messages. .2.2. . . . . . . . .0 User’s Manual 21. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . Setting Up Status Window Contents . . 290 24. 289 24. 277 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting All Audio Indications . . . . . . . . . 278 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . .6. 282 24. . . . .7. . . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . 292 25. . . . . . . Changing Status Window Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . Editing Audio Indications . . . . . . .7. . . 281 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . Other Window Properties . .3. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . .2. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . Changing the Status Window Font Size . . Resetting Event Counter Windows. . . . . . . . Audio Indications for Events . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 xv . . . . Types of Presentation Window . . . Activating Audio Indications . . . . . . . . . 291 25. . . . . . . . . . . . 291 24. Non-standard Status Windows . . 286 24. . . . . . . Window Updating and Synchronization. . . . . . . 276 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . .Contents 22. . . . 290 24. . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . 277 22. 278 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . .5. . . . . TD-SCDMA Physical Channel Monitor. . . . . .4. . . . .1. . . . . . . Window Tabs. . . . . . . CDMA Finger Info. . . . . . . .6.2. . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Audio Indications . . . . . Presentation: Basics 278 23. . . . 281 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Properties . . . . . . . .3. 281 23. . . . 275 22. . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 274 22. . . . . “Set Equipment Number” Function. . . . Color Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import . . . . . . 293 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . . . Export .2. . . . . . . . . . . . 280 23. .1. . . . 292 25. . . . . . . 276 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Windows 282 24. Device Channels: MS/DC/PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . 280 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 22. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . Export/Import of Presentation Windows . . .7. . . . . . . . . Adding Audio Indications . .7. . . .6. . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . 279 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . Presented Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 23. 281 23. . . . . . Deactivating Audio Indications .3. . . . . . . . . . . 282 24. .4. . . . Repeating Columns in Multiple Groups. . Event Counter Windows 292 25. . . .1. . 276 22. . . . . . . . . . Deleting Audio Indications . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .4. . . . 289 24. . . . . . Copying Window Contents .

. .3. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .2.4. . . . . . . . . . . . Columns Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . . . . . . . 27. . . . . . 26. . . . . . Contents of the Line Chart Panes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .1. . . . and Highlighting in Message Windows . . .2. . . .7. 308 xvi . . . . 307 29. . . . . . . . . Evaluating Video Streaming Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . . . . . . . . 27. . 26. .1. . . . 26. How to Test Video Streaming . Search Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . Events Tab. . . . . . . . . 26. . . Changing Message Window Contents and Properties . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . . .8. . . 26. . Line Charts 306 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 User’s Manual 25. Plain-text Message Decoding . . . . Time Scale . . . . .4. . . . . . . Window-specific Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties of the Video Monitor . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 26. . . . .2. . . . . . 27.1. . . . . .1. . . . 293 25. . . . . . . . . . 26. .1. . . . . . Troubleshooting Video Streaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Window Catch-up . The Video Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . Mode Reports Window. . . . 293 26. . . . . . Messages Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. .1. . . . . . . Message Windows 294 294 294 295 295 295 296 296 296 296 297 297 297 298 299 300 300 26. . . . . . . . . . . Changing Event Counter Window Contents and Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . Highlighting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Window Synchronization . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Functions . . . . . . . . . General Tab . . . . . . . . . 27. . . . . . Freezing a Message Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering. . General Tab . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . . . Changing GPS Window Properties. . . . .1. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . Organization of the Line Chart Window . . . . . . . . . 28. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . 304 29. . 27. 26. . . 293 25. . . .1. . . . . Presentation of Discarded Messages . . . . . . . Video Streaming and the Video Monitor 301 301 302 302 303 303 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Events Tab. . . .2. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . The GPS Window 304 28.4. . .2. . . .7. . . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . . . . . 26.4. . . . . . . . 26. . . . . . 306 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching. . . .6. . . . . .

. .1. . . . . . . Contents of the Bar Chart Panes . . . . . . . 309 29. . . . . . . . .2. . . . 318 30. . . . . . . .3. . 329 30. . 319 30. . . . . . . . 320 30. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple IE Components Presentation Mode . . . . 330 30. . . 324 30. . .5. . . . 333 31. . Editing General Properties of a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . Constructing a GeoSet from Map Files . . . . . . 317 30. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . .1. . . . . . . . . Setting the Map’s North Direction. . Additional Information. . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 30. . . . . .4. . 336 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3. . . .4. . . . . . . 309 29. . . . . . 315 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . . 313 29. . . . . Adding Charts. . . . . .4. . . . 313 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 31.2. 338 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . . . . . .4. . 336 31. . .5. . . . . . . 317 30. . Setting Up General Bar Chart Properties . Adding Charts. . . .3.4. Specifying the Map Scale. . . . .4. . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .2. . Positioning Bitmap and TIF Maps . . . . . . . . . 334 31. . Data. . . . . . . Examples of Bar Chart Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .0 xvii . . . . . . . . .4. . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Themes and Theme Types . . . . . . . . . .3. . .4. . . . . . . . . Map Concepts . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . .1. . . . Presentation Mode. . . . . . . . . .4.5. . 318 30. . . . . . . . . Deleting a Chart . . .3. . . .4. . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . Highlights of This Chapter . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 29. . . Interval and Labeling . . . . . . . . . . Changing Line Chart Contents and Properties . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .1. . . 332 31. . . . . .4. . .3. .4. Specifying the Map Position . . . . . . . . 309 29. . . . . . .1. . . . Deleting a Chart . . . . . . . .Contents 29. . . . .5.1. . Organization of the Bar Chart Window .2. 328 30. 337 31. . . . . . . . .4. . Single IE Presentation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . 337 31. . . . . Map Windows 333 31. . . . . . . . . . .4. . 316 30. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 30. . . Exporting the Line Chart Window . . . . Setting Up Bar Chart Contents . Presenting Data: Themes .2. . . . . . Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart Presentation Mode . . . . Presenting Data from a Different Device . . . . . . 333 31. . . . . . . 337 31. . Presentation Layers . . . . . . . . Editing General Properties of a Chart . . . . . . Presenting Data from a Different Device . . .3. . . . . . . . . Exporting the Bar Chart Window . . . 329 30. . . Bar Charts 314 30. Editing the Contents of a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Purpose of KPIs . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 33. . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . 31. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) 364 365 365 366 366 366 366 366 33. . . . . 31. .4. . . . .8.6. . . . . . . . 31. . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining KPIs with TEMS Products . . . .3. . . . . . . . The Cell Color Theme . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . .4.6. . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presenting Pinpointing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Themes . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . .5.1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.10. . . . . . Presenting Information Elements . . . . . . . . .1. . 31. . . .5. . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . 33. Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrity . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . Presenting Cell Information . . . 31. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 341 342 343 344 347 350 352 354 354 354 355 355 355 355 357 358 358 358 359 360 360 360 361 361 361 362 363 363 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .2. 31. . .0 User’s Manual 31. .5. . . .9. . . Adding Presentation Layers . . Layers . . . . . .3. . . .2.10. .1. . 31. . . Notes on Route Plotting and Updating . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projections . . . . .7. . . . . . . .5. . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. General Procedure. . 31. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . .5. .7. .3. xviii . . . . . . . . . .5. The Scale Bar . . . . . . . . . The General Window 33.1. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Control .6. . . . . . . . . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Entire Layer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering Themes . . . . . . . . . . . The Map Window Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . .6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9.8. . . . . . .5. . . . . .2. . .2. . . 31. The Right-hand Pane . . . . . . .8. . . . 33. . .5. . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Themes . . . . . . 31. . . .7. . .5. . . .8. . . . . . . . 31. 31. . . . . . . . .8. . . Theme Legend (Legend Tab) . . . . . . GeoSet Manager. . . . . . The Cell Line Theme. . 31. . . . . . . . . . 31. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .1. . 31. . . . . Visibility of Themes . Layer Control . . Theme Statistics (Info and Graph Tabs) . . . . . . . .10. . . . . . . . Previous View . 31. . Information on Single Theme Markers (Info Tab) .TEMS Investigation 14. . 31.6. . .5. The Cell Theme. . . . . . . . 33. . Map Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . Presenting Events . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Map Projection. The Cell ARFCN Theme (GSM) . .

. . . . Mobile-to-mobile Audio Quality Measurement with MRU . . . . .1. . . . 371 34. . . . . . . . SQI-MOS vs. . . . . . .1.2. . .1. . 382 37. .0 xix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 36.1. . . . . . . 369 34.1. . . . .3. . 381 37. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Setups in TEMS Investigation . .1. Narrowband vs. . Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . .2. . UMTS . Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 36. . . . . . 377 36. . . . .4. . . 371 34.1. SQI for UMTS. . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . 379 36. . . . 378 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input to the SQI-MOS Algorithm . . . . . . . 371 34. .2. . . . . . .Contents 33. . . . . . . . . .3. .2. . Comparison with Other Radio Parameters . 370 34. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . 368 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment of SQI-MOS and PESQ . . . . “Events of KPI Type” . . .2. .3. 374 36. Notes on PESQ for Wideband (UMTS) . . . Speech Quality Index – SQI 368 34. . . . . .2. . . . . . Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . AQM with Call Generator/MRU 375 36. . . 378 36. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .2.5. . . . . . . . . . . . Recording AQM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA. . . . . .375 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 34. . . . . . . . . . 368 34. . . . . Audio Quality Measurement (AQM): General 374 35. . . . . . . . . . 368 34.2. . . . . . . . . .2. . . . Old SQI (UMTS). . . . 377 36. .5. . . . . . Obtaining AQM Data . . . . .5. . . . . SQI for CDMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile-to-fixed Audio Quality Measurement with Call Generator . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 33. . . . . . .4.5. . . .1. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . 370 34. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 380 37. . PESQ Key Performance Indicator . . . Prerequisites . . . . SQI-MOS Output . . . . Obtaining Significant KPI Statistics . . .1. . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Practical Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . 373 35. . . 379 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . . . . AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 381 37. . . . . 367 34. . . . . . . . . . . Obtaining AQM Data . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . Presentation of AQM Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wideband SQI-MOS (UMTS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PESQ Key Performance Indicator . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . Obtaining AQM Data. . . . . . . Details on C/I Measurements . 40. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI 390 390 390 391 391 391 392 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of AQM Data . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What VTQI Is Based On . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 38. . . . 384 37.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .0 User’s Manual 37. Dynamic (Realtime) VSQI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 37. . . . . . 42. . . 384 37. . . . . . . . . . Notes on PESQ Scores Obtained with Individual Phone Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . 387 39. . . .1. . . . 40. . . Why Measure C/I? . . .3. . . . . . . .2.1. .1. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . Update Rate . Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI 388 388 388 389 389 39. . . . . . . . . An Example. . . . . .TEMS Investigation 14. . . Recommended Structure of AQM Scripts . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . 387 38. General Properties of VTQI .1. . . . 40. . AQM for VoIP 386 38. . . . . . . Information Elements . . . .4.5. . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . 42. . .2. . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Static and Dynamic VSQI . . . . . . . . . . . 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static VSQI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accuracy . C/I Measurement (GSM) 394 395 395 395 396 396 396 42.2. . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile TV Quality Index – MTQI 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . What VSQI Is Based On . . . . . . . 382 37. . . . . . . . . .3. Recording AQM Data. .2. . What VTQI Does Not Consider. . xx . Requirements on a Robust C/I Measure. . . . . 42. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presentation of AQM Data .1. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . 385 37. . . . . What VSQI Does Not Consider. . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . General Properties of VSQI . . . . .

405 43. . . . . . .11. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .3. 404 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Test Reports . . . . 417 Index 419 NT12-2533 ver 1. . . Automatic vs. . . . . . . . . .2.3. . . . . . . . . . . Saving and Opening Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . 407 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. . . . . . . . . . The GSM Channel Verification Window . . General Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . Logfile Load Shortcuts . . . .6. . . . . . 403 43. . . . .9. .4. .3. . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Conditions . . 400 43. . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Verification.6. . . 409 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 User Interface 413 415 C. . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Test . . . Command Sequences . . . . . . . .10. File Types in TEMS Investigation Appendix C. 410 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 43. . . . . GSM Channel Verification 398 43. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 A. Stopping the Test . Editing and Removing Test Cases . . 416 C. . 405 43. . . . Adding a Test Case. . . . . . Comparison with Pre-12. . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 43. Drive Testing Shortcuts. .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 43. . . . . . . Automatic Verification. . . . . . . 405 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Contents 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts for Active Window . . Manual Verification . .8. . . . . . . . .6. Keyboard Shortcuts 409 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Data” Category Information Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Appendix B. 403 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting a Test Case. . . . . . . Equipment Handling . . . . . . . . 403 43. . . . . . . . . . . .0 xxi . .13. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . 400 43. Service Control vs. . . Summary of Test Case Status Values . . . . . . Activating Phones . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . 407 Appendix A. . .7. . .3. 406 43.6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual xxii .

Any restrictions that apply to your edition are indicated in the Release Note included in the delivery. and post-processing all in one. Note: Please note that the TEMS Investigation product exists in various editions. Offering data collection. Introduction Thank you for choosing TEMS Investigation – the industry-leading tool for troubleshooting. please take the time to read this user manual in order to gain an in-depth understanding of the product features. reducing costs and saving time and effort for operations staff. and maintenance of wireless networks. NT12-2533 ver 1. real-time analysis. Introduction 1. To get the most out of TEMS Investigation. verification.Chapter 1. all of which are covered by the product documentation but are not differentiated there. This means that descriptions of functionality and external device compatibility are not necessarily applicable in every single respect to the TEMS Investigation edition you have purchased. optimization.0 1 . This complete solution eliminates the need for multiple tools. TEMS Investigation is a complete solution for all of a network operator’s daily network optimization tasks.

logfile export). Fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 14. Customers who dispense with TEMS Investigation data collection are still able to use the non-realtime functions of the application (analysis of a single logfile. 0/EV-DO Rev. data cards. Supported cellular technologies can be freely selected and combined. The application also boasts a vast array of windows for presentation of logfile data.0 TEMS Investigation 14.0 is an air interface test tool for cellular networks. 1. A/EV-DO Rev. separately for chipsets with different capabilities. Still more powerful post-processing facilities are provided by the product TEMS Discovery.1. TEMS Investigation is primarily a tool for data collection and real-time analysis. Package Options – Licensing TEMS Investigation can be purchased with or without data collection capability (“Base Software Package” and “Replay Package” respectively). in the case of Qualcomm. It interfaces with phones. The Base Software Package provides the ability to collect data with Sony Ericsson phones in UMTS networks and with Qualcomm chipset based terminals in CDMA networks. 2 . and other measurement devices.0 User’s Manual 1. Other phones are licensed separately for each supplier or. B WiMAX (scanning only) TEMS Investigation enables monitoring of voice and video telephony as well as a variety of data services over packet-switched and circuit-switched connections. it collects data and records it in logfiles. except that WCDMA always comes with GSM support included. scanners. logfile reports.TEMS Investigation 14.1. supporting all of the following technologies: • • • • • • GSM/GPRS/EGPRS WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+ LTE (FDD and TDD) TD-SCDMA (including interaction with GSM) cdmaOne/cdma2000/EV-DO Rel.1.

1. HTC. LTE. NT12-2533 ver 1. and Sequans. The number of external devices that can be connected simultaneously in the application is dependent on many factors. GERAN–UTRAN–E-UTRAN inter-RAT handover). Altair. WCDMA. Sequans. and Rohde & Schwarz. CDMA. These terminals are built on chipsets from ST-Ericsson. A separate license option is available for collecting data with multiple phones concurrently. including PESQ/POLQA. Nokia. Leadcore. is likewise sold as a separate option. The Information Elements and Events volume provides full details on all IEs and events found in the application. A variety of devices are supported for GSM. Connectable Equipment TEMS Investigation 14. GPS units can be connected for geographical positioning. LG. Audio quality measurement is supported for GSM. PCTel. TD-SCDMA. WCDMA.0 3 . Together they allow comprehensive monitoring of UMTS. Pantech. Anritsu. positioning by pinpointing (either manual or according to planned routes) is supported. The manual gives a comprehensive account of all functions in the application. Introduction The Base Software Package permits data collection with one phone at a time. Novatel Wireless. Option. section 10.0 supports a wide variety of user terminals. See the Getting Started Manual. See the Release Note for further information. For indoor environments. DRT. Sierra Wireless. 1. It concentrates on how to use that application once it has been installed and all external devices are connected and ready for use. Audio quality measurement (AQM). GCT. and CDMA networks and of interaction among them (for example. It also lists and describes all preconfigured presentation windows.0. such as whether a data service is being run. 1.2. including ones from Ascom. Huawei. LTE. TD-SCDMA. Qualcomm. What’s in This Manual (and What’s Not) This book describes the user interface of TEMS Investigation 14.2. This option includes all required hardware as well as the ability to connect that hardware to TEMS Investigation. and CDMA. and WiMAX scanning.Chapter 1. Samsung.1 for further details on the range of connectable equipment. and ZTE. including ones from Sony Ericsson.

Data Service Testing Configuration of the PC and external devices is covered in the Getting Started Manual. The present document describes how to conduct data sessions from within TEMS Investigation using Service Control scripts (see chapter 20). and control external equipment is described in the present document. The same applies to all other third-party products mentioned in the manuals. External Equipment The basics on external devices are covered in the Getting Started Manual. These. For exhaustive information. crucially the following: • • • • Configuring the PC for TEMS Investigation Installing the TEMS Investigation software Licensing issues Configuring the PC and phones for data services How to activate. however. The manual does not describe the full range of functions and capabilities of the connectable phones. sometimes refer to TEMS Investigation documentation. designed to accommodate phones and other equipment during drive tests. In the remainder of this book. and other information of a technical nature. external devices are discussed further whenever certain capabilities are required in order for a function in TEMS Investigation to be supported. operate. a Getting Started Manual is provided which covers all preliminaries. Release Note Some technical issues not addressed in this manual are dealt with in the file ReleaseNote.0 User’s Manual The Technical Reference volume contains file and report format descriptions. Besides the above reference manuals. Equipment Cases The TEMS equipment cases. 4 . please refer to the documentation accompanying the phones.pdf which is found in the TEMS Investigation installation folder. chapter 10. are not covered here but have their own manuals.TEMS Investigation 14.

under the heading “TEMS Bulletins”.htm.com/networktesting and. To sign up for this free service. Contact information is given on the Web at www. Definitions This section explains a number of central concepts in TEMS Investigation which are frequently referred to in this user manual.com/networktesting under the link “TEMS Support”. chapter 7. All predefined events are found in Information Elements and Events. either in the cellular network or in connected equipment.ascom. as opposed to voice calls. Besides these. Layer 3 messages. and general information about the TEMS portfolio.com/en/index/support/supporttems/technical-support/tems-investigation. Technical Support If you have a question about TEMS Investigation which is not answered in any of the manuals nor in any of the other sources mentioned above. and conditions involving information elements. A number of events are predefined. go to www. events. you can define events of your own. please contact technical support.Chapter 1. Introduction FAQ Many questions regarding TEMS Investigation are answered in the FAQ sections found on the Web at www.ascom. TEMS News. User-defined events are specified by logical expressions which trigger the event when they evaluate to true.ascom. Event An event is generated by the TEMS Investigation software in order to indicate that something worthy of note has occurred. Along with this material you will also receive our customer magazine. Data Services This term refers to services requiring a data connection (either circuitswitched or packet-switched). NT12-2533 ver 1.0 5 . You can also obtain up-to-date details on patch releases.3. TEMS Bulletins TEMS Bulletins contain updates on new TEMS product releases. These expressions can contain predefined events. 1. click the link “Register for TEMS Bulletins”.

“Samsung LTE modem”. and/or a more precise term is used (“GSM phone”. rather than phones. Message The term “message” in this user manual generally denotes an air interface message described in the wireless technology specifications. 6 . All information elements handled by TEMS Investigation are found in Information Elements and Events. the GSM information element Neighbor RxLev contains the signal strengths of all neighboring channels (there may be up to 32). or events. Complete details on the arguments of information elements are given in Information Elements and Events. “Sony Ericsson GSM phone”. When a subset is meant. or mode or error reports produced by phones. Phone The term “phone” covers user terminals from all supported technologies. For instance. To pick one item from the array. A “message window”. The word “terminal” is therefore sometimes used instead of “phone”. you must specify an argument in the form of a neighbor index between 1 and 32.TEMS Investigation 14. etc. may list either air interface messages. chapter 3. Some user terminals supported by TEMS Investigation are in fact data cards. etc. Mode Report A mode report is a status or measurement report generated by a phone.). a suitable qualifier is prefixed. an argument is used. “LG UE”. however (chapter 26). or messages from various protocols. most often a Layer 3 message. Argument of Many information elements contain an array of values rather than a single value. Route The term “route” refers to a planned route created in the Pinpoint Window. “Sierra Wireless CDMA data card”. Information Element. without any difference in meaning from the point of view of TEMS Investigation. To present the signal strength of a particular neighbor channel. chapter 3.0 User’s Manual Information Element Information elements are pieces of numeric or text-format data that are presentable in the TEMS Investigation user interface. USB modems.

Chapter 1. Introduction Scanner The term “scanner” denotes a device dedicated to scanning. Track A track is a walk along a planned route in the Pinpoint Window. for example a PCTel scanner. Phones with scanning capabilities are not referred to as scanners. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 7 .

and it obeys the following control commands: • • • • • Lock to RAT Lock to band (WCDMA and GSM) Control cell selection and handover (WCDMA and GSM) Set cell barred behavior (WCDMA and GSM) Enable/Disable HS capability The Samsung Infuse 4G smartphone (ST-Ericsson chipset based). likewise new as a connectable device.1.0 continues and reinforces this tradition by adding the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S smartphone as a connectable device.1.1. TEMS Investigation 14. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. What’s New in TEMS Investigation 14. 2. This is a Qualcomm chipset based device running under Android. supports all of the above commands as well as the following: • • • • Control access class Control PLMN Control speech codec usage Enable/Disable EDGE capability 8 .TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual 2.0 Control Functions for Smartphones TEMS products have a long tradition of offering unique device control capabilities that rely on advanced measurement capabilities in the device hardware.

sorting.1. each recording being wholly independent of the others. • • Full compatibility with the old logfile format (*. At creation time. hardware identifiers.1.0 9 . or filtered to show only one device or one type of activity. CS voice support will follow in a later release. Some of this metadata is also visible in Windows Explorer. is the successor of PESQ. Here you can view not only general information (time and space coordinates.863 standard.log) is of course maintained. and more) but also: • A list of the participating devices with accompanying key properties (capabilities. POLQA is introduced in TEMS Investigation 14.trp.2. 3G and 4G/LTE. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. New Logfile Format The old logfile format (*. The POLQA (Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis) algorithm is designed along similar lines as PESQ. you can hide data from selected devices in the logfile presentation. Speech Quality Measurement with POLQA POLQA. Activity statistics: Total/succeeded/failed/aborted. being a reference-based method that compares the degraded speech with the undistorted original to assess NT12-2533 ver 1. you can opt to record only a subset of the activated devices. extensive information about the file appears on a new Navigator tab called the Logfile tab.3. In logfile recording controlled by a script. If you wish.Chapter 2. The logfile size is significantly reduced compared to the LOG format.0 as a speech quality measurement algorithm for VoIP.log) is replaced in TEMS Investigation 14. The new format embodies a more flexible and versatile framework for recording of measurement data: • Multiple logfiles can be recorded in parallel. defined in the ITU P. you can tag logfiles with metadata which can serve as an aid to locating. being specially developed for HD voice. and more). The activities of one device can be recorded in any number of logfiles simultaneously. and categorizing the files later on. presented in the same way as in live mode. A complete chronology of the activities performed by all devices. The chronology can be grouped by device or activity type. descriptive metadata added at recording time. and their outcomes.0 by a new format with extension . 2. and VoIP. • • • When loading a completed logfile into TEMS Investigation later on for analysis.

Optionally. data. However. filtering. it has been refined to eliminate known weaknesses of PESQ. GSM scanning capabilities of Rohde & Schwarz TSMW are now utilized: LTE: TDD and FDD pilot scans can be run in parallel on Rohde & Schwarz TSMW.1. 10 . and Highlighting in Message Windows New functions for searching.TEMS Investigation 14. and multimedia application services.0 User’s Manual quality.1. Hide messages of a selected type. Performance for CDMA speech codecs and hence for CDMA networks in general. and visual highlighting have been implemented in message windows in order to accelerate analysis. Case and whole-word matching is available. Performance for higher-bandwidth audio signals (wideband. static ARFCN set RSSI scanning: BSIC decoding RSSI scanning: C/I measurement. Filtering. Relaxed handling of scanning configuration sets. allowing multiple devices to scan concurrently using different configuration sets. the full message contents can be searched. A “find next/find previous” feature is included for easy stepping back and forth between hits (can be done with the keyboard arrow keys). Searching. Show only messages of a selected type. • • 2. • • • 2. which has been removed. One example is the effects of packet loss and of packet loss concealment. You can: • Find arbitrary text in message headers.5. • – – – • • Expansion of Scanning Capabilities RSSI scanning.4. The search functions essentially correspond to the Find in Logfile feature in previous product versions. superwideband). Highlight selected types of messages in unique colors. particularly in these areas: • Handling of new and complex types of distortions that arise from today’s convergence and coexistence of voice.

Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. Command-line controlled export can be scheduled with the generic scheduling functionality in Windows.). Logfile Export Enhancements The logfile export tool has been repackaged into a separate executable which can alternatively be run from a Windows command prompt.0 11 .1. 2. for example. which can be installed under Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008/2003. multiple concurrent FTP download sessions with one device simply by putting the sessions in parallel branches in your script. The Parallel (workflow branching) structure has been amplified in one important respect: Within such a structure you can now assign multiple activities of the same type to the same device.6. Improved Service Testing Capabilities HTTP download testing can optionally be done with Internet Explorer 9 instead of TEMS Investigation’s built-in Web browser.1. All of these features help you manage logfile export more smoothly and save time. This means that you can set up. You can use this activity to halt execution: • • • until a given time of day (with optional subsequent repetition of activities that are placed in a loop with the Wait For activity) until a given event (or one event from a defined set) occurs until an activity in another workflow branch concludes with a stipulated outcome. This affects exported information elements and events in precisely the same way as cell files loaded in TEMS Investigation enrich the presentation in the application user interface (populating information elements that require cell file data.7. the license server NT12-2533 ver 1. There is no need to pass special session concurrency parameters with the FTP testing activity. facilitating management of network licenses and adding traceability. Command line switches are provided for all aspects of the export setup that are configurable from within TEMS Investigation. etc. In this Web-based portal.Chapter 2.8. Improved HASP Soft License Handling A license manager portal is introduced. 2. Cell files can now be included when exporting logfiles. Two new HTTP information elements are provided (regardless of browser used): total document size and download time.1. Flow control in scripting is rendered more powerful with the new Wait For activity.

“Category” fields are provided for convenient grouping of users. Side by side with the license manager portal. 2. HSUPA Category 6 (5. users detach licenses to their local machines.76 Mbit/s) Huawei E353 LG P505 12 . The client works over a VPN.4 GHz) HSDPA Category 10 (14. From this utility.1 regarding control functions – – – – – – • • WCDMA/HSPA 900/2100 MHz (LT18i) WCDMA/HSPA 800/850/1900/2100 MHz (LT18a) GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 MHz Google Android 2.1.4 Mbit/s). Reports on license usage can be generated and also exported in comma-separated (CSV) format.3 Qualcomm Snapdragon MSM8255 (1.9. Further constraints such as license expiry dates can be defined.1.TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual administrator assigns to each TEMS Investigation user the products they are allowed to detach and sets a maximum detach duration. New Connectable User Terminals LTE Devices • • • • • • • Huawei M920 LG LS840 (LG Viper) LG MS840 (LG Connect 4G) LG P936 (LG Optimus) Samsung SCH-R920 Samsung SCH-R940 ZTE N910 UMTS Devices • Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S: See also section 2. a client license manager with a graphical user interface is provided. and the main benefit it brings is that it greatly reduces the risk of detaching the wrong license by mistake.

1 Alternative Mobile-to-mobile AQM Solution This is a cost-efficient solution for mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement.1 and 13.1.2. Since the voice calls are made between the mobiles. which call each other in pairs. are connected to an Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) which relays the audio to the PC. 2.2. A number of events – some new.2. The mobile-to-mobile AQM solution is in principle RAT-independent. so that no separate processing power is required in the Audio Capturing Unit.2. just as in the existing TEMS Investigation AQM setup. there is also no Call Generator or similar component in this AQM configuration.2. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation • • LG P509 Sharp 006SH 2. The PESQ calculation is done by the PC itself.1 it was implemented for the following phones: Sony Ericsson Xperia arc. The activities of the devices are completely controlled from TEMS Investigation by means of a Service Control script. Two or four mobile devices. Huawei C8600 (CDMA).2.10. Sony Ericsson W995.2. Enhancements in Recent Maintenance Releases Please also note the enhancements introduced in the maintenance releases 13. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13. These are dealt with in sections 2.0 13 .1. 2. Nokia C7-00 (GSM/WCDMA). In TEMS Investigation 13.Chapter 2. Event categories: • • • Call setup events Inter-RAT events Attach events NT12-2533 ver 1.1. CS Fallback Events and Information The “circuit-switched fallback” mechanism allows a user terminal connected to EUTRAN to access the CS domain via GERAN or UTRAN.11 and 2. 2.12 below. some expanded in scope – report on the resulting interaction between the terminal and networks.1.

2. TEMS Investigation also permits connection of multiple Qualcomm-based LTE devices.1 allows connection of devices built on a range of Qualcomm CDMA/EV-DO Rev.2.3.TEMS Investigation 14. I) GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 HSUPA Category 6 (5.2. Presented information elements subdivide into three categories: • • • Basic radio parameters Multicarrier serving channel information Forward link multicarrier RLP throughput 2. CDMA/EV-DO Rev. 2.76 Mbit/s). • New Connectable User Terminals Sequans TD-LTE USB modem SQN3010A-USB-M1.4. MME Group Id. B Measurement and Analysis Rev. RACH Result.2.6. without using an external connection manager. that is. Improved Handling of Qualcomm-based LTE Devices Network connect can be performed for Qualcomm chipset-based LTE devices from within TEMS Investigation. TEMS Investigation 13. operating on LTE Band 40 (2300–2400 MHz) and based on TD-LTE-capable chipset SQN3010 Samsung Galaxy S 4G – – – – Android-based WCDMA/HSPA 1700/2100 and 2100 (Bands IV. Preamble Step Size.0 User’s Manual 2. The implementation was verified with the Huawei EC367-2 device. Extended Set of LTE RACH Information Elements A collection of new information elements deals with the RACH procedure in LTE: RACH Type.5. HSDPA Category 14 (21 Mbit/s) • 14 . and MME Code. RACH Reason. B of the EV-DO (TIA-856) standard introduces multicarrier data transfer in EV-DO.2. RACH Preamble Responses with PUSCH Resource. B chipsets.

VIII.0 15 . HSDPA Category 24 (42 Mbit/s) BandLuxe C501 Huawei E392 Sierra Wireless AirCard 313U Huawei E367 Huawei E372 Novatel Option MC996D Huawei C8600 Huawei EC367-2 Huawei M860 Kyocera S1350 LG KV600 LG KV755 Samsung SCH-R720 ZTE AC8710 Sierra Wireless AirCard 319U Other new LTE devices: Other new UMTS devices: New CDMA devices: 2.7. There are no restrictions on supported frequency bands (30 MHz to 6 GHz).76 Mbit/s). WCDMA Scanning with Rohde & Schwarz WCDMA pilot (Top N) scanning can be undertaken with Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanners. II. I) GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 HSUPA Category 6 (5. NT12-2533 ver 1.Chapter 2. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation – • – – – – • – – – • – – – • – – – – – – – – Advanced control functionality Dual-Carrier HSPA+ USB modem from Sierra Wireless WCDMA/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100 (Bands V.2.

• Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.2. 16 . • – • • • • Support added for Samsung Galaxy S II LTE. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Max). Support added for Novatel Ovation MC551 4G LTE USB modem (Band 13).2.1.11. 2. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Min). CDMA Scanning with PCTel SeeGull MX Support was added for CDMA scanning (PN scan. This feature is a time-saver that reduces the hours you have to spend on drive testing.2. Support added for Anydata ADU-895A (CDMA/EV-DO Rev.0 User’s Manual 2.10. RSSI scan) with PCTel SeeGull MX. Support added for Huawei U6100 (HSPA). HS Transport Block Size (Median). Software Update Service A TEMS Investigation software update service was introduced. all with arguments for stream 0 and stream 1.8.2. 2. B.9. HS Transport Block Size (Max). Min/max/median versions of HS transport block size IEs introduced: – HS Transport Block Size (Min). 450 MHz). This service checks for new patch releases on a regular basis. • • • New Connectable Scanners PCTel SeeGull MX LTE 800/900/1800/2600 + WCDMA 900/2100 + GSM 900/1800 PCTel SeeGull MX WCDMA 850/1900/2100 AWS + GSM 850/1900 + CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900/2100 AWS Anritsu ML8780A 2. one PN scan on a cdma2000 frequency and one on an EV-DO frequency. HS MIMO Transport Block Size (Median).TEMS Investigation 14. The new feature streamlines administration processes and minimizes waiting time. all with arguments for primary carrier and secondary carrier.1 Multiple concurrent PN scans can be performed with PCTel MX and EX scanners: for example.

The buttons are generously sized to permit easy and accurate tapping on a touch screen while walking around. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. which incorporate building and floor plan information as well as the planned routes you create. Logfiles recorded when walking planned routes are saved in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles.0 17 . and step backward to the previous waypoint in case you want to repeat a part of the route. Support added for Altair DC-E3100 chipset (no devices commercially available at the time of releasing TEMS Investigation 13. Support added for the following devices: – – – – – – Datang/Leadcore LC8143 HTC Vivid (PH39100) LG MS695 Quanta LU220 Samsung SCH-R920 (Chief) Samsung SGH-I727 (Galaxy S II Skyrocket) • • • • NT12-2533 ver 1. and inter-RAT). and sounding reference signals (SRS). inter-frequency.1. promoting an efficient work process and saving time and money. User actions are reduced to the clicking of three buttons: commit to a waypoint on reaching it. To the HTTP Get script activity have been added two new options: terminate session after a specified duration. Indoor testing with the Pinpoint Window is fully aligned and compatible with TEMS Pocket (which likewise supports pre-planned routes) as well as with post-processing in TEMS Discovery. The point of pre-planning routes is to render route walks as simple as possible.1. or after downloading a specified amount of data. DCI format usage on PDCCH. These relate mainly to: cell reselection parameter settings and measurements (intra-frequency.Chapter 2.2 The existing indoor measurement solution was complemented with a new Pinpoint Window. where you create and walk pre-planned indoor test routes. • A large number of new LTE information elements have been introduced. discontinuous reception (DRX).12. Support added for GSM scanning with Rohde & Schwarz TSMW. are saved in the iBwave Design container format (*.2.ibwc). step forward to the next waypoint. Indoor map sets. • Enhancements in TEMS Investigation 13.2).

Any IPbased activity in the Service Control Designer. and all IP information elements will then be populated. 2. The data set obtained is similar to FDD and includes RSRP.3.3. Up until the 13. Selection of Preferred Workspace at Startup When you start TEMS Investigation 13.2. 2.0 introduced scanning support also for the TDD mode. you are invited to select what workspace to use: one recently used. Please note that lower-layer data (RF.0 expanded the concept of data service testing. etc. known as TD-LTE. or a wide variety of network cards. Data Service Performance Verification with Generic Device TEMS Investigation 13. embedded modules.3. See section 4. however.0. USB modems. can be run on such a device.0 version. TEMS Investigation 13. iPhone or BlackBerry units.1. LTE support in TEMS Investigation was restricted to FDD. or a new one that is empty. Layer 3) is not obtained with this kind of testing.0 TD-LTE Support The LTE standard allows both frequency division duplex (FDD) and time division duplex (TDD) operation. as will be desirable prior to launching them in the network.TEMS Investigation 14. What Was New in TEMS Investigation 13. some other existing workspace. Layer 2.3. With the 13. Using a Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Universal Radio Network Analyzer. 18 . it is possible to do Top-N LTE signal scanning in both TDD and FDD mode. RSRQ.0 version.0 User’s Manual – – Samsung SGH-I997 (Galaxy S Infuse 4G) ZTE X500 2. taking it to a whole new level of genericity. This feature can be used to verify application layer performance for arbitrary devices. as well as video streaming.2.3. 2. and SCH CINR. Any LTE frequency band can be scanned. data service testing can be undertaken with any off-the-shelf device as long as it comes with Windows drivers that enable an IP data connection – for example.

The TEMS Settings Manager boosts usability by enabling easy distribution of configuration data among users and among instances of TEMS Investigation. and PUSCH BLER.0 19 .3.4.2 Mbit/s). New Utility for Sharing Script Configuration Settings The TEMS Settings Manager is a utility which lets you save to file any service and scanner settings that are used for service testing. 2.2.1. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. many LTE elements previously available only with LG devices are also obtainable with Qualcomm devices.0 Mbit/s) Nokia C7-00 NT12-2533 ver 1. • – – – – • – – – New Connectable Equipment UMTS Terminals Sony Ericsson Xperia arc (Android-based smartphone): GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA/HSPA 900/2100 (LT15i) WCDMA/HSPA 800/850/1900/2100 (LT15a) HSDPA Category 8 (7.2 Mbit/s).18.3.Chapter 2. 2. such a file may contain all details of how to perform an LTE Reference Signal scan with a PCTel MX scanner. The utility can also be seen as a complement to the script saving function in the Service Control Designer.76 Mbit/s) WCDMA/HSPA 850/900/1700/1900/2100 MHz GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 MHz HSDPA Category 9 (10.3.6. or all the parameters needed to access and interact with a particular FTP server. which creates files specifying the activities to perform during testing. New LTE Information Elements With LG devices. HSUPA Category 5 (2.5. HSUPA Category 6 (5. using TEMS Investigation 13.6.3. 2. including PDSCH Transmission Distribution.0. See section 20. Furthermore. a range of additional LTE information elements are obtained. PBCH BLER. For example.

Scanner capabilities include: • • Support for all LTE frequency bands: 30 MHz to 6 GHz Top N LTE signal scanning for TDD as well as FDD The R&S TSMW scanner handles a range of other technologies.2. Performance Improvements For any given device configuration and test setup.7.1.3.3. Support for 64-bit Windows 7 TEMS Investigation 13. since it is subject to export restrictions due to its use of strong encryption. Compare section 2.0 User’s Manual • HTC Imagio 2.7.9. and support for these is planned for inclusion in future releases of TEMS Investigation. which sends logins and passwords in plain text.2. TEMS Investigation 13.8. Unlike the Telnet protocol.16. 2. see section 2.0.0. Other improvements include better memory management and reduced start-up time. SSH2 uses cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and therefore renders the Iperf server less vulnerable to hacker attacks. 20 .1 2. 2.TEMS Investigation 14. See section 20.0 can be run under 64-bit Windows 7. SSH2 requires a separate license option and installation package. Such technology expansions will then be possible to do remotely by means of a scanner software upgrade.3.3.3.0 generates lower CPU load than previous versions. Support for SSH2 Protocol in Iperf Testing The SSH2 protocol (Secure Shell version 2) is offered as an alternative to Telnet as connection client when doing Network Bandwidth testing with Iperf.15.3.6. LTE Scanner: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The R&S TSMW Universal Radio Network Analyzer enables TD-LTE measurements in TEMS Investigation 13. 1. Update to this text: GSM and WCDMA scanning is supported with R&S TSMW in TEMS Investigation 14.

Special Subframe Configuration. UL/DL Configuration. MTSI Registration Time (s). 2. Underruns. MTSI Session Setup Failure Ratio (%). Position of Minimum k Distribution. Np and Np+1 Distribution. • • • • • NT12-2533 ver 1. PCFICH CFI Information. Recently Introduced Features in TEMS Investigation 2. MTSI Session Completion Failure Ratio (%). PBCH BLER. • • Additional New Features Internal GPS of PCTel MX available as data source in TEMS Investigation.0 21 . MTSI Session Setup Time (s).1 Improved VoIP testing: PJSIP VoIP client added as alternative to CounterPath. Decoding Errors. UMTS network connect can be done from within TEMS Investigation with Samsung GT-B3730.11. Events generated enabling computation of the following VoIP KPIs: MTSI Registration Failure Ratio (%). The KPI computation itself is done in TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic. Size Increase (frequency of jitter buffer size increases). Timestamps given with 1 ms resolution in message windows and logfile text format export. Support added for LG FM300. Average/Min/Max Playout Delay.Chapter 2. – – – • TD-LTE information elements introduced: Ack Reporting Mode. • – – New Features in TEMS Investigation 13. PDSCH Transmission Distribution elements. Possible to select AMR-NB or AMR-WB as VoIP speech codec.3. Support added for LG MN270. UL/DL Configuration Type. HSUPA: New information element “HS UL E-DCH TTI (ms)” indicating TTI length (2 ms or 10 ms).0.3. Overruns. Possible to select AMR speech codec rate. Extensive set of VoIP jitter buffer metrics obtained as information elements: RFC 1889 Jitter. More LTE information elements obtainable with Qualcomm chipset based devices: MAC PDU Handover Interruption Time. GT-B3740 LTE/UMTS dual-technology devices. nCCE Average/Min/Max.10. Lost Packets. PUSCH Phy Throughput.

22 . Support added for Samsung SCH-R380. Support added for Vodafone K5005. Support added for Samsung SGH-A307 (LTE part). Support added for Sierra Wireless AC320U.0 User’s Manual • • • • • • • • • Support added for Qualcomm TD9200 TDD. Support added for ZTE MF682.TEMS Investigation 14. Support added for Samsung SCH-I510. Support added for ZTE AL611. Support added for ZTE AL621.

TEMS Investigation can be launched from the Start menu. 3. Basics of TEMS Investigation This chapter guides you through some fundamentals of TEMS Investigation.2. Starting TEMS Investigation Once installed. To obtain a genuine understanding of the presented information. 3. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 23 . 3. In Windows Vista and Windows 7 you must run the application as administrator. Basics of TEMS Investigation 3. you need a working knowledge of the wireless technologies concerned.2. chapter 5 and section 8. The overall structure of the user interface is described in more detail in chapters 4 and 5. familiarity with Windows is useful. Installing TEMS Investigation See the Getting Started Manual. • Choose Start  Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  TEMS Investigation 14.3.4.0. Quick Guide to the User Interface This section gives a quick overview of the TEMS Investigation user interface.Chapter 3. This option is selected by right-clicking the Start menu item above and choosing Properties  Shortcut tab  Advanced. Note: We recommend that you plug the external equipment you are going to use into the PC before starting TEMS Investigation. 3.1. Recommended Skills Since TEMS Investigation is a Windows application.

change the mode of presentation of information elements. and manage your worksheets. Most of the toolbar buttons are mirrored in the menus. From here you also open presentation windows. you can divide your workspace into several worksheets.0 User’s Manual Toolbars Menu bar Worksheet Navigator Status bar Workspace and Worksheets The entity that stores all the windows and settings used in a working session is called the workspace. Toolbars The toolbars provide shortcuts to certain functions in the application. To manage your windows more smoothly. Only one workspace can be open at a time. particularly those relating to logfile recording and analysis.TEMS Investigation 14. Navigator From the Navigator you manage your connected equipment or view information on the currently loaded logfile. Up to ten worksheets can be active simultaneously. 24 .

Basics of TEMS Investigation Menu Bar The menus mirror the toolbars as well as the Navigator’s Menu and Worksheets tabs. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 25 .Chapter 3. Status Bar The status bar displays various messages that indicate the current status of the application.

nor is the current mode shown there.1. To be able to open a logfile. 26 . At the beginning of a session.0 User’s Manual 4. As soon as you activate external equipment. you must first deactivate all currently active external devices.) In drive testing mode you can record new logfiles. The terminology is used in the manual to clarify how things work. User Interface This chapter goes through the user interface in more detail. Deactivating all external devices returns the application to analysis mode. This means that: • • If you have a logfile open. User Modes TEMS Investigation can be run in two different modes. and one for logfile analysis: • Drive testing mode: The information presented on the screen is obtained from data-collecting devices connected to the PC and activated in TEMS Investigation. Analysis mode: The presented information is read from a logfile which you have loaded in order to inspect and analyze it. you must close it before you can activate external devices. one for testing and recording. however. the application is in analysis mode.4. see section 8. 4. it switches to drive testing mode and remains in this mode as long as some external device is activated. Note: You do not set the working mode explicitly in the user interface.TEMS Investigation 14. and can be seen as an expanded version of section 3. (Regarding the “activate” operation. • The two modes are mutually exclusive.4.

empty workspace.2. where it is automatically selected. The chosen workspace is added to the workspace list in the dialog above. Archived Material: This option takes you to the regular open workspace dialog.tdc). A timer in the lower left corner indicates the remaining time. 4. User Interface 4. The workspace selection dialog closes automatically after 10 seconds if there is no user interaction.Chapter 4.0 27 . Create a New Workspace: This option creates a new.2. Settings include information on connected external devices. the default workspace (identified in the dialog) is opened. you handle workspaces NT12-2533 ver 1.1. The dialog cannot be opened again. If you click OK without making any selection in the dialog shown above. Workspaces and Worksheets Workspaces The environment that stores all the windows and settings used in a working session is called the workspace. When you start TEMS Investigation. a workspace selection dialog opens: • • • Open a Recent Workspace: Here you can open an existing workspace by selecting it from a list of recently used workspace files (*. later on. Only one workspace can be open at a time. Click OK and TEMS Investigation will start with the chosen workspace. where you browse the file system to select a workspace file.

TEMS Investigation 14. Up to ten worksheets can be active simultaneously. save the workspace under a different name. you can use the Command Prompt to launch TEMS Investigation with a specific workspace. which has a number of worksheets dedicated to different purposes.1. Predefined Workspaces Besides the default workspace. give the following command: investigation.2.2. TEMS Investigation 14.4 for further details). All of the commands that follow need to be executed from the directory <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application.tdc To start the application with the most recently used workspace.2. They all normally reside in the following directory: • • Windows 7.0 User’s Manual from the File and View toolbar (see section 4.0\Workspaces Note: You cannot save changes to the predefined workspaces. 4. This is already done in the default workspace. as shown by their designations. 4. 28 .exe -newwksp • • 4. Worksheets To manage your windows more smoothly. you can divide your workspace into several worksheets.exe -recent To start the application without loading any existing workspace.0 cannot load workspaces from older TEMS Investigation versions. whether predefined or user-created. • If you know the exact name of the workspace you want to use.2. give the following command: investigation.1.3.1. you can launch TEMS Investigation with that workspace loaded by giving the following command: investigation. Opening Workspaces from a Command Prompt Alternatively.exe <workspace name>. or alternatively from the File menu. some further predefined workspaces are supplied.2. Windows Vista: C:\Users\<user>\Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. To save your modifications.0\Workspaces Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<user>\My Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14.

4.1.3. The Toolbars The toolbars in the main window give speedy access to some of the most central functions of TEMS Investigation. User Interface Worksheets are handled from the Worksheet menu. not the full contents of the file. The toolbars are mirrored in the menus (see section 4. Recording properties are set from the Logfile menu.0 29 . Report Toolbar Generate Report: Generate a report from one or several logfiles. When you copy a worksheet. See section 11. see section 11.2. 4. Insert Filemark: Insert a filemark in the logfile. Equipment handling is done from the Equipment tab of the Navigator. See section 11.3. Record Toolbar Start/Stop Recording: Start/stop recording a logfile.1.3. 4.2. NT12-2533 ver 1. When you stop the recording. which can also be accessed by right-clicking in a worksheet.2.3. Open/Close Logfile: Open a logfile/Close the logfile that is currently open.5). see chapters 7–9. the device channel (“MS”/“DC”) index is incremented in all windows: for example. 4. Replay Toolbar This toolbar is accessible in analysis mode. Fast Forward/Stop: Start or resume loading of the opened logfile/Stop loading of the opened logfile.1. the logfile is closed. This allows you to instantly duplicate a worksheet for a different device. “MS1” is replaced by “MS2”. For a full description of the recording function.Chapter 4. Note that this operation only presents logfile metadata.3.

Compare section 11. Open Workspace: Open a saved workspace. The Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays symbols and short messages concerning the current status of the application and of external devices. 4.4. otherwise directs you to the online help: 4. Print Preview: Show a preview of the window printout. Toggle Full Screen: Toggle between full screen and normal mode. During loading of a logfile.4. the progress bar shows what proportion of the logfile has been loaded. Save Workspace: Save a workspace. 4. 30 .0 User’s Manual See section 11. “Play” Section This section is active in analysis mode.8.4.1.2.3.4.TEMS Investigation 14. Print: Print the selected window. File and View Toolbar New Workspace: Create a new workspace. It is divided into the following sections: 4.2. Help Section Shows a help text when you point to a button or combo box on the main window toolbars.

and Configuration Menus These menus mirror the Menu tab of the Navigator.1. 11. View Menu From here you choose which toolbars and which other tools should be visible. “Record” Section This section is active in drive testing mode.5. Window Menu This is a standard window manager. User Interface 4.0 31 . The Full Screen mode hides the Navigator.Chapter 4. a rolling progress bar is displayed here. From here you can also set recording properties. 4. and 11.1.3. Presentation.2. and generate logfile reports (see sections 11. this menu mirrors part of the File and View toolbar. Control. Help Menu Gives access to online help. NT12-2533 ver 1. When some form of logfile recording is ongoing. Logfile Menu The Logfile menu mirrors the Record and Replay toolbars. File Menu The Menu Bar Apart from holding some standard File menu commands. Worksheet Menu From this menu you manage your worksheets.8 respectively).6.4. containing the same information as this manual. Compare section 11. and to the about page. export logfiles.

0 User’s Manual 4. Keyboard Shortcuts A number of central operations in TEMS Investigation.6. can also be performed from the keyboard. as well as many standard file and edit operations. 32 . A list of keyboard shortcuts is found in appendix A.TEMS Investigation 14.

You can hide the Navigator by switching to full screen mode (done from the View menu or from the File and View toolbar). The Navigator 5. double-click the corresponding symbol. To open a window. Menu Tab The Menu tab lists most types of windows that are available in the application. 5. or drag the symbol from the Navigator to the worksheet where you want it. chapter 8 for descriptions of the contents of individual presentation windows.1 the Menu tab. used for equipment handling: section 5. How the windows work and how they can be configured is covered in the present document: see chapters 23– 31. listing the types of windows provided: section 5. Control.0 33 . All Navigator windows can also be opened from the menu bar. See Information Elements and Events. The Navigator has the following tabs: • • • • • the Equipment tab.4 the Worksheets tab. and Configuration. giving an overview of your current workspace configuration: section 5. allows you to set up and manage your workspace and your external equipment. They are divided into the categories Presentation. The Navigator The Navigator pane.Chapter 5. showing information on the logfile currently loaded: section 5. listing information elements: section 5.2.1. located on the left in the TEMS Investigation main window. Equipment Tab See chapters 7–9. NT12-2533 ver 1. 5.3 the Logfile tab.5.2 the Info Element tab.

5. see section 23. these settings are automatically used unless you have specified a different usage in that particular window (possible only with colors in certain window types. • Editing the Color Ranges of Information Elements If you want to add color ranges to an information element.3. right-click the element in the Navigator and select Add  Color. Please use the alphabetical index to locate them.TEMS Investigation 14. Info Element Tab The Info Element tab lists all the information elements handled by TEMS Investigation. 5. The attributes are edited from the Info Element tab. When you add an information element to a presentation window.3. others do not. Some numeric elements have such presentation attributes defined by default.0 User’s Manual The control and configuration windows are also described in this volume.5). see section 5.1.2. Size: Range of plot marker sizes encoding the IE value in Map windows. Symbol: Range of plot marker shapes (symbols) encoding the IE value in Map windows.3. see Information Elements and Events. those not of type “Text”) can be defined presentation attributes which determine the graphical presentation of the element as a function of its numeric value. Regarding information element categories.2. Presentation Attributes of Information Elements For all numeric information elements (that is. 34 . The attributes are: • • • Color: Range of colors used to encode the IE value (in a variety of presentation windows). 5.3.

The Navigator • If you want to edit the default color ranges of an information element.0 35 . choose colors for the extremes of the value range.2. continue as follows: 5. double-click the information element to expand it and show the presentation attributes. NT12-2533 ver 1.3. • • Set the number of intervals. In either case.Chapter 5. • Automatic Setup of Color Ranges This is the easiest way to set up color ranges. Click Auto Setup. Under From Color and To Color. then double-click Color.1.

See section 5. To delete an interval. If you delete parts of the color range so that no color is defined for some values. Manual Setup of Color Ranges If you prefer to assemble your color range interval by interval. set the endpoints of the interval. Editing the Marker Sizes and Symbols of Information Elements Ranges for map plot marker sizes and symbols are edited in exactly the same way as color ranges. • • To edit an interval. When you click OK. 5.2. the intermediate color is chosen automatically based on the “From” and “To” colors.3. select it and click Delete. A single remaining interval cannot be deleted. select it.2. click Edit.3. and make your changes. these values will be drawn in black.3. follow these steps: • To add an interval.0 User’s Manual • Check the Via Color box if you want to use a specific color in the middle of the range.2. 5. and choose a color. If you do not check the Via Color box. 5.3.2 above. a color range is created automatically with evenly sized intervals and suitable intermediate colors. nor can the color range as a whole be removed.4. 36 . Logfile Tab See section 11.TEMS Investigation 14. click Add.

5. You can rearrange windows from this tab by dragging them between the worksheet folders. Worksheets Tab The Worksheets tab lists the worksheets currently active in the workspace.0 37 . Each worksheet is represented by a folder containing the windows in this worksheet. Double-clicking on a symbol will make that particular window (and the worksheet it is placed on) active. The Navigator 5. NT12-2533 ver 1.Chapter 5.

TEMS Investigation specific format (*.0 User’s Manual 6. This format is for UMTS only. section 4. in a file with a plain-text. Cell data is also made use of in logfile reports. Regarding TEMS Investigation CDMA CSV cell files in general. Cell Data TEMS Investigation can present information on individual cells in cellular networks. relying on the data types in TEMSDataTypes. Creating a Cell File in XML Format The XML-format cell file uses two XML schemas.1. and fill in the data from there. GSM and WCDMA cells can be mixed in one file.3. See section 6. see the Technical Reference. derived from the fundamental data types set down in the XML specification.cel).1. which are found in the directory XMLSchema beneath the TEMS Investigation installation directory: • The schema TEMSDataTypes.xsd.xsd defines XML attributes and elements that embody cell and site data.xml) whose format is common to several TEMS products: See section 6.2. Cell data can be provided in two ways: • • in a plain-text XML file (*. chapter 4.TEMS Investigation 14. The schema TEMSCell. In particular. CDMA cell files in TEMS Investigation CDMA CSV format can be converted to the XML format using TEMS Discovery. 6. it is possible to draw cells on maps and to display cell names in various windows.xsd defines TEMS-specific XML data types. • The most convenient way of composing XML-format cell files is to load the above schemas into a suitable XML development tool. A full description of the XML format is found in the Technical Reference. 38 .

3.5.0 39 . 31.5.5. click OK. The set of loaded cell files can be modified at any time. no attempt is made to correlate CEL and XML cell information. Cell Data 6.1. • • • • • From the Navigator’s Menu tab. open the General window.5.5. See sections 31. click the Add button and browse to select your file. You can have several cell files loaded in the application at the same time. and 31. 6. the information in all files is correlated in the presentation.Chapter 6. If you use a spreadsheet application to edit CEL files. chapter 3. Loading Cell Files To make a cell file active. To add a cell file. To remove a cell file from the list. XML cell files created with Mentum CellPlanner can be loaded into TEMS Investigation. When you are done selecting cell files to load. However. be sure to save them in tab-delimited plain text format. click Remove all. it must be loaded in the General window. 6. if you load both CEL and XML files. rather. Loading Cell Data from Mentum CellPlanner Mentum CellPlanner uses the XML format for cell data. It is described exhaustively in the Technical Reference. Creating a Cell File in CEL Format The CEL format is a unified version allowing both GSM and WCDMA cells in the same file.5. To remove all cell files.2.3.4. The cell file is added in the list box.5. Use of Cell Data in Presentations Once cell data has been loaded. In the General window. Otherwise.4. double-click the item Cellfile Load. NT12-2533 ver 1. the following functions become available in the application: • Drawing of cells and indication of neighbor relations and channel usage on the map. cell information is presented separately from each type of file. If multiple files of the same type (CEL or XML) are loaded. unwanted characters might be inserted which prevent TEMS Investigation from interpreting the file correctly. 6. select it and click Remove.

6.5.2. See the Technical Reference. See section 31. • • • • 40 . line charts. See section 31.2–24. chapter 7. Best server indication on the map.5.TEMS Investigation 14. Generation of events detecting (probable) missing neighbors. Presentation of cell names in status windows. See Information Elements and Events. See section 31.4. Presentation of cell data on the Info tab of a Map window. Line charts: section 29.0 User’s Manual • • • Serving cell and handover indication on the map.5.4. based on scan data.2. and bar charts. In logfile reports: Association of statistics with individual cells. section 9. Bar charts: section 30.3.5. See Information Elements and Events.3. Configuration of status windows is covered in sections 24. Computation of cell ranking based on these statistics. chapter 3 (“Cell Distance” IEs). Indication of distance from current position to current serving cell.3.

Chapter 7. The in-focus device can be changed with a context menu command. can be automated using the Service Control tool.2. which is covered in chapter 20. 7.0. The functionality here relates to the device that is currently selected in the top pane. See chapter 9. Overview of User Interface Components Dealing with External Equipment Equipment tab of Navigator: • Top pane: – Shows the devices currently plugged into the PC and has controls for activating and deactivating the devices in TEMS Investigation. Managing External Equipment: General This chapter summarizes how external equipment is handled in TEMS Investigation 14. See chapter 21. Connectable Equipment The range of equipment that is compatible with TEMS Investigation is given in the Getting Started Manual. Managing External Equipment: General 7. Provides shortcut to device properties. One device at a time is in focus in this pane. Activities tab: From here you can manually apply various commands to and perform various actions with the selected device. chapter 10. See chapter 8.1. – – • Bottom pane: – – NT12-2533 ver 1.0 41 . Full details follow in chapters 8–10. 7. All of these tasks. and many more besides.

its purpose is to give an at-a-glance overview of vital data in one place. For further information. of equipment connected.0 User’s Manual – Information tab: Shows some basic data on the selected device. turn to chapter 10. The information shown in this window can be found in other places in the application or can be retrieved with the Computer Diagnostics tool.3. See section 8. and of the PC.TEMS Investigation 14. Status Control Monitor: This window gives a quick overview of the status of current tasks. 42 .

1. External devices supported by TEMS Investigation are automatically detected by the application after they have been plugged into the PC. Plugging In External Equipment Note first of all that devices may be mounted in an equipment case. NT12-2533 ver 1. Special PC and Device Configuration Requirements Regarding device-specific preparations for running data services.1. Activating External Equipment This chapter describes how to activate external devices in TEMS Investigation for the purpose of data collection. so that they will not be plugged directly into the PC. These steps are covered in the Getting Started Manual as follows: Device Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal DRT scanner Andrew i. The only exceptions to this rule are handled using the Manual UE Configuration utility. section 7.Scan scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner GS Chapter 11 12 13 14 8.6. see the Getting Started Manual. For some devices. section 10.Chapter 8. see the Getting Started Manual. special configuration of both device and PC is required.0 43 . Activating External Equipment 8.

Other PCTel SeeGull LX scanners connect to a COM port. Plugging In Phones and Data Cards Most supported phones and data cards connect to the PC via USB. Andrew i. and so no startup command is sent to the scanning module.3. Anritsu ML8720 scanners connect to a COM port. and the Windows service “TEMS Device Manager” has detected the SRU. EX.) Flashing green: The SRU has sufficient power. 44 .Scan. – If the scanner is connected directly to the PC. Workaround: Restart the TEMS Device Manager service in Windows. 8. A single USB cable connects the USB port on the device to a USB port on the PC. The device has two USB plugs.1. the black one must always be connected. a 100Base-T crossover cable is used for this purpose. either directly on the PC or via a local area network. Rohde & Schwarz TSMW and DRT scanners connect to an Ethernet port.1. • Plugging In Scanners SRUs connect via USB. chapter 11. LX MM2. so that the SRU’s scanning module has started up. while the red one can optionally be used to power supply the device (the other option is to use an external 12 V power source).1.0 User’s Manual 8. or connect the power connector of the SRU cable to an external 12 V power source. (All OK. (See the Getting Started Manual. Plugging In Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals An Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal is connected to the PC by means of a LAN cable. and PCTel PCT scanners connect via USB.2. Anritsu ML8780A scanners connect via USB. Plug in the red USB plug. but the TEMS Device Manager has not started or cannot detect the SRU. The “Status” LED on the SRU front panel is interpreted as follows: – Steady green: The SRU has sufficient power. – – • • • • • PCTel SeeGull MX.) 8. Flashing red: The SRU does not have sufficient power to start up the scanning module.TEMS Investigation 14.1.

In Windows 7 and Windows Vista you must run the application as administrator. both should be connected to local area network ports with normal 100Base-T cables. a Sony Ericsson Z750i phone has been autodetected. Plugging In GPS Units Supported GPS units connect via USB or Bluetooth. 8.1. 8. 8. An audio cable is connected between the AQM module and its associated phone. Activating External Equipment – If the scanner and PC are to communicate over a local area network. This option is selected by right-clicking the Start menu item above and choosing Properties  Shortcut tab  Advanced.5. Plugging In Equipment Cases All supported equipment cases connect via USB.4. or to a COM port. Plugging In Stand-alone AQM Modules The stand-alone AQM module connects to the PC via USB. In the example below.6. 8. The Navigator Equipment Tab: Basics Top Pane All devices detected by TEMS Investigation are listed in the top pane of the Navigator’s Equipment tab.3. NT12-2533 ver 1.1. 8.0 45 . 8.2.0.Chapter 8.3.1.1. The AQM module also requires a separate 12 V power supply (the voltage provided through the USB connector is insufficient). • Starting TEMS Investigation Launch the application as follows: Choose Start  Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  TEMS Investigation 14.

1. device string is red Earth symbol Device is activated Device is deactivated Device activation or deactivation is in progress Device has no license: see section 8.1.3.3.5 8.1. It is possible to select an index that is already taken by another device.5 Device is selected as preferred GPS: see section 8. You can change the EQ index assigned to the device: see section 8.1.TEMS Investigation 14.3. external devices are represented by their channels (“MS”/“DC”/“PS”). Change Equipment: Select a number to change the device’s EQ index to that number. a context menu pops up containing the following commands: • • Activate.3. the two devices will then swap indices.3. • 46 . Deactivate: How to activate and deactivate devices is explained in section 8.0 User’s Manual Each device is represented by a numbered “EQ” item. The icon to the left of each device shows the status of the device in TEMS Investigation: No symbol added Red cross Hourglass Prohibited sign and label “NL”.4. Please note that in presentation windows. Device Context Menu If you right-click an EQ item. see chapter 21. Properties: This menu item takes you to the device properties. See section 23.

this may be because no phone number is defined on the SIM. A phone number retrieved by an AT command will always override a manually entered number. It will also be used on future occasions when the phone is plugged in. Bottom Pane “Activities” Subtab See chapter 9.2. Capabilities Identity IMSI Phone Number Shows the IMSI of a UMTS phone’s subscription. When you plug in a phone. the phone number will display here.3. Device identity. Examples: IP Sniff. or because the phone did not respond properly to the AT command. If a phone is going to measure AQM in a Call Generator/MRU configuration. NT12-2533 ver 1.2. 8. Editable field. Activating External Equipment 8. Air Interface. PESQ.0 47 . 8. the number of the phone must be known to TEMS Investigation. If no phone number shows. unless the AT command succeeds at that time.1.2.2. The number you enter will be used for this phone from now on. the autodetect procedure sends an AT command to it in order to find out the phone number. “Information” Subtab Capabilities of the device. In such cases you need to enter the phone number manually in this field. Data.3. which is usually stored on the SIM card. Examples of identification strings: • • • • IMEI for UMTS phones (in the EQ row) ESN for CDMA phones (in the EQ row) serial number for DRT scanners (in the EQ row) the identity of an AQM module paired with the phone (in the MS row). If this operation succeeds.Chapter 8. The phone number of a user terminal.3. Position.

and Windows has detected the device for the first time.4. the PC on which TEMS Investigation is running.2. 8. • • Detection of Equipment: Special Cases Detection of PCTel SeeGull EX Scanner Start up the scanner without the USB cable connected. you need to click the Refresh button to have it detected.3.3. Verizon branded. TEMS Investigation attempts detection of DRT and R&S scanners only at startup and when you click the Refresh button on the Navigator’s Equipment tab (see section 8.3. activate “Internet Sharing”. Wait until the LED turns green before plugging the USB cable into the scanner. AT&T branded. On other HTC Touch Pro2 phones. etc.3. pull the USB cable before doing so. Tethering means using a mobile device as a modem to provide Internet access to an unconnected device – in this case.3.TEMS Investigation 14. 48 . If you need to power cycle the scanner during use.3.3. • • Detection of PCTel SeeGull MX Scanner After installing the driver.6. The terminology used to refer to tethering differs between phones: • • On a Verizon branded phone. and do not reconnect it until the scanner has started up again (green LED). Detection of DRT Scanners and Rohde & Schwarz TSMW For technical reasons. 8.3. if you plug in one of those scanners after starting TEMS Investigation.3.3.1). 8. This can take up to 90 seconds (during which time the LED is pale green or orange). Detection of HTC Touch Pro2 Phones HTC Touch Pro2 phones (including HTC Imagio) need some configuring before TEMS Investigation can detect them.1. a brief description is given of what needs to be done. the scanner should be rebooted.0 User’s Manual 8.). 8. activate the “Modem link”. Always wait for the scanner to boot completely (LED turns dark green) before starting TEMS Investigation. Below. Therefore. On all phones you need to activate tethering via USB while the phone is connected to the PC by the USB cable. The details of the configuration differ depending on the phone (unbranded.3.

3. However. For instructions. set the Network Card device to enabled in the Device Detection Properties dialog (see section 8. please refer to section 20. For HTC Touch Pro2 phones generally. see section 11. this operation creates ports in Windows that TEMS Investigation can detect. See the Getting Started Manual. WLAN) is by default disabled. That means that KPI data cannot be collected with these phones.3. On all HTC Touch Pro2 phones except Verizon branded ones. only one phone at a time can be used with TEMS Investigation. IP sniffing needs to be disabled. it cannot of course be activated in TEMS Investigation. 8.1. you also need to install TCP Router software. • To enable detection of network adapters. Of phones having the “Internet Sharing” function. When a device has no license.Chapter 8.6.3. and the icon will be tagged with a “prohibited” sign and accompanied by the text “NL” (for “No License”): The same thing will happen if by plugging in a device you exceed the number of devices with which you can do simultaneous data collection.3). section 3.0 49 . Detection of Network Adapters Detection of network adapters (LAN. This is provided by Ascom in the form of a CAB file. it will still appear on the Navigator’s Equipment tab.6. NT12-2533 ver 1. the text for this device will be red.5. Detection of Equipment Not Covered by License If you plug in a type of device for which you have no license.1.3. This is to prevent an inordinate number of devices from appearing in TEMS Investigation when you are doing data collection with multiple devices. This limitation does not apply to the Verizon branded phones. You must enable network adapter detection if you want to transfer logfiles over a LAN or WLAN connection. Activating External Equipment In each case.3. as granted by your TEMS Investigation license.5.3. You must restart the application for the change to take effect.16. 8.

section 7. section 7. 50 . Then click OK. It creates an entry for the device that can be reused independently of the actual COM port number used for the device. click the button Start Manual UE Config. Normally there is no need to do this.0 User’s Manual 8. click the New button to create a new entry. select the device root node that contains the ports of interest. • • On the Device Configuration tab.1. A dialog titled Select your device appears. In the tree view. see the Getting Started Manual. User-assisted Detection of Devices If a device is not detected properly by TEMS Investigation.2. you can launch this utility by running the file <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application\ManualUEConfig. then you can run the Manual UE Configuration utility to help TEMS Investigation recognize the device. On the Equipment tab of the Navigator.TEMS Investigation 14.4. there are however certain devices for which you must use Manual UE Configuration as an aid to detection – see the Getting Started Manual.3. The Device Configuration tab is the most commonly used. • On the Port Configuration tab you create an entry that is directly mapped to a COM port number on the PC.exe.1. The Port Configuration tab is mainly used for Datang devices. Alternatively. although it is supported. The tool Manual UE Configuration has two tabs where you create different kinds of entries used in the detection phase: Device Configuration and Port Configuration.

4. Select the type of device to use and map each available port on the device to its function. This is necessary to update TEMS Investigation with the device configuration just defined. TEMS • • NT12-2533 ver 1. all ports of the device are listed.0 51 . Click the Refresh button in the Navigator. (If you are running the Manual UE Configuration utility independently.4. enter a name for the device. In the combo boxes on the right is indicated the functional assignment of each port in TEMS Investigation.) Under Type.Chapter 8.4. See also sections 8. click OK. • • • Under Name.3. Activating External Equipment • The Manage Device dialog appears. Finally. choose the correct device type according to its capabilities. Ports that do not have a mapping can be left blank or undefined. (The string does not show anywhere else in TEMS Investigation.3. In the Ports section. You can change this assignment by modifying the selections in the combo boxes. The device is added to the list in the main window.1–8. Click Save and Close.

TEMS Investigation 14.xml: LG LTE LTE DM – AT Ndis Samsung LTE LTE DM – AT Ndis Function Air Interface Data Interface AT Interface Ethernet Interface Qualcomm Diag:xxx Data Modem AT Ndis ST Ericsson Modem Data Modem Device Management Ndis For a Samsung LTE modem (third column above) this corresponds to the following selections in the Manage Device dialog: 52 . (See the XML code excerpt below. the entries in the existing UEDescription.3.4. Mapping Device Ports to Interfaces If it is not clear which port should be mapped to which interface.1. The TYPE tag is mapped towards the interfaces.xml file (found under <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application) may give an indication.) Below are some examples of mappings in UEDescription. and the DESCRIPTION tag is the name displayed in the tool.) 8.0 User’s Manual Investigation will update itself automatically with this data when launched.

Chapter 8. Finally. pair each available port to the correct port type as shown in the screenshot below. Then. Qualcomm Devices with LTE/TD-LTE Capability These are devices built on the Qualcomm MDM9x00 chipset families (TEMS Investigation license options “Qualcomm E” and “Qualcomm F”).3.xml itself the following entry appears: <PRODUCT NAME="This name is not displayed anywhere" PID="6889" FAMILY="SAMSUNG"> <DEVICE DESCRIPTION="Samsung USB LTE Adapter" SETUPCLASS="Net" TYPE="Ndis" /> <DEVICE DESCRIPTION="Samsung LTE Control Port" SETUPCLASS="Ports" TYPE="AT"/> </PRODUCT> 8. do as follows. in the Ports section. In the Manage Device dialog.4. select the appropriate chipset family.0 53 . Activating External Equipment In the file UEDescription. click OK. 2. NT12-2533 ver 1. Launch the Manual UE Configuration utility and select your device as described in the introduction of section 8. Under Type. 1.2.4.3.

assign that port to “AT Interface”. assign the port named “Samsung USB LTE Adapter” to the “Ethernet Interface” function. 54 . Under Ports. If the device has a “Samsung LTE Control Port” that answers to AT commands. From now on.3.4. 8.3.TEMS Investigation 14. 3.0 User’s Manual 3.3. LG and Samsung Devices with LTE Capability 1.. TEMS Investigation will detect the Qualcomm device as being of the type you selected in step 2. Click Save and then Close. Launch the Manual UE Configuration utility and select your device as described in the introduction of section 8. set Type to “Samsung LTE Modem”.. USB NDIS” (or similar) to the “Ethernet Interface” function. assign the port named “. The device is added to the list in the main dialog window. For an LG device. Under Ports.4. For a Samsung device. set Type to “LG Electronics LTE Modem”. Also identify and map the ports to use for air interface messages (“Air Interface”) and AT communication (“AT Interface”). 2.

provided that it comes with Windows drivers enabling an IP data connection. Activating and Deactivating External Equipment in TEMS Investigation Activating External Equipment 8. Click Save and then Close. 8.Chapter 8. Activating External Equipment 4. Map the device ports as appropriate. • • If you want to use a device that is not officially supported.4. 8. The device is added to the list in the main dialog window. You need to activate a device in TEMS Investigation before you can use it for data collection.4.3. and all IP-related information elements will then be populated.1.0 55 . NT12-2533 ver 1. set Type to “Data Only Device” in the Manage Device dialog.4. Data Service Testing with Arbitrary Devices Data service testing in TEMS Investigation can be done with any applicable device (even if not officially supported by Ascom). All IP-based services can be tested (as well as video streaming). Below is an example.4.

only one such device at a time can be activated in TEMS Investigation (unless the connection manager supports multiple devices).4.3.4. you must close it to be able to activate equipment.2. you can activate it in TEMS Investigation. Compare section 8.3. section 10. Limitations for Particular Devices • If the device connection must be set up using an external connection manager application.1. Once the device has an APN. when you select an activated device in the Navigator top pane. Of HTC Touch Pro2 phones having an “Internet Sharing” function and requiring installation of TCP Router software. • To activate a detected device. but deactivate it in TEMS Investigation for the time being. 56 .6. Regarding these operations. click the Activate All button on the Navigator toolbar. On being activated.TEMS Investigation 14. the Activities tab in the bottom pane is populated with the operations that you can perform manually on this device. right-click it on the Navigator’s Equipment tab and choose Activate from the context menu. • 8.0 User’s Manual Note: If you have a logfile open. and a GPS device starts reporting positions. only one phone at a time can be activated in TEMS Investigation. see chapter 9. a phone device starts delivering idle mode reports. See the Getting Started Manual. Furthermore. Deactivating External Equipment If you want to leave an external device plugged into the PC. To activate all detected devices. The red cross disappears from each device icon to indicate that the device is now active. Note: A device that is going to use an NDIS data connection must have an APN assigned to it. do as follows: • Right-click the device on the Equipment tab and choose Deactivate from the context menu.

5. as shown in the tooltip: The following rules apply: • • • The first GPS unit detected automatically becomes the preferred one and remains as such even if further GPS units are plugged in and detected. While a logfile is being recorded.0 57 . If no GPS is activated in TEMS Investigation. It is referred to as the current Preferred GPS. the “Preferred” setting cannot be changed. If no GPS is activated. and they will then all be detected by TEMS Investigation. then all detected GPS units are activated but the currently preferred GPS remains preferred (and only this one will update positioning data in the application). NT12-2533 ver 1. Managing GPS Units It is possible to have several positioning devices plugged into the PC. and you click the Activate All button. Activating External Equipment To deactivate all active devices: Click the Deactivate All button on the Equipment tab toolbar.Chapter 8. GPS units in phones. only one at a time can update the positioning-related information elements in TEMS Investigation. that GPS automatically becomes the preferred one. As long as a GPS or some other device is activated in TEMS Investigation. while multiple GPS units can be detected and activated.1 However. on the other hand. This includes GPS units built into scanners. 8. The device responsible for this will be the one tagged with an “earth” symbol on the Navigator’s Equipment tab. the “Preferred” setting cannot be changed. are currently not recognized by TEMS Investigation. • • 1. and you activate one GPS.

Click the Re-pair Phones with AQM Modules button at the top of the Equipment tab. If the devices you connected to the PC were not detected properly (for whatever reason).3. the pairing must not have been undone using the Reset function (see section 9.TEMS Investigation 14. The earth symbol and “Preferred GPS” tag will then be transferred to that GPS. Further Features of the Navigator’s Equipment Tab The Refresh Function 8. you can recreate the same pairings automatically in TEMS Investigation.2. then right-click the desired GPS in the Navigator and choose Preferred GPS from the context menu. mappings between phone IMEIs and AQM module identities are stored by TEMS Investigation in the Windows registry. on the Activities tab. At any time.6. 58 . Note that you must always do a refresh after using the Manual UE Configuration utility.6.1.6. you can inspect which AQM module is matched with a device by right-clicking the PESQ Device Pairing item under the Control node. see section 8.1. To do this: Click the Refresh button at the top of the Equipment tab. If a device could not be matched with an AQM module. you can start the detection procedure over from scratch. Re-pairing Phones with AQM Modules When you match phones with AQM modules manually as described in section 9. the text “UE not paired” will be displayed in the PESQ Device Pairing dialog.7. 8.0 User’s Manual • To select a different GPS as the preferred one. first deactivate any devices that are activated and stop logfile recording if applicable. When plugging the same phones and AQM modules into the PC on a later occasion.7) before the phone was deactivated.1. This function operates the same way whether your AQM modules are standalone or mounted in an equipment case.4. 8. Note that for this to work.

To prevent this.Chapter 8. For example. 8. Each AQM module can only be paired with a single phone. if you are using an equipment case and let two phones swap places.3. the dialog is provided mainly for the purpose of troubleshooting in cases of conflicts during device detection. No check is performed that the physical connections are in fact still the same. NT12-2533 ver 1. Activating External Equipment 8. Device Detection Properties The Device Detection Properties dialog can be used to enable and disable detection of various device categories. To open this dialog: Click the Device Detection Properties button at the top of the Equipment tab. If you have been working with different equipment configurations connected at various times to the same PC.6. Note that normally there is no need to do this. Details and Limitations of the Re-pairing Function The re-pairing function assumes that the phone-to-AQM-module mappings found in the Windows registry are still valid.1.0 59 . the re-pairing will be incorrect for these phones and the AQM data will be garbage. the following holds: • • Only AQM modules that are physically present when you click the button will be paired.2. it is a good idea to label the phones and AQM modules in some suitable manner to ensure that each phone is always hooked up to the same AQM module. If several phones have previously (at different times) been using the same AQM module.6. only one of them will be paired with it.

TEMS Investigation does not save any information on equipment configuration in the workspace. which would be undesirable most of the time. Saving of the Equipment Configuration When you exit TEMS Investigation. the configuration on the Navigator’s Equipment tab is automatically saved. detection is enabled for all device types listed except “Network Card”. This means that the mappings between devices and EQ items are stored in the Windows registry. The saving extends to all devices whose hardware permits a reliable identification. that device will again be mapped to EQ3 the next time it is plugged into the same PC with the same Windows user logged in. you need to restart TEMS Investigation for the change to take effect. As a result. if a device is represented at one time by (say) EQ3. 8.TEMS Investigation 14. Compare section 11. By default.1.3. you must enable the “Network Card” item. as well as other network adapters accessible via LAN/WLAN.5.0 User’s Manual The checkbox in the Enabled column determines if detection of a device type is enabled. The latter is disabled because otherwise the PC’s network adapter. however. If you make changes in this dialog. that if you wish to upload logfiles over FTP using the PC network card. Such devices include phones with their IMEIs. would always be detected as EQs in the application.7. 60 . Note.

When operating devices manually. • • To execute an operation. 9.16. Activities “subtab”). Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually From the Navigator’s Equipment tab (bottom pane. you can manually run various services on a device and manually apply control functions to it (as opposed to controlling the device with a script). you double-click the desired item on the Activities tab to open the setup dialog associated with it.0 61 . Control Functions See also chapter 21. NT12-2533 ver 1. These operations are the subject of the present chapter. right-click and choose Stop. you make use of the same configuration sets that you refer to in scripts. To stop the operation. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually 9. For all manual device operations. right-click the desired item on the Activities tab and choose Start from the context menu. and particularly the reference material in section 20.Chapter 9.1. Compare chapter 20. which covers device property dialogs that provide further means of controlling devices.

62 Nokia NTM3 .1. Z750i K800i.0 User’s Manual 9. WCDMA Cell barred (+ reserved) Cell lock (+ prevent) RAT lock RRC WCDMA capability control 9. No. you need to create one.3. GSM Band lock. PESQ device pairing: Supported for devices capable of audio quality measurement using Call Generator/MRU. Nonvolatile item read/write: Supported for Qualcomm chipset based UMTS devices. See the Getting Started Manual. K600i Band lock. Each AT command is specified in a configuration set which is identical to that referenced by an AT activity in a Service Control script.TEMS Investigation 14.2 for details.1. Band Lock You can restrict the phone’s use of frequency bands. AT Commands The AT item is used to issue AT commands manually. 9. See section 20. If no AT configuration set exists.16. Others: See the table below.1.2. • • • Control Function Support by Device AT commands: Supported for all connectable devices.1. What frequency bands appear here depends on what the phone has support for. Sony Ericsson C702/C905*/W760i/W995* Sams.3. W600i Control Function Samsung Infuse 4G Xperia arc S* (QC) TM506. Samsung Galaxy S 4G • K790i/a.1. section 10.1.

Clicking OK will close the dialog. Sony Ericsson Specific Limitations If you make selections under GSM.1.1.2.11 (WCDMA).5. the P-900 band cannot be selected. Click either OK or Apply.2. 9. reserved. whereas Apply keeps it open.5. • Cell Lock in GSM For GSM you can do the following: Lock the phone on one or several cells1. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually • • Check the bands that the phone should be allowed to use. Only one 900 band at a time can be selected. it can be used to control both cell selection and handover behavior. In other words. The phone is then restricted to using only these cells.2. 9. This is the Allow option in the Cell Lock dialog. The options are the same as in sections 21.1. NT12-2533 ver 1. Cell Lock The Cell Lock function spans both GSM and WCDMA.4.1. Cell Barred Here you can modify the phone’s behavior with respect to accessing of barred.Chapter 9. you need to be aware of the following limitations: • • If the 850 band is selected. and it has an effect in idle as well as dedicated (connected) mode.5 (GSM) and 21.2. 9.0 63 . and other cells.

See below. click the Add button: 1. The phone is then prevented from using these cells. • To configure the set of cells to which the lock or prevent function should apply.0 User’s Manual • Prevent one or several cells. The word “cell” is used somewhat loosely here to mean either an ARFCN or an ARFCN + BSIC combination. This is the Prevent option in the Cell Lock dialog.TEMS Investigation 14. 64 .

Range selection and Channel selection: You can define either of these. 1.Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually • • • • Band selection: Here you specify a GSM band from which to select ARFCNs. • • Cell Lock in WCDMA For WCDMA you can do one of the following: Lock the phone to one or several cells and/or UARFCNs. Prevent one or several cells and/or UARFCNs. The phone is then restricted to using only these cells/UARFCNs. The phone is then prevented from using these cells/UARFCNs.0 65 . Under Range selection. the phone is locked to the ARFCN set {132 . A complete list of BSICs from 00 to 77 is displayed for devices that support BSIC selection. select it and click Remove.2. 134..1 You can define additional items as shown above to extend the ARFCN set. you specify a range of ARFCNs as extending from Start Channel to Stop Channel. The BSIC box is empty in the above screenshot because BSIC selection is not supported for the phone in question. 9. NT12-2533 ver 1. clicking the Add button each time. you pick a single ARFCN and one or several BSICs.. • To remove an item from the list box.1. The ARFCN and the BSIC set are joined by an implicit AND. Here. 137} on the GSM 850 MHz band.5. or both. Below is an example of a GSM Cell Lock setup. Under Channel selection.

66 . you pick one UARFCN and one or several SCs. click the Add button: • • • Band selection: Here you specify a WCDMA band from which to select UARFCNs. Under Channel selection. The UARFCN and the SC set are joined by an implicit AND.TEMS Investigation 14. Range selection is not used for WCDMA.0 User’s Manual • To configure the set of cells/UARFCNs to which the lock or prevent function should apply. You can define additional items as shown above to extend the cell/UARFCN set. clicking the Add button each time.

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

Below is an example of a WCDMA Cell Lock setup. Here, the phone is locked on the Band I (2100 MHz) cells having UARFCN 10565 and SCs {3, 4, 5}.

To remove an item from the list box, select it and click Remove.

9.1.6.

Nonvolatile Item Read/Write

The Nonvolatile Item functions allow you to inspect and modify settings for Qualcomm chipset based UMTS devices by reading and writing items over the Qualcomm NV interface.

The dialog is limited to 4 bytes; this is however sufficient to cover most basic NV items. Specifics on the NV interface are vendor proprietary and must be obtained from the vendor. WARNING: It is possible to corrupt the phone’s calibration parameters or otherwise damage the phone by writing the wrong value to the wrong address. You are always prompted to confirm an NV command before it is executed.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

67

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Before an NV write, a read is always performed at the same address. All traffic over the NV interface is logged in internal protocol reports, so if you are recording a logfile in TEMS Investigation it should be possible to recover the previous values of parameters by studying these reports. After an NV write the phone is always automatically reset, and consequently it is deactivated in TEMS Investigation.

9.1.7.

PESQ Device Pairing

If you are going to do audio quality measurement with a Call Generator or MRU, this is how you select the AQM module with which a given EQ should interact. The PESQ Device Pairing item is selectable only for devices supporting audio quality measurements (these are listed in the Getting Started Manual, section 10.3.1). AQM modules do not themselves appear as EQs on the Equipment tab. Selecting this item opens the PESQ Device Pairing dialog:

• •

At the outset, the string “UE not paired” is displayed, indicating that the device has not yet been paired with an AQM module. To accomplish pairing, select the appropriate AQM module in the combo box, which holds all available AQM modules, identified by their serial numbers. Click either OK or Apply. Clicking OK will close the dialog, whereas Apply keeps it open.

You need to pair off your EQs and AQM modules manually like this the first time around. On later occasions, you can use the re-pairing function (see section 8.6.2) to recreate the same pairing automatically, provided that the physical connections between phones and AQM modules are unchanged.

68

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

If you want to undo the pairing so that the device is no longer associated with any AQM module, click the Reset button. Note that if you unpair the devices in this way, you can no longer use the re-pairing function.

9.1.8.

Radio Access Technology Lock (Lock on RAT)

Certain devices can be locked to a particular radio access technology. The RAT lock function works only in idle mode.

The Lock on technology combo box shows the phone’s current RAT lock state. You also use the same combo box to perform RAT lock actions by selecting a new RAT lock state to be applied and then clicking the OK or the Apply button. Clicking OK will close the dialog, whereas Apply keeps it open. Note that the lock on RAT procedure may take some time to complete. The items in the “Lock on technology” combo box have the following meanings: • Not locked – – • – – • – – State: No forcing of UE network selection will occur. Action: Releases a previously applied RAT lock. State: The phone is locked to GSM, that is, the phone is forced to camp on a GSM network whenever one is available. Action: Locks the phone to GSM. State: The phone is locked to WCDMA, that is, the phone is forced to camp on a WCDMA network whenever one is available. Action: Locks the phone to WCDMA.

GSM

WCDMA

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

69

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

9.1.8.1.

RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Sony Ericsson

The RAT lock setting takes priority over all technology-specific locking functions (channel, cell, and band lock) covered in sections 9.1.3, 21.2.2.6, and 21.2.2.13. On the assumption that both types of network (GSM and WCDMA) are available to the phone, this has the following implications: • If the RAT lock is set to “WCDMA”, the phone will be locked to WCDMA indefinitely1; specifying GSM bands or channels to lock on will not by itself force the phone into GSM mode. Analogously, if the RAT lock is set to “GSM”, the phone will be locked to GSM indefinitely1; specifying WCDMA UARFCNs or cells to lock on will not by itself force the phone into WCDMA mode. In order to force immediate use of GSM, you must set the RAT lock to “GSM”; the phone will then be locked to a GSM network indefinitely, and any GSM-specific settings you have made will take effect. The same holds for WCDMA.

Note again that the RAT lock function has an effect in idle mode only. If no RAT lock is applied, the phone will camp on whatever network the fixed side prescribes (as it normally does). Whatever technology-specific settings you have made will be in force while the phone is using that technology; however, these settings will not interfere with the choice of RAT made by the fixed side.

9.1.8.2.

RAT Lock vs. Technology-specific Control Functions: Nokia

If you lock a Nokia phone on a RAT, then try to apply a locking function for a different RAT, the phone will go into No service mode. For example, this will be the result if you lock the phone to GSM, then attempt to lock on a WCDMA cell. However, the technology-specific setting is remembered and will come into effect after the RAT lock has been released. In the above example, when you release the GSM RAT lock, the phone will immediately switch to WCDMA and lock on the WCDMA cell you selected.

1. Except if you put the phone in scanning mode, in which case it ceases to behave like a phone at all.

70

Chapter 9. Operating and Controlling External Equipment Manually

9.1.9.

RRC WCDMA Capability Control

This function lets you modify the phone’s reported HSPA capabilities. The options are the same as in the device properties described in section 21.2.2.14.

9.2.

Voice/Video Calls

Under the Voice and Video nodes are found various operations related to CS voice and video telephony. They use the same types of configuration sets as the corresponding Service Control activities, which are covered in sections 20.16.5 and 20.16.6. Which a CS voice or video call is ongoing, its progress is displayed on the Navigator’s Equipment tab immediately beneath the device engaged in the call.

9.3.

Data Services

Under the IP and Messaging nodes are found operations for running PS data service sessions. Again these operations correspond in one-to-one fashion to activities in Service Control scripts. All configuration details are covered in the Service Control chapter, sections 20.16.3–20.16.5. For example, if you want to conduct a manual FTP download, you first need to set up a network connection using IP  Network Connect, and then you can do the actual download by initiating an IP  FTP Download operation. This assumes that you already have configurations defined for each operation. If not, then right-click the operation on the Activities tab, choose Configuration Sets, and create a configuration by clicking New in the dialog that appears. Progress indicators are shown for data service sessions in the same way as for CS voice/video; compare section 9.2.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

71

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Note: If you run multiple concurrent data service sessions using multiple devices, avoid starting all of these in very rapid succession. It is better to start one session at a time with at least a few seconds in between. Compare the note at the end of section 20.10.4.

9.3.1.

Presentation of Data Service Testing

Testing data services will produce the following output: Information elements in the Data category: see Information Elements and Events, section 3.8. Selections of these elements are by default presented in the data service oriented line charts. See Information Elements and Events, chapter 8. A number of events pertaining to various services, and more: see Information Elements and Events, sections 7.2 and 7.4. These are by default presented in the data service oriented line charts. KPI-related events in the message window Events of KPI Type: see Information Elements and Events, sections 7.4 and 8.8. Messages in the Data Reports message window: see Information Elements and Events, section 8.8.

• •

9.4.

Scanning

The Scan node is where you set up and execute scanning sessions. These activities, too, are configured using configuration sets (but can be run only manually, as the Service Control tool does not provide scanning support). See chapter 13. For complete details on scanning setups for each cellular technology, see chapters 14–19.

72

Chapter 10. The Status Control Monitor

10.

The Status Control Monitor

The Status Control Monitor provides at-a-glance information on: • • • • the status of devices connected to the PC, including positioning equipment service execution PC performance logfile recording.

The window is found in the Control category on the Navigator’s Menu tab. Generally speaking, the Status Control Monitor indicates what last happened: it does not provide comprehensive coverage but should be seen as a complement to other parts of the user interface. Each “LED”-style indicator is accompanied by a text string that details the significance of the indicator’s current color.

10.1.

Equipment Connection

This indicator relates to the status of data collecting devices other than positioning equipment. Symbol green yellow red no color Meaning A new device (EQ) has been activated in TEMS Investigation. A device which is activated has stopped delivering data. A device has been deactivated in TEMS Investigation. No devices detected.

Compare the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 8.3.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

73

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

10.2.

Positioning

This indicator reflects the status of the currently preferred positioning device. (Regarding the definition of “preferred”, see section 8.5.) Symbol green red no color Meaning The preferred positioning device is delivering valid data. The preferred positioning device has stopped delivering valid data. No positioning device detected.

Compare the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 8.3.

10.3.

Service Status

This indicator relates to service usage. It covers both service sessions that are initiated manually (from the bottom pane of the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see sections 9.2, 9.3) and service sessions controlled by a script (see chapter 20). However, if you initiate a service directly on the device, using the device keypad, such an action does not affect this indicator. Symbol green yellow red no color Meaning Last service execution OK, everything in order. Service execution failed once or twice. Service execution failed repeatedly (at least three times in a row). No service executing.

74

Chapter 10. The Status Control Monitor

10.4.

Computer Performance

This information is taken from Windows. Memory usage for all tasks, not only TEMS Investigation, is indicated. Symbol green yellow red Meaning CPU and memory usage both below 75%. CPU and/or memory usage above 75%, but both below 95%. CPU and/or memory usage above 95%.

10.5.

Logfile Progress

This indicator relates to logfile recording only, not to logfile analysis. Symbol green red Recording active. One of the following: • • no color Size of logfile not increasing due to an error. Device deactivated. Meaning

No recording in progress.

Compare the status bar, Recording section: see section 4.4.3.

10.6.

Context Menu

You can record all text messages printed in the Status Control Monitor to a text file. Right-click in the Status Control Monitor, and a context menu will appear; from that menu you can start and stop the logging of the window contents. By default the message recording is turned off.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

75

3) viewing of logfile contents (section 11. In this case the logfile can record devices selectively.0 User’s Manual 11.3).1.1. • • • Recording Logfiles Logfile recording can be initiated in the following ways: Manually from the Record toolbar or Logfile menu.2). loading of logfiles from sources outside TEMS Investigation (section 11. Regardless of the method used to record a logfile.9. By starting a walk along a planned route in the Pinpoint Window (see section 12.7–20. Logfiles This chapter explains: • • • • • • • • how to log information received from external devices to file (section 11. Such a logfile will always include all activated devices. too.1. turn to sections 20.8).1) how to load a logfile for analysis (section 11. For full instructions on how to configure scripted recording.16. all activated devices are included.trp.16. and each recording is then completely independent of the others.6) merging of uplink AQM data into logfiles (section 11. the output is always a single file with extension .7) generation of logfile reports (section 11.4) transferring of logfiles via FTP (section 11. By a script that is executing. 76 . The activities of one device (EQ) can be recorded in multiple logfiles. The chapter also describes: 11.TEMS Investigation 14.5) logfile export (section 11. Here. Several logfiles can be recorded concurrently. as specified in the script setup.

hours. which is most conveniently handled from the Record toolbar. (By starting the recording first you ensure that you capture all of the relevant measurement data in the logfile. Subject Tags Description Now activate your equipment if you have not already done so. A tag is defined simply by being entered here. Use this field to categorize the logfile with suitable keywords. To initiate recording of a logfile: Click the Start Recording button on the Record toolbar. day. seconds). This attribute is also visible in Windows Explorer (select the Subject column for viewing).0 77 . This dialog appears: File name The default naming is in the form of a timestamp: mmddhhmmss. minutes. NT12-2533 ver 1. Logfiles The rest of the present section deals with manual recording.) and semicolon (.) • Perform the desired tasks with your external equipment. Here you can enter free text characterizing the logfile. Valid keyword separators are comma (. Free-text field for describing the logfile.).Chapter 11.trp (month. The Tags attribute can also be inspected in Windows Explorer (select the Tags column for viewing).

Alternatively. From the Logfile menu.0 User’s Manual After you have completed all of these tasks. choose Recording Properties.1. 11.5.2.1. A Filemark event is written to the logfile for each filemark. Filemarks can be searched for in message windows.1. Once you have closed it. • Further Recording Options Some additional options are available when recording logfiles. 78 .TEMS Investigation 14.2. Inserting Filemarks Filemarks are text strings which can be inserted automatically or manually in a logfile in order to tag interesting segments in the file.1.7. They are treated as events and appear as such in presentation windows. 11. In Service Control scripts. you can use the Filemark activity to have filemarks inserted automatically. you can control the recording with the corresponding commands in the Logfile menu. To add a filemark manually: Click the Insert Filemark button and enter the filemark text. as explained in section 26. you cannot log any more data to the same file. See section 20. click Stop Recording to end the recording and close the logfile.16.

This function is automatic. Note: If you activate a GPS in TEMS Investigation. Positioning Logfiles by Pinpointing in the Map Window This section describes how to use the pinpointing technique for positioning logfile data. If you check this box. an internal history buffer (providing quick access to logfile data) is cleared every time you start recording a new logfile. the history buffer in TEMS Investigation is automatically cleared on reaching a size of 410. A GPS can be physically plugged in without disabling the pinpointing function.1. The pinpointing described here is done in the Map window and is manual. TEMS Investigation also has another pinpointing tool. Logfiles Default recording folder Clear history buffer at start of new logfile Here you can change the default directory where logfiles will be saved.Chapter 11. To prevent out-of-memory issues. where you plan and create your route in advance and then walk it in a simplified fashion. but it cannot be activated in the TEMS Investigation application. Conversely. and you cannot view or edit any settings controlling this behavior.0 79 . while pinpointing is in progress. NT12-2533 ver 1. pinpointing in the Map window is disabled. This reduces the consumption of disk space as well as the CPU load during recording. the Pinpoint Window. Pinpointing is useful in environments where GPS coverage is lacking. meaning that you indicate your exact positions as you walk your route. you cannot activate a GPS in TEMS Investigation. The Pinpoint Window is dealt with in chapter 12.000 messages. 11.3.

When you are done with your measurement session.4. The waypoint is marked with a black diamond. 80 . If the image file is unpositioned. As long as a phone is activated. finish as follows: Deactivate the phone. 2 1 3 4 5 Route Waypoints (pinpoint markers) Measurement data points The waypoints themselves are stored in the logfile as “Pinpoint” messages which appear by default in the Events window. and a new route segment in the form of a straight line is drawn to it from the preceding waypoint. • Basic Pinpointing Procedures First. the measurement reports received between the two points are drawn as theme symbols distributed uniformly along the new route segment (and assigned the corresponding positions in the logfile).3–31. load your floor plan or other image to be used for pinpointing into a Map window. See sections 31. Then. clicks on the map will be interpreted as pinpointing actions. On the Map window toolbar. click the Pinpoint button.0 User’s Manual 11. • Pinpoint one last time to ensure that all data is accurately positioned. Now click the Start Recording button on the main window toolbar.TEMS Investigation 14.1. Each time you pinpoint. You must do this before starting the logfile recording.1. Click Stop Recording to end the recording and close the logfile. the corresponding position is registered in the logfile as a waypoint along your route. This is indicated by the cursor changing into an upward arrow whenever it enters the Map window. Therefore the waypoints and connecting lines appear also when the logfile is loaded for analysis later on. you need to position it. To record positions for measurements. you indicate your position by clicking on the map at regular intervals.3.

9). Logfile loading is controlled from the Replay toolbar or from the Logfile menu. while the remaining space is divided into subtabs whose contents are detailed in the subsections that follow.1.1. Alternatively. 11.5) and avoid having other presentation windows open at the same time unless you really need them. you should pinpoint every time you change direction. For multi-logfile analysis. you must also exit Pinpoint mode there. Advice on Pinpointing and Recording From section 11. Logfiles 11. if you have been pinpointing in the Map window. The file must then be dropped onto the Logfile tab of the Navigator. you should try to maintain approximately the same speed throughout your route.3. you must deactivate your external equipment. to obtain equal data densities in different locations. Loading Logfiles for Analysis Note: To be able to load a logfile. The quickest method is to use the toolbar buttons.2.3. Furthermore. 11. (Note that this is in fact not the case in the figure in section 11.0 81 . Regarding the latter.1.3.2. It is wise not to replace the map during recording. you should remove all unused themes (see section 31. for instance by clicking the Selection Tool button on the Map window toolbar (see section 31. To optimize the performance of the Map window. Furthermore. Opening a Logfile Click the Open Logfile button to open a logfile. you can open a logfile by drag-and-drop from Windows Explorer.2.1.Chapter 11. turn to section 11. The metadata is displayed on the Navigator’s Logfile tab. TEMS Discovery is used.) If you pinpoint close to the edge of the Map window. the measurement data). the map will scroll automatically.2. Opening a logfile only loads logfile metadata into the application.3. not the full contents of the file (that is. This tab shows the logfile name at the top. NT12-2533 ver 1.1. where the tester has increased his speed considerably between waypoints 3 and 4. One logfile at a time can be loaded in TEMS Investigation.1 it is clear that in order for the recorded route to agree well with the actual one.

TEMS Investigation 14. a TEMS Automatic RTU or a TEMS Pocket release. 11.2.2. Tags. Recovered: A failure occurred during recording of this logfile. but it might just as well be. Date and time when the recording started.2. TEMS product or component used to record the logfile.2.1. Normal: The logfile was recorded normally. Logfile Metadata and Statistics “General” Subtab Subject. see section 11. Please note that the file may be corrupt. This can be a version of TEMS Investigation. for example.0 User’s Manual 11. and an attempt was made to recover the file.1. 82 . Status Bounding Box The smallest area (defined by min/max latitude and longitude) that encompasses the route traveled in the logfile. Description Start Time Stop Time Probe Shows the contents of these fields as defined at logfile creation time.0) logfiles. Unknown: Value displayed for old (pre-14. Date and time when the recording concluded.

No data from that device will then be loaded into the presentation windows when you load the full logfile contents. Selecting a device populates the fields at the bottom (Capabilities.) just as is done in live mode for active devices on the Navigator’s top-level Equipment tab (Information subtab: see section 8. etc.2.Chapter 11. “Equipment” Subtab This subtab holds all devices that were activated in TEMS Investigation during recording of the logfile.3.2. NT12-2533 ver 1.2. Logfiles 11.2).2. You can right-click a device and choose Deactivate to hide data from that device in the logfile presentation.0 83 . Each device appears with the same EQ number assigned as it had at the time of recording.

0 User’s Manual 11. You can show all activities or only those of a particular type. 84 . You can group and/or filter the contents in various ways: Group by Not Grouped: The chronology is given in a single table. etc. Filter by Equipment Filter by Activity You can show all activities or only those of a single EQ.).2.TEMS Investigation 14. Activity: The chronology is broken into separate tables for each type of activity performed. Failed. “Activities” Subtab This tab gives a complete chronology of the activities (whether scripted or executed manually) performed by all devices in the course of the logfile recording.3. Result: The chronology is broken into separate tables for each possible outcome (Succeeded.2.

which shows equipment status and the outcome of the last activity performed during the execution of a script.3. Compare the Service Control Monitor (section 20.1). Logfiles Clicking an activity link opens a detailed description of the configuration. execution.Chapter 11. Below are shown a couple of extracts from the description of an FTP Download activity. 11.2. “Statistics” Subtab NT12-2533 ver 1.4.2.15.0 85 . and outcome of the activity. • Click the Back link to return to the activity listing.

x1.15.x1.x (GSM logfiles) TEMS Pocket 11. 11.2).x TEMS Investigation EDGE 1.1. Loading Logfiles from Other Sources TEMS Investigation can load and analyze logfiles from the TEMS products listed below.3. See section 4.x TEMS Investigation WCDMA 3.x 2 86 .0 User’s Manual This tab provides statistics on the outcomes of activities performed by the devices during recording. 11.3.x. 6. now labeled Stop.x TEMS DriveTester GSM–TDMA 1. 3.4. Compare the Service Control Monitor (section 20. which computes similar statistics in testing mode while a script is executing. 11. Filter by Equipment You can show statistics for all devices taken together or for one selected device. Loading Logfile Contents Click the Fast forward button to load the logfile measurement data into the presentation windows. Play Section of Status Bar While a logfile is being loaded. When you are done analyzing a logfile. Click Fast forward once more to resume logfile loading.3. You can click the same button again. to halt the loading of the logfile.x. 8.3. 2.x1. 4.x and later TEMS Investigation GSM 5. The data loaded thus far is then displayed in the presentation windows.2.x. click the Close Logfile button to close it. • • • • • • TEMS Investigation 6. 7. 5.x.x. the Play section of the status bar shows the name of the file and indicates the percentage of the file that has been loaded.TEMS Investigation 14. 10.2.

2.10) 11. Viewing Logfile Contents Everything about data presentation is dealt with in chapters 23–31. Note especially the search functions in message windows. click the Settings button.2. Logfile Transfer via FTP TEMS Investigation has a function for uploading logfiles via FTP according to preconfigured FTP server settings.0 87 .1.Chapter 11. NT12-2533 ver 1.5. TEMS Pocket 9.4. 2. • • Setting Up Logfile Transfers To set up FTP logfile transfers. 1. see the Informations Elements and Events volume. choose Configuration  File Transfer. on the Menu tab of the Navigator.x. described in section 26. In the window that appears.5 TEMS Investigation can also read • • • • EFEM logfiles from Motorola phones MDM logfiles from Qualcomm chipset based devices logfiles from Anritsu ML8720 scanners (i. 6. section 3.x (MTU logfiles recorded with GSM-only MTUs) TEMS Automatic 3. files logged by the scanner itself) MTR files (GSM.x.x (any MTU and TEMS Pocket Remote logfiles) TEMS Automatic 5. 11.e.7.x (any MTU logfiles) TEMS Automatic 4. 7.x logfiles cannot be loaded in TEMS Investigation.5. Logfiles • • • • TEMS Automatic 8. 11.x. Please note that logfiles from these TEMS Pocket versions must first be converted using a PC utility that is delivered with that version.

Password Server Address Port Server Logfile Directory Local Logfile Directory 88 .0 User’s Manual 11. User. IP address or host name of FTP server.1.TEMS Investigation 14. The logfile names are augmented with a timestamp indicating the time of upload: _tfu__hh_mm_ss (“tfu” means “TEMS file upload”). FTP Server Settings User name and password on the FTP server. Path to the directory on the FTP server where the uploaded logfiles will be stored (in a subdirectory named according to the current date). if required.5. The FTP server port to use. The local directory on the PC from which logfiles will be uploaded.1.

you can then compute the checksum for the uploaded file and confirm that it agrees with that of the original. you need to supply parameters for connecting to the network.5. Logfiles 11. Using some suitable third-party software.3.16. every logfile will be transferred immediately after the recording has ended.6.. The parameters of this configuration are gone through in section 20. Move: Within the local directory.3.1. If the option is not checked. See section 8. or over an Ethernet or WLAN connection. Note: Transfer over Ethernet or WLAN requires that detection of network adapters be enabled (it is disabled by default). you initiate transfers manually as described in section 11. Click the Connection parameters button to open the dialog for creating a Network Connect configuration set. • • Delete: After logfiles have been uploaded. this behavior is preselected and cannot be changed. Equipment Here you select the device to use for logfile transfer. they are deleted from the local directory. 11. logfiles that have been uploaded are moved to a subdirectory Complete that is created automatically for the purpose.Chapter 11. Logfile Options If this is checked. NT12-2533 ver 1.] files after transfer Generate MD5 checksum If checked.5.0 89 . For a cellular network device. The transfer can be done over a cellular network.1.2. If Start transfer when logfile is closed is checked.2..3.3. TEMS Investigation will generate an MD5 checksum (128-bit hash value) for each logfile to be transferred and send that value as a text file along with the logfile.1. Note that you do not need to have the device activated in TEMS Investigation to be able to transfer files. Start transfer when logfile is closed [.5.

5. 90 .5. too.1 Ethereal (Wireshark) MDM • • • • • Some of these formats contain multiple files for each logfile. Setup You can save all settings made in this dialog as a file transfer setup. chapter 8 for details. MapInfo 3. In the File Transfer window.1. then click OK. Starting Logfile Transfers This section is applicable only when the option Start transfer when logfile is closed described in section 11. • • • To save a setup. To load a previously saved setup.) The progress bar will indicate the progress of the transfer. See the Technical Reference. section 8. there is no explicit handling of setup files. TEMS Automatic logfiles.1. can be exported in this format.0 (Interchange or Tab format) ArcView Shapefile: about version. In this case you start the logfile transfer manually on each occasion. The setups are maintained in the dialog. • • In the File Transfer Settings dialog.0 User’s Manual 11. this button is named Auto and grayed out. type a name for it in the Name box and click Save. define or select the setup you want to use. To delete a setup. 11. The setup is added in the list box. select it in the list box and click Load. for example. • Exporting Logfiles in Other Formats Logfiles can be exported in the following formats: Text file with tab delimited data (suitable for processing in.TEMS Investigation 14. click the Start button. see the Technical Reference. The text export format is described in detail in the Technical Reference. select it in the list box and click Delete. 11.4. a spreadsheet application). chapter 7.5.2.6.2 is not set.2 Marconi Planet DMS 3. (If the file transfer is automatic.

0 91 . deactivate any external devices that are currently activated. This is necessary in order for the export to work properly. click Add. 11. ArcView. Logfile export can be done either from the TEMS Investigation user interface or from a Command Prompt. or Planet format requires that the data be positioned. the export file will contain only a header and no route data. choose Export Logfile.4. In the TEMS Export window. see section 11. From the Logfile menu.6. If there is no positioning information in the logfile. • • Preparing an Export Order First.Chapter 11.7. Regarding the choice PESQ merge. A separate window named TEMS Export is launched. The Add Export Order dialog appears: Format Select the output format for your logfiles. Logfiles Note: Export in MapInfo.6. NT12-2533 ver 1.1. see section 11. (This is not a logfile export format in the strict sense.) Input files Type or select the logfile or logfiles you want to export. For the latter possibility.

0 User’s Manual Cell files Click this button to include one or several cell files in the export. as described in the Technical Reference. including the plain-text format. File extension for export file. To the export file name you can optionally add a descriptive prefix. This will have exactly the same effect on information elements and events as having cell files loaded in the TEMS Investigation application itself (populating IEs that require cell file data.2.). Export to other formats produces files with fixed extensions. see section 11.TEMS Investigation 14. there is no sorting of messages by timestamps.) The name given to the export files depends on the ordering of logfiles in the Input files box. If you are exporting several logfiles and this option is checked. Merge output Directory Prefix Suffix Extension The directory where the export files are written. If the Merge output option is unchecked. etc. Editable only for certain formats.1. 11. chapter 8. To the export file name you can optionally add a descriptive suffix.2 below. and the export file set simply retains the name of the logfile. all logfiles will be merged into a single set of export files. a dialog appears whose contents partly depend on the format chosen. Specifying the Contents of Export Files On clicking the Setup button. Selecting Information Elements to Export The Information Elements tab is common to many of the formats.6. • Now click the Setup button to specify details of the export. (Logfiles are simply concatenated. 11. Here you select which information elements to include in the export: 92 .2.6. each logfile is exported separately.6.

the Data category). select the desired item and click the Edit button above the box. or change the IE argument (where one exists). Repeat for all components you want to export. you do not get the whole element at once.Chapter 11. • To export an element. To export an information element from a different category (e. If the element has arguments. Logfiles You choose each individual element separately. select it in the Available IEs list and click the “>” button to move it to the Selected IEs list. The Edit IE dialog appears. By default a chosen item is exported from all devices that report it. but only the component with the lowest argument. From information elements with arguments you pick one component at a time. To clear the entire Selected IEs box. you can also edit the following settings: NT12-2533 ver 1. • • • Editing the Selected Items To edit an information element: • In the Selected IEs box.0 93 . choose that category in the combo box in the Available IEs section. you must edit the item. To remove an item from the Selected IEs box. see Editing the Selected Items below.g. To export the item only from specified phones. click “>” again. select the item and click “<”. click “<<”. Elements from different categories can be freely mixed in export files. For all export formats. For all export formats except tab-delimited text. To select the component with the next higher argument. you can restrict the export of a selected IE to a single device. By default the items selected are picked from all phones.

) NODATA field: If you enter a string here. the export can be reduced in order to decrease the duplication of data and the number of lines in the export file.2. it will be written in the export file whenever the IE does not have a valid value.2. By default the text export file also contains message information. There are no user settings relating to the event data.0 User’s Manual • NAME field: This is the IE column heading in the export file.g. 11. You can rearrange the items by selecting them and moving them using the Up and Dn buttons. “-1”).TEMS Investigation 14. the column heading string consists of the IE name.8. Text File Specific Settings Besides your chosen information elements. • As long as these settings have not been edited.2. whereas for the remaining formats the string must be numeric (e. but in different files. including user-inserted filemarks. any string is accepted.6. See section 11. the text export file always contains data on events. The choice is made on the Options tab: 94 . For Planet. Note also that the NAME and NODATA settings are not saved along with other logfile export settings. “999”.6. Arranging Items in the Export Files The order of the items in the Selected IEs list will also be the order in which they come in the export files. Optionally. the IE name is preceded by an asterisk (*) in the Selected IEs box. By default. (You might want to make this string shorter.

• Event information Governs whether the Event Info column is included in the export. Check a column to include it. NT12-2533 ver 1. The following columns are optional: Message Type. (The Event column is kept. All other standard columns are always included. The export file is reduced in two ways: • The columns Frame Number. This makes for a considerable reduction of the export file size. Message ID.. In addition there will be one column for each selected IE or IE component. chapter 7. Events and filemarks only. and Hexadecimal String are excluded from the export file. IE values are written out only if they have changed since the previous message. and Hexadecimal String. Message ID. see the Technical Reference. Logfiles Full message information. If you check Show changed IE values only. If the box is not checked.) Messages not triggering an event and containing no changed IE values are wholly excluded.0 95 . All messages are kept. all IE values are written for every message.Chapter 11.... as is the Event Info column provided that the Event information checkbox below is checked.

the Options tab looks like this: Reports to export data from This setting governs what types of report from the phone are included in the export files: • • • all reports only Layer 3 reports only mode reports.3. MapInfo Specific Settings For MapInfo export (whether to Interchange or Tab format). By default all reports are exported. 96 .0 User’s Manual Message options Check the relevant boxes in order to have Layer 2 messages. and phones’ mode reports exported as unabridged plain text to a common separate file whose name ends in _textexp.txt. 11.TEMS Investigation 14. Layer 3 messages.2.6.

ArcView Specific Settings Export message information. Note.: Events are exported. NT12-2533 ver 1. Logfiles Export message information... Export events but do not plot.4.: Events are exported.0 97 . section 8. downlink) Message name Hexadecimal string Extension (containing cause values) Do not export events: No event information is exported.. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • • Message direction (internal.6. downlink) Message name Hexadecimal string For details on ArcView output. uplink....2.2. but no event-specific symbol is used in MapInfo when plotting on a map. see the Technical Reference.. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • • • Message direction (internal. and that the symbol used is not one of the default TEMS Investigation event symbols. Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export files. Export events and plot. For details on MapInfo output. Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export files. section 8. and a unique symbol is used when plotting in MapInfo to distinguish events from other data. 11.Chapter 11. uplink. • • • Include file name in file Check this to include the file name in the export files.1. Events This setting governs the export of events. that there is no differentiation of event types. see the Technical Reference. however..

3. • 98 . Check this to include information on Layer 3 and Layer 2 messages in the export file. you may want to save the setup for future use. see the Technical Reference.5.TEMS Investigation 14.5. click Load and locate the setup file. The Export message information checkbox must be checked.tex for a text-format export setup). 11.2.6. Ethereal (Wireshark) Specific Settings The export encompasses all of the logfile content. The file extension will depend on the format (for example.2. click Save and store the file where appropriate. For details on Ethereal output. MDM Specific Settings MDM export is intended for logfiles recorded with Qualcomm chipset based devices. section 8. uplink. section 8. otherwise the output file will be empty. The following data is added (one column for each item): • • Message direction (internal.6. see the Technical Reference. Saving and Loading Export Setups When you are done specifying the export. . The Export message information checkbox must be checked..2.6. see the Technical Reference.0 User’s Manual 11.4. section 8. downlink) Message name For details on Marconi Planet output. 11. • In the Setup dialog.2. The export encompasses all Qualcomm-specific air interface messages in the logfile. Marconi Planet Specific Settings Export message information.8..6.7. For details on MDM output. 11.6. To load a previously saved setup in the Setup dialog. otherwise the output files will be empty.

A summary of the export execution appears in a popup window (“Export Result”).ExportTool. Command Line Controlled Logfile Export Logfile export can alternatively be initiated from a Command Prompt by running the file TEMS.2) are not saved in the above-mentioned files.6. for example.) to separate files. Wildcards can be used in the file name in regular DOS fashion. NT12-2533 ver 1. 11. right-click and choose Abort from the context menu. right-click and choose Start from the context menu (or click the Start button in the window).3. /IF and /InputFiles can be used interchangeably. which is found under <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application.6. To abort the execution of the export orders.1.4. The command has the following syntax. Logfiles However.0 99 . 11.exe /IF "<logfile name(s)>" [/OD "<output directory path>"] [/CFG "<configuration file name>"] [/CF "<cell file name(s)>"] [/EF "<export format>"] [/P "<prefix>"] [/S "<suffix>"] [/E "<extension>"] [/MO] [/V] Each of the command line switches has an abbreviated as well as a full form.4. They are instead written to DBF files that are found in the Settings directory beneath the TEMS Investigation installation directory. Use semicolons (. • • To start executing the export orders. Mandatory Command Line Switches /IF (or: /InputFiles) Equivalent to Input files field in logfile export dialog.6. 11. the NAME and NODATA settings for information elements (see the introduction of section 11. where optional parts are placed within square brackets [ ]: TEMS.ExportTool.6. Executing Export Orders All the export orders you have defined are listed in the Export Logfile window.Chapter 11.exe.

2. If you do not specify an output directory. created by saving a setup in the logfile export dialog as described in section 11.C:\ExpTest3\0825_*1. Most importantly. compare section 11.6.mex" /EF "ArcView shape-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.trp" Exports all TEMS Investigation logfiles found in directories ExpTest1 and ExpTest2 as well as those in directory ExpTest3 matching the given file name pattern. 11. • /IF "C:\ExpTest\*.trp" Exports the logfiles listed.C:\ExpTest\0825_02.8.2.6.txt which is found in the Temp directory of your Windows user (for example. the location where the export files are written is indicated in a file batch_result.0 User’s Manual Examples: • /IF "C:\ExpTest\0825_01. This parameter is optional but strongly recommended for all export formats that have a configuration." Exports all TEMS Investigation logfiles found in the specified directory. 100 .mex" /EF "MapInfo Tab-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.4.avx" /EF "Marconi Planet-file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.pex" No configuration file exists for export to MDM or Ethereal.1. Here is how configuration file types match up with export formats (/EF): • • • • • /EF "Text file" /CFG "C:\Path\filename. nor for PESQ uplink data merge.2.trp. a configuration file is required to have any information element values exported. /CFG (or: /ConfigurationFile) Logfile export configuration file. under Windows 7: C:\Users\<user name>\AppData\Local\Temp).C:\ExpTest2\*. Equivalent to Directory field in logfile export dialog. Optional Command Line Switches /OD (or: /OutputDirectory) Full path of output directory. • /IF "C:\ExpTest1\*.6.TEMS Investigation 14.tex" /EF "MapInfo Interchange (mif)" /CFG "C:\Path\filename.

If this parameter is omitted. use semicolon (. the export is done in text format. the name of each exported logfile will be printed in the Command Prompt window.) as delimiter. The possible values are those seen in the Format combo box: "Text file" "MapInfo Interchange (mif)" "MapInfo Tab-file" "ArcView shape-file" "Marconi Planet-file" "Export to Ethereal" "Export to MDM" "Pesq Merge" /P (or: /Prefix) Equivalent to Prefix field in logfile export dialog. /E (or: /Extension) Equivalent to Extension field in logfile export dialog. Logfiles /CF (or: /CellFiles) Equivalent to selecting cell files by clicking the Cell files button in the logfile export dialog. /MO (or: /MergeOutput) Including this switch is equivalent to checking the Merge output checkbox in the logfile export dialog.0 101 .Chapter 11. If you specify several cell files. /V (or: /Verbose) If you include this switch. The format string needs to be enclosed within double quotes (" "). /EF (or: /ExportFormat) Equivalent to Format setting in logfile export dialog. Note again that some export formats cannot override the default extension. NT12-2533 ver 1. /S (or: /Suffix) Equivalent to Suffix field in logfile export dialog.

TEMS Investigation 14. the files must be collected manually from the Call Generator. 102 .7.0 User’s Manual 11. This could be done in a number of ways. The XML files are given random four-digit numbers as names. you need to export the TEMS Investigation logfile with Format set to PESQ merge. See the screenshot in section 11. uplink AQM data is computed by a Call Generator and output in XML files. Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles (UMTS) As described in chapter 35. since the merge algorithm relies on this structure to locate the correct files. 11.6. No special tool is currently provided in TEMS Investigation for accessing the uplink AQM data. This uplink data needs to be inserted in each logfile (*.trp) recorded with TEMS Investigation. The output is stored under C:\ExpTest\Export.tex" This command exports in text format all logfiles found in C:\ExpTest that were recorded on August 25 (we are assuming here that the default logfile naming has been retained).trp format) that includes both uplink and downlink AQM data. Note: When downloading the uplink data files it is important to preserve the Call Generator directory structure. To perform the data merge.2.ExportTool. The output is a new logfile (still in *.4. using the setup described in the configuration file GsmN.tex. Retrieving Uplink AQM Data The uplink AQM data is stored as XML files on the Call Generator PC. 11.7.1.exe /IF "C:\ExpTest\0825*" /OD C:\ExpTest\Export /V /CFG "C:\ExpTest\GsmN. Example Below is an example of a logfile export command: TEMS. for example: • • • by setting up access to the Call Generator output directory as a network drive by downloading the uplink data files via FTP by copying the files onto a USB stick or a CD/DVD. by default under C:\TIPESQ in a subfolder named <yyyymmdd><phone number>.7.3.

2. Click Add.7. Click the Setup button next to the Format combo box. Back in the Add Export Order dialog.6.75 s NT12-2533 ver 1. select PESQ merge.1.” button and locate the root directory holding all XML files (the level above the directories named by date). select the TEMS Investigation logfiles (*.7. under Input files. choose Export Logfile. A dialog appears in which you point out where the uplink AQM data files are located (one XML file for each AQM call). An example is shown below: UL AQM root directory • • • Click OK. The Add Export Order dialog appears.. • • • The output files will remain TEMS Investigation logfiles with extension . • Preparing and Performing a Merge From the Logfile menu.. Be sure not to check the Merge output option. Execute the AQM export order from the Export Logfile window as described in section 11. click the Browse dir button next to the Directory box and navigate to the desired directory. You also need to specify where the merged output files should be written. all entries being sorted by their timestamps.Chapter 11. See section 11.6. To compensate for the delay in computing the AQM data.1. What happens during the merge is that the uplink AQM data is integrated into the logfile. then OK once more.3. Logfiles 11. The name of each output logfile will consist of the original name plus the suffix “-AQM”. Compare section 11.trp. To this end. the logfile export function also moves the downlink data 5. • • Under Format. You are now ready to perform the merge. Click OK to exit the Add Export Order dialog.0 103 .5 s backwards in time so that each score aligns with the speech sentence for which it was computed. (Exception: The first score in each pair of Frequent AQM scores needs to be moved a further 2.trp) containing the downlink AQM data. Click the “.

click the Generate Report button on the Report toolbar. chapter 9. This is necessary in order for the report generation to work properly. From one or several logfiles you can generate a report in HTML format which summarizes the data in the logfiles. see the document “AQM in TEMS Products (Including PESQ and POLQA)” which is found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. This dialog appears: 104 . If one of these files is currently open. 11.0 User’s Manual backwards. For in-depth coverage of the computation of AQM data. • • The logfiles to be included in the report cannot be open while the report is generated. For full details of logfile report contents and format.8. No duplication of data in the output logfile will result from this: the logfile export function processes each AQM call only once. close it. see the Technical Reference.25 s in total.TEMS Investigation 14. including timing issues.) The uplink data is simply inserted into the logfiles at the correct points in time. If any external devices are activated. To prepare a logfile report. or 8. deactivate them. Generating Logfile Reports Note: Reporting functions are also available in TEMS Discovery. and to repeat the merge procedure later on with further uplink data supplemented. It is possible to perform a merge with an incomplete set of uplink data files.

choose the logfile or logfiles on which to base the report. Enter a path. Specify an output directory for the report.Chapter 11.0 105 .1.8. Logfiles • • • First. 11..” to browse your file system. Click Add and browse for the files. IE Tab NT12-2533 ver 1. Now click Properties to assemble the contents of the report. or click the button labeled “. A multi-tab dialog appears. Those that you choose are listed in the Files box..

Choose an argument (where applicable). and uncheck the others. Adding User-defined Thresholds • To add a pair of thresholds.0 User’s Manual The report can compare information element values with thresholds. it is indicated for each threshold • • how many times the value of the information element has crossed the threshold (changed from a more normal value to a more extreme one) how long these peaks/dips have lasted on average. as is seen in the above screenshot. Each item in the list represents a set of two thresholds for an information element value: or Whether peaks or dips are counted depends on the information element and cannot be changed.TEMS Investigation 14. Check those that you wish to use. It will contain statistics of the type “Percentage of measurement points with Active Set CPICH Ec/No below –15 dB”. A number of thresholds are predefined in the dialog. Specify the two thresholds. In the report. All thresholded information elements listed will also have their distributions visualized in bar charts. you can also define your own thresholds. • • • Choose an information element. click the Add button. 106 . Check a cellular technology to use all thresholds defined for that technology.

If you set up your own value ranges for an IE. Customizing Value Ranges The Ranges column is used to customize the drawing of distribution charts (see the Technical Reference. select it and click the Delete button. section 9. 11.2.Chapter 11. Logfiles • • Click Add to add this threshold pair to the list and keep the Add Threshold dialog open. double-click it and enter the desired new value. Click the Edit Range button. Modify the value ranges in the dialog that appears. Events Tab The report has a section with event statistics. By default no ranges are set. the distribution chart will be drawn with one bar for each range: • • • Select the desired information element. Click OK to add this threshold pair to the list and close the Add Threshold dialog. and the distribution charts are drawn in a preconfigured manner.4). On this tab you choose what event types to include in these statistics. double-click it and enter the desired new value.0 107 .8. Editing Arguments • To edit the argument of the information element (where one exists). NT12-2533 ver 1. Editing Thresholds • To edit a threshold. Deleting Thresholds • To delete a threshold pair.

8. The algorithm counts all events. “DC1”. if available.4. click the Define channels button in order to populate the “Available” box. is included implicitly.0 User’s Manual • Check the events you want to include. “MS2”. Press Ctrl + A to select all events. Scanned Channels Tab Note: The settings on this tab are applicable only if your logfiles contain scan data. • Mobiles Tab Check the external devices whose data you want to include in the report. This is also the default setting. etc. By default all device channels (“MS1”. In this step you choose what scan data to present in the report. not only those signifying failures.) used to record the logfile will be checked. • First. GPS data.3. Therefore. 11. press Ctrl + A again to deselect all events. Note: The ranking of cells in the report (“Worst Cell Indication”) is partially based on the number of events occurring in the cell. only failure events should be checked in this step. and leave the rest unchecked. This dialog appears: 108 . 11.8. in order for the cell ranking to make sense.TEMS Investigation 14.

just check the desired ARFCNs in the list box. – – – • Click OK to return to the Report Properties dialog. The scrambling code selection applies to all UARFCNs within the chosen range. The CPI selection applies to all UARFCNs within the chosen range.Chapter 11. specify a UARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. The cell selection applies to all EARFCNs within the chosen range. then check the desired CPIs in the list box. then check the desired scrambling codes in the list box. specify an EARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. specify a UARFCN range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. – – For GSM. specify an RF channel range under “Lower limit” and “Upper limit”. The PN selection applies to all RF channels within the chosen range. For LTE. For TD-SCDMA. select the band of interest. then check the desired Cell Identities in the list box. NT12-2533 ver 1. Logfiles • In the combo box at the top. For WCDMA.0 109 . WCDMA: m[f] means scrambling code m on UARFCN f. For CDMA. It might look like this: The “Available” list box now lists the selected channels in the following format: • • GSM: m[p] means ARFCN m on the p MHz band. then check the desired PNs in the list box.

Move the items that you wish to present from the Available box to the Selected box.TEMS Investigation 14.rpt. User Details Tab Here you can type a user name and a report number which will be printed in the report header. Time. CDMA: m[f] means PN m on RF channel f. median.8. click Finish. 11.5. click Save and store the file where appropriate. 11. The averaging takes place in the mW domain. min. • Generating the Report In the Report wizard.8. • • In the Report Properties dialog.6. click Load and locate the setup file.8.8. max) and a bar chart. you may want to save the setup for future use. chapter 9 for a complete description): • • Header: Date.8. TD-SCDMA: m[f] means CPI m on UARFCN f. Report Contents The logfile report has the following main sections (see the Technical Reference. the report will contain signal strength statistics (mean.0 User’s Manual • • • • LTE: m[f] means Cell Identity m on EARFCN f. 11. To load a previously saved setup into the Report Properties dialog. The file extension is . Saving and Loading Report Setups When you are done specifying the report contents.0\GeneratedReports.7. For each selected item. 11. The report will be stored under [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. Prepared by Logfile information: Logfile names and used equipment 110 .

NT12-2533 ver 1.Chapter 11. Logfiles • • • • • • Worst cell indication: Ranking of cells based on thresholds crossed and events triggered Thresholds: Detailed statistics on how often and in what cells each threshold has been crossed Events: Statistics on events Scan data: Statistics on the signal strength of scanned channels (if any) Distribution charts for thresholded parameters Distribution charts for scan data (if any) The output involving cell data naturally requires a cell file in order to be generated.0 111 .

• • TEMS Investigation logfile (*. the iBwave format is always used.1. Introduction The Pinpoint Window is designed to further facilitate pinpointing of indoor routes by enabling the construction and use of pre-planned routes. Map images of arbitrary size can be loaded. The Pinpoint Window 12. but please note that image files larger than 75 MB (pixel width × pixel height × 4 > 7. The Pinpoint Window supports loading of map sets in the iBwave container format (as does TEMS Pocket) and in a number of other formats.ibwc): used as map set format in TEMS Pocket 11. Logfiles that you record along your planned routes are created in regular TEMS Investigation format (*. Please note that the Pinpoint Window is not a subtype of the Map window (see chapter 31) but distinct from it.1.2. When you save a map set that you have modified in the Pinpoint Window (by defining planned routes in it).x. similar to those in TEMS Pocket 11. Such logfiles incorporate the map set used. version 14. • Creating Planned Routes Opening a Map Set Click the Open button and browse to select a map set file. 12.3 112 .0 User’s Manual 12.2.TEMS Investigation 14.1.0 and later) created during a previous route walk in the Pinpoint Window iBwave collection (*.2. Supported File Formats Holding Map Sets Among these formats are some that include a map set besides other contents. 12.3).5 × 107) will be displayed at reduced resolution in the Pinpoint Window. 12.trp).trp. The operations in the Pinpoint Window are also wholly distinct from the pinpointing performed in a Map window (see section 11.1.1.

it is displayed in the map view.pms) TEMS Pocket 11.Chapter 12. The Pinpoint Window • • • • TEMS Pocket 11.tab) Please note that image files in map sets must be positioned.zip) MapInfo TAB file (*. *. • Layout Plan: Expand this item to show the layout plans defined for the selected building.3 logfile (*. a TAB file with WGS84 coordinates must be present. the pop-out pane on the right is populated with the following metadata: • Building: Expand this item to show a list of the buildings contained in the map set.1.0 113 . Long: Coordinates of the top left corner of the layout plans for each building.2. specifically.2 map set file (*.x logfile (*. NT12-2533 ver 1. For each layout plan are indicated: – – – The layout plan name The number of routes currently defined for this layout plan The dimensions (in pixels) of the layout plan image.0–11.2.zip) TEMS Pocket 7.tpz. For each building is indicated: – Lat. 12. When you click a layout plan. Map Set Metadata Shown in Pop-out Pane After you have loaded a map set.

– – – – – For each route is stated the number of waypoints it contains. • • Map Handling and Controls You can pan the map by dragging. 12. 12.2.TEMS Investigation 14. See section 12. When you click a route. provisionally named “Unnamed Route <n>”.2. A new route appears in the route list. At the outset. it is plotted on the map. Click the “home” button to set the zoom to native map size (zoom level = 1.2. it contains no waypoints. Click this button next to the route to start creating it. of course. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse scroll wheel.4. Click the Add Route button to create a new route.3.2. The slider on the left is a zoom control.0 User’s Manual • Route: This item holds the routes defined for the plan currently selected under Layout Plan. The current zoom level is indicated by the figure below the slider.2. Click the button next to a route to delete it from the map set. Click the button next to a route to modify the route.0) and place the map image in the top left corner of the Pinpoint Window.3. 114 . • Creating a New Route Click the Add Route button. See section 12. The contents of the pop-out pane are replaced.

just click in the desired location.0 115 .Chapter 12. NT12-2533 ver 1. The waypoint is marked by a pin symbol and labeled with a sequence number. • • Pan and zoom the map if necessary to locate the spot where you want to place your first pinpoint. • Keep adding waypoints to trace your planned route. The Pinpoint Window • In the Route Name field. The route is created as a chain of waypoints. To add a waypoint. it is joined to the previous one by a connecting straight line. Each time you place a new waypoint. starting at “1”. The Add Waypoints button is toggled “ON” in this situation to indicate that you are currently in “edit route” mode. enter a name for the new route.

When you have finished. The route is then loaded. (If Add Waypoints is “ON”. Also add a waypoint wherever the walking direction changes. Click Save to save the new route as well as any other changes you have made to the map set. the planned route should not pass through walls or other impassable obstacles. When a pin is selected. click the Done button.2. Then click on the map where you wish to place the new waypoints. since measurements will then subsequently be positioned incorrectly along those segments. The first new waypoint is automatically connected to the last waypoint of the existing route. 12.) • To add waypoints at the end of the route. you must take care not to release the mouse button without dragging. toggle the Add Waypoints button “ON”.TEMS Investigation 14. How to modify your route in the course of creating it is the topic of the next section. The target format is always *. click the Done button to exit “edit route” mode. the waypoints should be located in such a way that the entire route (as defined by the connecting line segments) is “walkable”. it is highlighted by a shaded bounding box.4.ibwc (iBwave collection).0 User’s Manual It is appropriate to place waypoints no further than 10–20 s apart in terms of walking time. It is most convenient to turn Add Waypoints “OFF” before rearranging waypoints. of course. and its head turns blue. since such an action will add a new waypoint instead. • • When you are done creating your planned route. just click and drag the pin where you want it. • To move a waypoint to a new location. click the “pencil” button next to it in the pop-out pane. In other words. 116 . Editing a Route If the route you want to edit is not already loaded in the window. Most importantly.

The delete operation removes the pin symbol from the map view.Chapter 12.0 117 . The other method is to select the relevant waypoint and then click one of the buttons Insert Before or Insert After in the pop-out pane. NT12-2533 ver 1. then select Insert Before or Insert After from the context menu that appears. and the waypoints adjacent to the one deleted are joined by a new connecting line. you can choose between two methods: – One method is to right-click the waypoint nearest to the spot of interest. then select the waypoint of interest and click the Delete Selected button. The Pinpoint Window • To insert a new waypoint somewhere along the existing route. – A new waypoint is now added halfway between the selected one and the one preceding or following it. or: Make sure Add Waypoints is toggled “OFF”. Adjust the position of the new waypoint by dragging it. you can again proceed in two ways: – – Right-click the waypoint and choose Delete from the context menu. • To delete a waypoint.

1). It should be pointed out straight away that a track can be less complex.6. visit some waypoints more than once. Deleting a Route To delete a route from the map set. Unloading a Map Set There is no explicit function for unloading a map set.2. click the Delete All button. Walking Planned Routes This section tells how to walk a pre-planned route. The planned route is drawn in red between waypoints whose pins are likewise colored red. conversely.1. or more complex. When you load a new map set.3. than the route it follows. • • Loading and Walking a Route Load the desired map set by clicking the Open button. select the planned route of interest among those defined in the map set.TEMS Investigation 14.2. Please note that it is currently not possible to edit a route while walking it. The logfile of the track records all of your movements as reflected by your commit actions. The map is centered around the first waypoint. which is enclosed within a shaded bounding box. that is. 12. Next. A recorded walk along a planned route is referred to as a track in TEMS Investigation parlance. 12. 12. 118 .3.5. 12. during recording (see section 12.3.0 User’s Manual • To delete all waypoints. This is because you can skip waypoints or. click the “trash can” button next to the route in the pop-out pane. the previous one is unloaded automatically.

Back button: Retreat to the previous waypoint without committing to the current one. Click the Start button to start recording your track. they are left out of account when data is positioned.3. all measurements collected so far are positioned at that waypoint.trp). The Pinpoint Window • • Go to the physical location marked by the first waypoint. you will begin a new track which is saved as a distinct logfile (unless you choose to overwrite the previous one). all measurements collected since your last commit are positioned in a straight line between this waypoint and the one you last committed to. Stop button: Stop the test walk and close the track. which also accommodates the auxiliary pinpoint data. This file is created in the regular TEMS Investigation logfile format (*.Chapter 12. You are asked where to save the resulting logfile. If you skip one or several waypoints. see also section 12. Clicking the Commit button triggers the Pinpoint Added event. click the Commit button to indicate that you are currently in the highlighted location (“#1”).3. When you perform the commit action.0 119 . The first time you commit. The NT12-2533 ver 1. You should therefore always commit to the first waypoint immediately on starting logfile recording. Commit button: Commit to the current waypoint (whose sequence number labels the button) and move on to the next waypoint. If you click Start again with the same route still loaded. As soon as you have started recording. The following controls appear in the pop-out pane: Control Function Forward button: Advance to the next waypoint without committing to the current one.

The highlighting switches to the next waypoint. Walk in a straight line and at a steady pace towards the waypoint now highlighted.2.3. and the positioning of measurements is always based on your movements between waypoints (regardless of how you retrace your steps). and commit to the same waypoint multiple times. and when.TEMS Investigation 14. 12. Repeating Parts of a Route It is possible to backtrack along the route using the Back button. When you have reached that waypoint. • Continue in this fashion until you have completed the route.0 User’s Manual pinhead turns green and the pin is redrawn “pressed down” (shorter) to indicate that you have visited this spot. For each commit action is shown at what waypoint it occurred. and the map is re-centered around it. Doing so simply adds more data to the logfile. Below the Commit button in the pop-out pane is a stack of boxed items representing your latest commits. 120 . click the Commit button again (now labeled “#2”).

3 on the preparation of planned routes. using the Back and Forward buttons.3. This is useful if you cannot get to a waypoint. and committing once again to a waypoint does not in any way override the previous commit action. 12. Currently there is no presentation of information elements or other measurement data in the Pinpoint Window.1. A “shortcut” might thus be created that goes through walls or other obstacles – compare the advice given in section 12.Chapter 12. To avoid these complications. The Pinpoint Window No previously recorded data is ever deleted from the logfile.4. click Back and commit to the same waypoint once more before you continue. it is advisable not to take extended pauses while walking and recording a track. in live mode as well as during analysis. If for some reason you need to take a break during a test walk. Please bear in mind.0 121 . that this effectively removes the waypoint from the track when it comes to the positioning of the recorded data. Relation to Other TEMS Investigation Functions Data Presentation 12. However. 12. it is best to proceed as follows: • • Walk up to the next waypoint of the route and commit to it before taking your break.3. This procedure ensures that the measurements collected during the pause and along the next route segment to follow will be positioned accurately. you can of course have any presentation windows open side by side with the Pinpoint Window and inspect measurement data there. the measurements will be positioned along a straight line between the adjacent retained waypoints. however. When resuming your test walk. for instance because it is behind a locked door.2. Skipping Waypoints of a Route You can skip waypoints without committing to them. Note also that you can have your walked track plotted in a Map window.4. NT12-2533 ver 1.

Having a GPS activated in TEMS Investigation does not affect the Pinpoint Window in any way.0 User’s Manual 12.4. so that any subsequent recordings initiated while the track is still being walked will be positioned according to the pinpointing data. these recordings will automatically be positioned according to the Pinpoint Window waypoints.TEMS Investigation 14. you can start a track walk in the Pinpoint Window. However. A Start Recording activity in a script will start a new logfile. the following applies: • You can start recording of other logfiles by other means (manually or by running a script). it will keep the positioning source that was preferred in TEMS Investigation when the recording began. • • • Conversely. starting a Pinpoint Window track automatically redefines the preferred positioning source as pinpointing. and not by any other source. The ongoing recording will not be affected. Scripts can run independently of what is done in the Pinpoint Window. Clicking Stop Recording on the main window toolbar has no effect on the Pinpoint Window. 122 . Coexistence Issues While you are recording a logfile (walking a track) in the Pinpoint Window. while logfile recording initiated by other means is in progress. but note again that the positioning will be governed by your actions in the Pinpoint Window.2. In summary. However. but the positioning source is not unique to each recording. all types of logfile recordings can be initiated independently without restrictions.

Expand this node to expose a list of the scanning methods that this device supports. the Activities tab is populated.1. 13. • • Right-click the scanning method you want to use. Setting Up a Scan Scanning tasks are set up from the Navigator’s Equipment tab. • • • Performing a Scan With suitable configuration sets already defined. select the device to scan with. • First. expand the Scan node. Right-click the scanning method you want to use. to be able to access the scanning configuration dialogs. Once the device has been activated. All details are covered in subsequent chapters (14–19). specifically.2. For a scanning-capable device. and from the context menu select the desired configuration set among those in existence. Scanning: General 13. the available activities will include a Scan item.Chapter 13. Scanning: General 13. NT12-2533 ver 1. from the Activities subtab in the bottom pane. See chapter 8. and select Configuration Sets. you need to activate the device you want to scan with (if it is not already activated). On the Activities subtab.0 123 . The dialog contents depend on the technology and scanning method chosen as well as on the make and model of the scanning device. here is how to initiate a scan: On the Navigator’s Equipment tab. This opens a dialog where you define a setup for the selected scanning method.

section 10. • To stop scanning.1. The information elements of interest are all found in the Information Elements and Events volume. Recording Scan Data To record scan data.4.3. It cannot engage in voice/video calls or data services during this time. scan data can be displayed in status windows of your own design. create a new logfile as described in section 11. and select Stop. Under the Scan node. Presenting Scan Data The output of scans is primarily intended to be displayed in a suite of readymade bar charts and other windows. and from the context menu select Start. While the scan is ongoing. For example. 13. 13. right-click the scanning method being executed. you are free to present it in any presentation window.0 User’s Manual • Right-click the scanning method item again. However. see the Getting Started Manual.TEMS Investigation 14. go to the Activities subtab again. It is possible to scan with several devices simultaneously. The scanning presentation windows are fully synchronized with the rest of the application.5. • • Technical Data on Scanning Devices A Sony Ericsson phone cannot act as a regular phone while it is scanning. For band support in connectable scanning devices. since all scan data is available in information elements. Frequency band support is determined by the scanning device and by the antennas.1. How to build a status window is covered in chapter 24. and the output from all of these can be displayed in parallel. 13. Detailed data on the scanning capabilities and performance of Sony Ericsson phones is provided in the technical paper “Scanning with Sony • 124 . it will be indicated in the top pane of the Equipment tab for the device that is busy scanning.4.

For example. 13. section 10. Scanning: General Ericsson TEMS Devices”.3.6.6. scanning methods are conceptually independent. then the actual resource use will be raised automatically if the scan tasks require it.2. It is therefore not possible when setting up NT12-2533 ver 1.1.6. you are continuously notified in the setup dialog of how many measurement points that remain. a WCDMA SCH timeslot scan at maximum resolution may require the full resources of the PCTel scanner. Notes on Scanner Multitasking PCTel Scanners Within a cellular technology. and the setup dialog keeps track of the number of measurement points that remain to be allocated. The resource percentage selected is the minimum that the scan task is guaranteed to get when executed.6. 13. A PCTel scanner’s measurement capacity is indicated as a number of measurement points. If the scan tasks that are running have a combined resource allocation of less than 100% in their setups. so that it cannot perform any other tasks at the same time. Only the scanner measurement capacity places a limit on the possibilities of handling several scanning tasks in parallel.5. please consult documentation from the respective suppliers.7. As you set up the scanning tasks.) Again the limit is expressed in terms of measurement points. For further information on third-party scanning devices.2. but the data volume would then become unmanageably large. 13. TEMS Investigation sets a limit on the amount of scan data it will accept. 13. Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The TSMW scanner uses a form of automatic load balancing to make the best possible use of the scanner’s measurement capacity. and they can be run concurrently by PCTel scanners. • Some technical data on PCTel scanners and antennas used with them is provided in the Getting Started Manual. DRT Scanners For a DRT scanner. included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. (The DRT scanner can produce more data than this.0 125 .Chapter 13.

0 User’s Manual scan tasks to allocate more than 100% of resources in total. 126 . See section 8. 13.5. Notes on GPS Units in Scanners The internal GPS in a scanner equipped with such a device will deliver data only if it is selected as Preferred GPS and activated in TEMS Investigation.4. Sony Ericsson Phones and SRUs Sony Ericsson phones and SRUs do not handle concurrent execution of multiple scanning methods. 13. (There is no inverse mechanism treating the selected resource percentages as “opening bids” that can be pared down at execution time.7.TEMS Investigation 14.6.) R&S recommends that each scan task should be allocated at least 20% of resources in the setup dialog.

Built on Ericsson hardware. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. For more information about connectable scanners with GSM scanning capability. section 4. 14.Chapter 14.4. see Information Elements and Events. 1.0 127 . chapter 14. GSM Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of GSM radio frequency carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • Sony Ericsson phones1 SRUs (Scanning Receiver Units)2 PCTel scanners Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner. For specifics. A note on terminology: GSM radio frequency carriers are sometimes referred to below as channels for simplicity. How to configure the R&S scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual.1. NT12-2533 ver 1.1.1. see the Getting Started Manual. GSM Scanning 14. 2. supported using the various devices as indicated. section 10. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable). Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these GSM scanning methods.1. although this is a slight abuse of the term.

Technology Band Channels 14. SRU Setting this to Yes causes the phone to decode the Base Station Identity Code whenever possible.2. There is no limit to the selectable number of channels.2. 128 Section Ref.0 User’s Manual Sony Ericsson PCTel SeeGull GSM Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device RSSI scanning. GSM frequency band or bands to scan.2 14. 14. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan: General Settings Set this to “GSM” for GSM scanning. static ARFCN set RSSI scanning: BSIC decoding RSSI scanning: C/I measurement RSSI scanning: Sys Info decoding Spectrum analysis R&S TSMW 14.3 14.2. ARFCNs to scan on the selected band.2. Select all channels to scan the entire band.TEMS Investigation 14.2.3 14.2 14.3 14.1.2. SRU . BSIC Setup of RSSI Scan: Sony Ericsson. It should be noted that BSIC decoding is computationally costly and considerably reduces the sample rate of the scan.

Chapter 14. It should be noted that BSIC decoding is computationally costly and considerably reduces the sample rate of the scan. Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel SeeGull Select whether to perform a regular GSM signal scan (“Normal”) or a Continuous Wave scan (“CW”).1. Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points BSIC See section 13. PCTel scanners can be purchased with or without the C/I scanning function enabled. PCTel scanners supplied with older versions of TEMS Investigation may lack BSIC decoding capability.2.3.0 129 . etc. C/I Measurements Setting this to Yes causes a subset of the “C/I” information elements to be updated. NT12-2533 ver 1. as described in Information Elements and Events. check the Device Inquiry mode report from the scanner to find out whether it has this capability (“GSM BCCH C/I”). Regardless of the choice made here.1. in the “GSM” category). It is not possible to specify the type of scan for each channel separately. This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning. the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (Scanned RxLev. Check the Device Inquiry mode report from the scanner to find out whether it is capable of decoding BSIC. section 3. Setting this to Yes causes the phone to decode the Base Station Identity Code whenever possible. GSM Scanning 14. the function can be turned on and off in the dialog. If available.6.

and GSM frame number. Setup of RSSI Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Average measurement rate (in millihertz) shared between all selected channels. The scanner must suspend the regular scan in order to read System Information.TEMS Investigation 14. the information element Neighbor (SI) ARFCN is updated. Dummy Burst Power (DL): Enables power measurement for dummy bursts.2. Whenever System Information is read. C/I (DL): Enables carrier-to-interference measurement. SCH Power (DL): Enables SCH-related measurements such as SCH power. BSIC. Resource Allocation (%) 130 . Measurement Rate (mHz) Measurement Details • • • RF Front-end Front-end on which to schedule measurements. The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the built-in front-ends. ETS power.6.0 User’s Manual SI on Strongest Setting this to Yes causes the scanner to decode System Information messages for the strongest cell. and this is therefore done only once each time the strongest cell changes. See also section 13. 14. This can produce many more power results for C0 carriers than the SCH measurement.3. Dummy Burst Removal (DL): Enables detection of dummy bursts and removal of dummy bursts from the GSM signal before further analysis.4. Resources allocated on the specified front-end. • • Channels: Channels to scan. This is only valid for SCH-related measurements.

1 that are associated with scanning. There is no predefined status window for this purpose. Spectrum Analysis The setup for spectrum analysis is the same as for WCDMA (except that Technology = GSM).Chapter 14. 14. see chapter 30. Scan data can also be presented in status windows. GSM Scanning 14. See section 15. Regarding the bar chart window itself.3.2. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 131 . section 3. The information elements of interest are those in Information Elements and Events. The bottom chart by default shows all scanned channels in order of ascending ARFCN. but you can design one yourself: see chapter 24.5. Presentation of RSSI Scanning The main vehicle for presenting GSM RSSI scan data is the GSM RSSI Scan Bar Chart: The top chart by default shows the strongest scanned channels sorted by decreasing signal strength.1.5.

Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these WCDMA scanning methods.1. see the Getting Started Manual. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation.TEMS Investigation 14.1.0 User’s Manual 15. section 10. How to configure the R&S scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. WCDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of WCDMA carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • • Certain Sony Ericsson phones operating in scan mode SRU (Scanning Receiver Unit) PCTel scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner Anritsu scanner. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable).4.1. chapter 14. For more information about connectable devices with WCDMA scanning capability. 15. 132 . supported using the various devices as indicated.

0 133 Section Ref.3 15.2 8 4 12 12 12 12 15.4 15.2 15.2. Anritsu ML8720: 1 or 2 depending on physical configuration.Chapter 15.2. Top N Pilot: SIB decoding (continuous) Pilot: SIB decoding (snapshot) Pilot: High Speed/High Dynamic Pilot: P-SCH + S-SCH Pilot: Max. R&S TSMW PCTel PCT WCDMA Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device PCTel SeeGull MX PCTel SeeGull EX PCTel SeeGull LX Anritsu ML8780A Anritsu ML8720 . WCDMA Scanning Sony Ericsson.2 15.2 15. static SC set Pilot scanning. of UARFCNs SCH timeslot scanning RSSI scanning Spectrum analysis Network scanning 1.5 15.2 15.6 NT12-2533 ver 1.2 15.3 15. SRU Pilot scanning. 12 1 15. no.

Here you set the UARFCNs of the frequencies on which to scan the CPICH. 134 . BCH scanning: User-defined. UARFCNs and scrambling codes are selected independently of one another. static set of scrambling codes (common to all UARFCNs) is scanned. SRU Setup options are as follows: Scan selected: A user-defined. The choice is made under Type of Scanning in the setup dialog. • • • Setup of Pilot Scan: Sony Ericsson. the same method also scans primary and secondary synchronization channels (P-SCH. static set of scrambling codes (common to all UARFCNs) scanned. Scan strongest: Strongest scrambling codes scanned (“Top N”). Unconditional and continuous SIB decoding.2.2. Optional snapshot SIB decoding.1. S-SCH). Technology Band Channels 15. Several UARFCNs can be scanned at a time.2. scrambled with cell-specific scrambling codes. Setup of Pilot Scan: General Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. The allowed range is dependent on the frequency band. Optional snapshot SIB decoding. Pilot Scanning (with SCH Scanning) This method scans CPICH control channels. Where supported. WCDMA frequency band to scan.TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual 15.2. 15.

• Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under Channels. and the sensitivity of the scrambling code detection may be lower as well. Scan Strongest This field is enabled if you have chosen “Scan strongest” under Type of Scanning. Scrambling Codes NT12-2533 ver 1. enter the value N here (N  40). • Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs. • Cell Noise Floor Ec/Io threshold for accepting a signal on the CPICH as a detected cell. BCH scanning: If you choose this option. The default is –26 dB. However.0 135 . This field is enabled if you have chosen “Scan selected” or “BCH scanning” under Type of Scanning. and the same scan data will be collected. the updating frequency will be considerably lower. The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes. WCDMA Scanning Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. The processing time freed up in this way is instead used to continuously decode System Information Blocks (SIBs). you select scrambling codes in the same way as for Scan selected. Enter the scrambling codes you want to scan.Chapter 15. unlike that governed by the System Information option (which see). This decoding is furthermore continuous. The threshold should be adjusted to ensure detection of cells actually present while keeping the false detection rate down.

SIBs will be decoded again for that cell. • Number of Pilots This field appears if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan strongest”. 15. Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel The set of scrambling codes to scan on each UARFCN is composed in one of two ways: • • user-defined.2.1. this option is always set to Yes. The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. If the strongest cell does not change within two minutes. enter the value N here (N  32). common to all UARFCNs strongest scrambling codes (“Top N”) What settings are supported by the various PCTel SeeGull models appears from the table in section 15. a “snapshot” SIB decoding will be done once every time a new cell has become the strongest (unless that cell has previously appeared as the strongest during the last two minutes).TEMS Investigation 14. Up to 128 scrambling codes can be selected. static set of scrambling codes. Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs.3. It then refers not to snapshot SIB decoding but to the continuous SIB decoding performed by that method. the phone reverts to regular pilot scanning. For BCH scanning. Only settings supported by the connected scanner are displayed in the dialog. • Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under Channels. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes. On completing the SIB decoding. 136 .0 User’s Manual System Information If this option is set to Yes for Scan selected or Scan strongest. The same scrambling codes will be scanned on the CPICH and on the P-SCH and S-SCH.

It is possible to reduce the amount of data that is presented and recorded: • • Full means no reduction. and you will thus be able to discern multipath and fading effects more accurately. By raising the threshold you reduce the influence of random noise correlations. S-SCH Ec/Io.0 137 .10). • SIR Setting this to Yes causes the scanner to deliver the information elements “Sc . and Rake Finger Count are excluded.2. WCDMA Scanning Selected Numbers PN Threshold This field appears if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan selected”. Remaining Measurement Points Data Mode See section 13.) For “Scan strongest”. P-SCH Ec/Io. SIR”. The setting –20 dB is recommended. The precise meaning of “Sub” depends on the scope of the scan: • For “Scan selected”. only P-SCH Ec/Io and S-SCH Ec/Io are excluded. It should be noted that choosing “Sub” results in a much faster updating of scan presentations. This is a signal code power threshold (in dB) used for the Aggregate Ec/Io and Delay Spread measurements (see section 15. NT12-2533 ver 1.7).8 and 15. Sub means that some data is not presented or recorded (compare sections 15.. (The “SIR” field is disabled in this case. as is SIR.1.. If the PN threshold is set too low. the Aggregate Ec/Io and Delay Spread values will be affected by random noise more than may be desired. Enter the scrambling codes you want to scan.6. Time Offset.Chapter 15.2.2.

These are two algorithms with different priorities: • High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy. See also section 13.0 User’s Manual System Information Set this to Yes to decode System Information blocks (continuously). Each sample reported by the scanner is typically based on a measurement 20 ms in length.3. • Dwelling Time The length of time the scanner dwells on each scrambling code (cell) trying to decode System Information blocks. The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the two built-in front-ends.TEMS Investigation 14. High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate.2. 3rd. whereas High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate. From the SIB decoding are extracted the information elements “Sc 1st (2nd. Setup of Pilot Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW High Speed or High Dynamic. These are two algorithms with different priorities. Given as a multiple of 40 ms. High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy. before moving on to the next cell. Measurement Mode Measurement Rate (mHz) RF Front-end Resource Allocation (%) 138 . 15. With this option selected.4. Average measurement rate (in millihertz) shared between all selected channels. Resources allocated on the specified front-end. Each reported sample is typically based on a 10 ms measurement.6. High Speed and High Dynamic. The default is 50 = 2000 ms. Front-end (processor) on which to schedule measurement. Measurement Mode There are two choices. a maximum of 16 scrambling codes can be scanned. 4th) Intra-freq Cells”.

Setup of Pilot Scan: Anritsu The set of scrambling codes to scan on a UARFCN is composed in one of two ways: • • user-defined. (ML8720 only) Scan strongest: Choose this to have the N strongest scrambling codes reported from the chosen UARFCNs (“Top N”).5.2. The same scrambling codes will be scanned on the CPICH and on the P-SCH and S-SCH. To scan the N strongest scrambling codes. For example. • Scan selected: Choose this to scan a static set of scrambling codes on all frequencies defined under “UARFCN” below. • Number of Pilots This field appears if Type of scanning is set to “Scan strongest”.Chapter 15. or strongest scrambling codes (“Top N”) Type of Scanning See also the introduction of this section. where Nch is the number of UARFCNs entered under Channels. enter the value N here. 15. The default is 4 dB. if 3 UARFCNs are selected. Up to 32 scrambling codes can be selected. The scanner automatically finds the strongest scrambling codes. The maximum number of pilots that can be scanned is equal to floor(40/Nch). up to 13 SCs can be scanned on each. This threshold (value in dB) determines how high above the noise floor a scrambling code must reach in order to be accepted as valid by the scanner. static set of scrambling codes. Selective Level NT12-2533 ver 1. WCDMA Scanning Resource Available (%) Read-only field indicating the remaining available resources on the processor selected under RF Frontend. common to all UARFCNs.0 139 .

the scanner will search for scrambling codes that use P-SCH and S-SCH.) This mode is useful especially for troubleshooting of transmitters. This setting governs the choice of cell search method in Top N scan mode (“Scan strongest” option). • If SCH is selected.7) the CPICH Scan Data status window (section 15. The default is 20 dB. Setting the threshold at n dB means that a signal path must not be more than n dB weaker than the strongest one. If you select two UARFCNs. as explained above.2. this threshold governs how many Rake fingers will contribute to the signal.2. for a given scrambling code. the scanner will perform continuous SIB decoding. (For all scrambling codes detected in this way. only CPICH channels will be scanned to find scrambling codes. 15.6. This can only be done on one UARFCN at a time (only one is selectable under Channels when the BCH Scan option is set). • If P-CPICH is selected.TEMS Investigation 14. The P-CPICH mode cannot be used if two UARFCNs are to be scanned. This is more suitable for drive testing and is the default setting in TEMS Investigation. the P-CPICH radio button is grayed. • • • Presentation: General Pilot scan data is presented in the CPICH Scan bar charts (section 15. the scanner will measure and report on the P-SCH and S-SCH as well. however.0 User’s Manual Rake Threshold This threshold (value in dB) determines. Search Method (ML8720) BCH Scan (ML8780A) If selected.2. In other words.2.8) the CPICH Scan line charts (section 15. how strong a signal path must be (in relation to the strongest signal path for that scrambling code) in order to be accepted as valid.9) 140 . If you are scanning two UARFCNs it is the only option.

Chapter 15. 15. whereas for the “Top N” scan the number N is only marginally important (since all scrambling codes have to be searched regardless of N). The columns have the following meanings: NT12-2533 ver 1. Regarding data sorting. Each bar chart by default presents peak Ec/Io (see section 15. WCDMA Scanning Synchronization channels are presented in the Synch Channels window (section 15.10).8. The updating rate is chiefly dependent on the number of live signals encountered in the network.2.13. Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Bar Charts The CPICH Scan bar charts present CPICH scan data. the updating rate is also greatly affected by the size of this set.2.7. For a manually selected set of scrambling codes. see section 15.2. One predefined bar chart is provided for each UMTS frequency scanned. Presentation: “CPICH Data” Status Windows The CPICH Data and CPICH Best UARFCN Data status windows both contain a large number of columns with scan data.2. 15.8) for each scrambling code found.0 141 . They differ only with respect to sorting: CPICH Data is sorted first by UARFCN.1. whereas CPICH Best UARFCN Data is sorted by Aggr Ec/Io regardless of UARFCN.2.

Ranges from 0 to 38399. This is a measure of the signal spreading due to multipath propagation. section 3. Rake receiver gain. Rake finger count. the difference between them in dB. The time offset of the radio frame on the CPICH. Peak Ec Ag Ec/Io Ag Ec Aggr–Peak Ec Delay Spread RFC Time Offset SIR All of these are identical with information elements having similar names but beginning with “Sc”. 15. Measured on DPCCH. Time in chips from the first to the last Ec/Io peak that is above the PN threshold. See Information Elements and Events. Difference in dB between the aggregate code power (Ag Ec) and peak code power (Peak Ec).2. Presentation: “CPICH Scan” Line Charts The default configuration of this window is as follows: 142 .0 User’s Manual SC Peak Ec/Io Scrambling code number. given in chips from a 1/100th second time mark aligned with GPS time. i. The aggregate code power of the scrambling code in dBm.e.TEMS Investigation 14. The aggregate code power is a measure of the total signal power (distributed around the main peak due to multipath propagation) that is above the PN threshold (settable in the PCTel scanner: see section 15.2. the number of Ec/Io peaks (multipath components) that are above the PN threshold.e. The aggregate code power of the scrambling code relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io).9. i. i. i. The peak code power of the scrambling code (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). Signal-to-interference ratio of the scrambling code in dB.2.e. The peak code power of the scrambling code in dBm.3). the difference between them in dB.e.

Please note that the IEs described here are no longer present by default in this window.Chapter 15.0 143 . Legend Pane The Legend pane (bottom left) glosses either of the two charts. Here an SC is regarded as a possible active set member if it is sufficiently 1. right-click and choose the desired chart from the context menu. Additional Information Pane The Additional Information pane (bottom right) shows the CPICH pilot pollution situation. To switch to the other chart. you need to add them manually. NT12-2533 ver 1. WCDMA Scanning Chart Panes The charts present the five strongest scrambling codes. The top chart shows Aggr Ec (in dBm) and the bottom chart shows Aggr Ec/Io (in dB).1 • Poss No Of AS Members: The active set (AS) is defined as the set of scrambling codes (SCs) associated with channels that are assigned to a particular subscriber unit.

for “Max 2 SCs”. In the example below. and 4 SCs respectively. 3.. In the above figure. 144 . indicated by argument Threshold for possible AS members (which are included in “Own”) Own power. only the strongest of the three is included in “Own”. “Own” is the sum of the code powers of the N strongest possible active set members. SC code power Strongest SC Distance to threshold.0 User’s Manual strong compared to the strongest SC. there are three such SCs. max 2 SCs SC Other power.. The four “Other/Own” elements represent the assumptions that there is desired signal power on 1.TEMS Investigation 14. “Other” is the sum of the code powers of all remaining SCs. based on the power threshold described above (again given as argument to each information element) and on different assumptions about the number of possible active set members. all SCs with a code power not more than 3 dB below that of the strongest SC will be counted. 2. there are three other SCs reaching above the threshold which is set relative to the strongest SC. so the active set is judged to have a total of four possible members. However. For “Max N SCs”. Note that one cannot know for sure (on the basis of the scan data alone) whether the possible members actually do belong to the active set. Example: If the argument is 3 (default value). Ec values in mW). otherwise it is simply the sum of the code powers of all possible active set members. max 2 SCs The “Other/Own” ratios are of course calculated from absolute code power values (i. The relative code power threshold is determined by the argument within square brackets []. : These are estimated ratios between polluting signal power and desired signal power. if the number of possible members is at least N. • Other/Own .e.

The peak power of the Secondary Synchronization Channel. P-SCH (in dBm).e.e.0 145 . i. “Changing Status Window Properties”.2. i. The peak power of the Primary Synchronization Channel.3. The peak power of the S-SCH (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). The peak power of the P-SCH (Ec) relative to the total signal power in the channel (Io). 15. the difference between them in dB. S-SCH (in dBm). but with different arguments for different elements you cannot really draw any useful conclusions. The presented data can be freely rearranged.Chapter 15. S-SCH Ec S-SCH Ec/Io By default the scrambling codes are sorted by signal power with the strongest on top. WCDMA Scanning Note: The arguments should be kept the same for all five information elements. obtained with the Pilot scanning method. NT12-2533 ver 1. the difference between them in dB.10. Presentation: Synch Channel Data Window This window presents scan data on the synchronization channels P-SCH and S-SCH. as described in section 24. It is of course possible to set each argument to any of the permissible values. SC P-SCH Ec P-SCH Ec/Io Scrambling code number.

1. decoded System Information Blocks are output in the Layer 3 Messages window at a greatly enhanced rate.13. Sort by decreasing Aggr Ec/Io (default) Sort by increasing Aggr Ec/Io A dialog appears with these sorting options: 146 .2.TEMS Investigation 14.2. Another piece of data found in SIBs is an uplink interference measurement. No special presentation windows are provided for BCH scanning.2. 15.0 User’s Manual 15.2. The sorting order is set in the General window. see sections 15. but they are also extracted as information elements.7–15. Presentation: “Finger Info” Status Windows These windows present Rake finger information obtained during Pilot scanning. 15.2.13.11. section 3. One form of refined TEMS Investigation output that can be based on SIBs is the Missing WCDMA Neighbor event which warns about missing neighbors in WCDMA. see Information Elements and Events.2. This is particularly interesting for HSUPA. Double-click the item “WCDMA”. where the guiding principle of scheduling is to provide (as far as possible) all UEs with all the resources they need while also making sure that the total uplink interference does not exceed the accepted maximum. • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.12. Customizing the Presentation 15.2.11 above regarding the presentation of this data. The uplink interference measurements can of course be inspected in the plain-text SIB decoding.2. Sorting of Scrambling Codes You can sort scrambling codes in scanning information elements in a number of different ways. For definitions of the information elements. section 7. However. see Information Elements and Events. Presentation: BCH Scanning All scan data collected using the options Scan selected and Scan strongest are obtained for BCH scanning also (though less frequently). section 3. See Information Elements and Events.2.

and this sorting order is unchangeable. Setup of SCH Timeslot Scan General Settings Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning.1. i.1. Presenting Scrambling Codes from Multiple UARFCNs In the “Sc Best” information elements. on a Primary Synchronization Channel (P-SCH). Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. Sort by scrambling code: Scrambling codes are sorted by index. Use these elements in order to view scan data from several UARFCNs in one window. These elements are sorted by signal strength (Aggr Ec/Io) in descending order. • 15. scrambling code n is always found at argument index n + 1.2) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. UARFCN to scan. It should be pointed out that this scan is wholly separate from the P-SCH and S-SCH scans included in the Pilot scanning method (section 15. WCDMA frequency band to scan. 15.0 147 . WCDMA Scanning • Sort by fixed position: Scrambling codes are sorted by index and are always assigned the same argument indices.3. It is useful for monitoring synchronization reference signals sent on this channel. the code with the next higher index appears at argument index 2. that is. all scrambling codes found on all UMTS frequencies are collected in a single array. 15. etc.Chapter 15.13. SCH Timeslot Scanning This method scans timeslot-length intervals. the code with the lowest index appears at argument index 1.e. Technology Band Channels NT12-2533 ver 1.1.2). 15.3.2.2. intervals 2560 chips long.3. section 3.

Compression Rate Remaining Measurement Points See section 13.1.2.TEMS Investigation 14. Each SCH signal will show up as a spike on the trace. etc.3. Every 2.2. or 8 chips in length. 15.0 User’s Manual Center Frequency The center frequency of the UARFCN chosen. 15.6.1. Context Settings The time resolution of the scan: • • Every means that a power value is reported for every chip in the timeslot. The legend pane gives 148 . Presentation: SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart The bar chart displays an Es/Io trace for the latest timeslot scanned (2560 chips). the height of the spike reflecting the strength of the signal in terms of Es/Io. means that the peak (not average) power is reported for successive segments 2.3. 4.

1. If the base station is not synchronized with GPS time.1. Technology Band NT12-2533 ver 1. each sector will transmit/receive at a different time offset (e. Since the SCH signals are repeated every timeslot.1.Chapter 15. The updating rate is dependent on the compression rate and on network conditions. In the lower right pane. 15. 15. the T_Cell parameter can be determined: the spike will be positioned approximately at T_Cell + 140 chips. In a WCDMA cell with multiple sectors. or 8 chips. section 3. one for each sector. However. the parameters “Time diff 1-2” and “Time diff 2-3” are given: • • “Time diff 1-2” indicates the time separation in chips between the strongest peak and the second strongest. 256. Determining the time separation naturally does not require synchronization of the base station with GPS time. however. the offset being due to delay in the scanner.4.g. “Time diff 2-3” indicates the time separation in chips between the second strongest peak and the third strongest. no conclusions can be drawn about the value of T_Cell.1. These parameters are identical with the information elements SCH TS Sc Time Diff 1-2 and SCH TS Sc Time Diff 2-3. or peak Es/Io for every 2. if the compression rate is set to “Every 4”. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan General Settings Always “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning.4. WCDMA frequency band to scan. see Information Elements and Events. the updating interval will be on the order of 1 s. depending on the setup.4. WCDMA Scanning Es/Io for each chip. 4. the spikes will normally remain in the same positions as the trace is updated. Provided that the base station clock is synchronized with GPS time. From this the time separation between the sectors can be determined. 0.2. see section 15. 15. and 512 chips).0 149 .3. The position of a spike shows at what point a new timeslot begins in the current transmission. The SCH timeslot scan will then display multiple spikes within a timeslot.

150 . This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning.0 User’s Manual Channels UARFCNs to scan (up to 255).2.1. 15. Bandwidth Context Settings Select whether to perform a regular WCDMA signal scan (“Normal”) or a Continuous Wave scan (“CW”). The allowed UARFCN range is dependent on the band. the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (CW Sc RSSI. in the “WCDMA” category). Regardless of the choice made here.4.2.6. etc. Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart This bar chart displays RSSI for each UARFCN scanned.TEMS Investigation 14. 15.4.1. Remaining Measurement Points See section 13.

Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. WCDMA Scanning 15. Given in MHz. the highest selectable resolution being 5 kHz.1. Given in MHz.1. The minimum number is 1. the legend pane will list all samples. Remaining Measurement Points NT12-2533 ver 1. and the maximum is 16. WCDMA frequency band to scan. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan General Settings Choose “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. 15. on the other hand. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz. Spectrum Analysis This scanning method shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency.1.0 151 . In the presentation window. See section 13. Adapt the resolution to the width of the frequency range. Note that the spectrum analysis is prone to consume a large number of measurement points.1. the chart. Technology Band Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth 15.5.1.5.6.2. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits. 15.Chapter 15. Number of Sweeps Context Settings The number of sweeps on which to base the presented average RSSI.5.5.

In contrast. It will detect WCDMA carriers (UARFCNs) that are in use on each of the WCDMA bands 2100 MHz. Uplink spectrum analysis is currently not supported by any currently connectable devices.0 User’s Manual 15. 1900 MHz.6. 850 MHz. overlapping or not. automatically assumes that there are no further UARFCNs within ±3 MHz of the detected carrier and is therefore unable to spot overlapping carriers. Network Scanning This function is highly useful for obtaining a bird’s-eye view of an unfamiliar WCDMA radio environment. once it has found a WCDMA carrier. a Sony Ericsson phone in scan mode is usually able to identify all carriers. but the chart is retained to allow displaying of such data from old logfiles. Presentation: Spectrum Analysis Bar Charts Two charts are provided.2. On each carrier. In network scanning mode it is also possible to detect inappropriate allocation of UARFCNs resulting in carrier overlap. thus allowing faulty frequency allocations to be easily found and rectified. A mobile phone in regular phone mode. 15.TEMS Investigation 14.1 They both display RSSI as a function of frequency. 1. one cell (scrambling code) is detected and presented. one for the downlink (Spectrum Analysis Bar Chart) and one for the uplink (Spectrum Analysis Uplink Bar Chart).5. 152 .

Include additional channels Context Settings Check this to include additional channels on the 1900 or 850 MHz band. select that band here. NT12-2533 ver 1.4.1. sections 5.4. Setup of Network Scan General Settings Choose “WCDMA” for WCDMA scanning. 2.0 153 . To 15. in which you specify the endpoints of the UARFCN range. Additional channels have UARFCNs that are completely different from the general channels. all additional channels that lie within the frequency range you have specified in the dialog (whole band or UARFCN range) will be included in the scan.6.1. 2.1.6.6. 3”) You can set up three separate UARFCN ranges (Interval 1. Additional fields “From” and “To” appear.3–5.) If this option is checked. WCDMA Scanning 15. 15.1. Each range can be located on any of the supported frequency bands.101. Technology 15.Chapter 15.3.6. Custom range. (See  3GPP 25.4 for details on the two kinds of channel. Interval <n> enabled Band Set the flag to Yes if you want to define this UARFCN range.1.2. set Custom range to Yes. If you want the UARFCN range to be identical to an entire WCDMA frequency band. If you want the UARFCN range to consist of a portion of a band. UARFCN Ranges (“Interval 1. 3) to scan in the network. From.

6. Setting the threshold too low results in a very long search time (e. RSSI threshold RSSI threshold for detecting carriers.g. Presentation: Network Search Window The result of the network scan is output in the Network Search window. where all cells will be significantly disturbed.2. It lists all UARFCNs found.TEMS Investigation 14. The risk of the latter is particularly pronounced in the case of overlapping carriers. This threshold should be high enough to minimize the false detection rate. 15.0 User’s Manual Cell Ec/No threshold Ec/No threshold for cell detection within a detected carrier. the center frequency of each detected WCDMA carrier. which should be suitable in most situations. One scrambling code (cell) is displayed for each UARFCN. UARFCNs from all WCDMA frequency bands are listed in the same column. 154 . reflecting a trade-off between the desire to detect all networks in operation and the wish to avoid spurious “hits”. that is. The default setting is –94 dB. several minutes at –100 dB). The default setting is –26 dB. yet not so high that cells actually present may go undetected.

0 155 . It is possible to run several of these scanning methods concurrently.1.4. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable). LTE Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of LTE carriers with the following kinds of device: • • • • Andrew scanner DRT scanner PCTel scanner Rohde & Schwarz TSMW scanner.Chapter 16.1. Scanning Methods and Capabilities TEMS Investigation offers these LTE scanning methods. NT12-2533 ver 1.1. chapters 12–14. For more information about connectable devices with LTE scanning capability. section 10. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. no special preparations are required. see the Getting Started Manual. supported using the various devices as indicated. How to configure the PC and the above scanners for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. LTE Scanning 16.) 16. (For PCTel.

2. LTE Signal Scanning The LTE air interface uses OFDM as modulation method on the downlink. The LTE signal scan provides the following metrics: • • • • • SCH (PCI.2 16.3 16. RS CINR) CFO Time Offset 16.0 User’s Manual Signal scanning Enhanced signal scanning RSSI scanning Spectrum scanning Enhanced power scanning R&S TSMW DRT 16.4 16. and Reference Signals (RS’s) are used for channel estimation purposes.1. P-SCH RSSI. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: General Always “LTE”. LTE band to scan. LTE Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device Andrew i.2. SCHRQ) RS (RSRP. S-SCH RSSI.Scan PCTel SeeGull MX PCTel SeeGull EX . RSRQ) CINR (SCH CINR. PCIG. Technology Band 156 Section Ref.2 16.TEMS Investigation 14.5 16. Synchronization Channels are used for service detection and synchronization.

If you are using a DRT scanner with the optional multimedia card (MMC). Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms. –6.e. Scan Type • Logging Mode When using a DRT scanner purchased with TEMS Investigation.2. Specify the cells under Cell Index List.2. regardless of how this parameter is set. (This logging has got nothing to do with TEMS Investigation. Min: –240 = –24 dB. the scan data is always recorded in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles (*. For example.Chapter 16. Set the number of cells the scanner should report under Top N.5 dB is indicated as –65. Scan Rate Report Threshold 16.trp). Each EARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel. LTE Scanning Channels EARFCNs to scan within the selected LTE band.1 dB increments. given in 0. NT12-2533 ver 1. for Primary Synchronization Channel).3.) The MMC must have been formatted and inserted into the scanner before the scanner is powered on. Epss/Io detection threshold (i.0 157 . • • MMC: Log to MMC.2. Top N: Select this if you wish to scan the strongest cells. 16. Up to 12 EARFCNs can be selected. you can optionally record a logfile with scan data on the MMC as well. Max: 0 = 0 dB. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: DRT • Targeted Scan: Select this if you wish to scan a fixed set of cells. None: Do not log to MMC.

Cell Index List Primary Detection Threshold (dB) Secondary Detection Threshold (dB) Decoding Threshold (dB) Enable SCH Enable BCH RP Enable RS Enable CINR Enable CFO 158 . Not supported by currently connectable scanners. Min: –30 dB. Calculation of CINR. and the interference can be either noise or co-channel interference or both. Measurement of Reference Signal (RSRP. Max: 0 dB.0 User’s Manual Top N This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Top N”. Carrier to Interference-plusNoise Ratio for SCH and RS. setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest cells (N  16).e. Here you specify the indices of the cells to scan (up to 16 cells for each EARFCN. Measurement of BCH received power. and SCHRQ. Measurement of Synchronization Channels: P-SCH RSSI. This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Targeted”. Min: –30 dB. Threshold (in negative dB) for detection of Secondary Synchronization Channel. RSRQ). Threshold (in negative dB) for detection of Primary Synchronization Channel. Max: 0 dB. CINR threshold for attempting to decode the MIB/ SIB. Not supported by currently connectable scanners. Min: –30 dB. S-SCH RSSI. Measurement of Center Frequency Offset. up to 16 × 12 = 192 cells in total). i. The carrier is the desired signal. Max: 50 dB. Here you specify how many cells the scanner should report.TEMS Investigation 14.

3-1 Number of LTE frames over which to average scan measurements.2. • • • Automatic: Cyclic prefix used by detected cells is automatically detected. FDD: Frequency Division Duplexing assumed. Observations Average Detection Mode NT12-2533 ver 1. If you choose a fixed bandwidth (1. the scanner will itself detect the bandwidth in use.4. Extended: Extended prefix assumed.211. Cyclic Prefix Detection Mode Duplexing Detection Mode • • • Enable ECP This should be turned on if the network uses Extended Cyclic Prefixes. Robust mode: This mode uses lower detection thresholds and increased averaging to detect lower-level signals. Automatic: Duplexing method used by detected cells is automatically detected.0 159 . a valid LTE signal with strength greater than the detection thresholds is required. since otherwise high level signals may saturate the receiver and cause errors. Normal: Normal prefix assumed. For this to work. or 20 MHz). simply select it. It should normally be enabled. table 6. 10.Chapter 16. LTE Scanning Bandwidth The bandwidth to scan. 15. 5. If you know what the implemented bandwidth is. • • Fast mode: This mode offers reasonable sensitivity with a fast scan rate. 3. • If you choose Auto-select.  3GPP 36. that bandwidth will always be scanned. TDD: Time Division Duplexing assumed. • Enable AGC Use of AGC (Automatic Gain Control) scanning parameter. It is a slower scan mode.

Only Sync Signal (SS) measurements above this threshold will be reported. the scanner can detect each of the different RS’s and is then able to measure each Tx signal separately. not scanning of a fixed cell list. The bandwidth must be selected manually.4. e. The number of antenna ports to measure on (multiple ports for MIMO). The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”). Number of Antenna Ports Cyclic Prefix Sync Signal Measurement Threshold Reference Signal Measurement Threshold 160 . Here you specify how many cells the scanner should report.0 User’s Manual Number of Tx The number of Tx signals to be detected by the scanner. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: PCTel With PCTel only Top-N scanning is supported. setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest cells. Only Reference Signal (RS) measurements above this threshold will be reported. 16.2. The type of cyclic prefix used in OFDM. The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”). If the eNode-B is using MIMO transmission.g. Bandwidth Carrier RSSI Threshold Top N The bandwidth to scan.TEMS Investigation 14. The RS and SS measurements will be performed only if measured Carrier RSSI is above this threshold. “Normal 15 kHz”. with separate RS symbols per Tx port.

Cyclic Prefix NT12-2533 ver 1. Subband Size Subband Start Size of subband. However. Seven (7) OFDM symbols (15 kHz) can be transmitted per slot if normal prefix length is used and 6 OFDM symbols per slot if extended prefix length is used. Setup of LTE Signal Scan: Rohde & Schwarz TSMW The type of cyclic prefix used in OFDM. The scanner is capable of detecting this automatically (“Auto Detect”).. all subband measurements appear in the plain-text decoded scan reports.. The Subband option refers to subband scanning. Number of subbands to divide the measurement bandwidth into. If this option is included..5. Equal to Bandwidth/Subband Size. LTE Scanning Measurement Mode Signal scan measurement mode. It populates the MIMO scanning information elements with “Tx1” . Must be in the range 0 . the subband settings that follow become visible in the property grid. Subband start index within the measurement bandwidth. stated as a number of resource blocks. which does not populate any special information elements..2. Subband Count – 1. One of: • • • • Wideband Wideband + Subband Wideband + RF Path Wideband + Subband + RF Path The RF Path option means multipath (MIMO) scanning. “Tx4” in their names.Chapter 16.0 161 . Subband Count 16.

Specifies uplink–downlink configurations to try when performing reference signal measurements on TDD channels. The output to information elements remains exactly the same with this setup: All scanned EARFCNs are presented within the argument range 1 … 12. Resources allocated on the specified front-end. This is used to enable or disable RSRP/RSRQ measurements. a single frequency band is shared between uplink and downlink. List of power ratios between the primary and secondary synchronization channels. Lower limit for ratio between primary and secondary synchronization channel.6. If a total of more than 12 EARFCNs are scanned. Upper limit for ratio between primary and secondary synchronization channel.3. Front-end (processor) on which to schedule measurement. and if TDD. It is possible to run FDD and TDD signal scan tasks concurrently. uplink and downlink transmitters use separate frequency bands. The measurement tasks are manually distributed on the two built-in front-ends.TEMS Investigation 14. See also section 13. only the first 12 selected for scanning are presented. Measurement Rate (Hz) Reference Signal TDD Frame Configurations Average number of 100 ms blocks to measure per second. S-SCH to P-SCH Ratio Settings Ratio Type Specifies either a list of ratios or a range in which the power ratio between the primary and secondary synchronization channel must reside.0 User’s Manual Frame Structure Channel frame structure. Enables reference signal measurement. If FDD. Lower Ratio Limit (dB) Upper Ratio Limit (dB) Fixed Ratios (dB) RF Front-end Resource Allocation (%) 162 .

Presentation of LTE Signal Scan LTE signal scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows.0 163 . LTE Scanning Resource Available (%) Read-only field indicating the remaining available resources on the processor selected under RF Frontend. 16. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. the cell with the next higher Cell Identity appears at argument index 2.7.7.Chapter 16. that is.2.3. etc. section 3. Double-click the item “LTE”.3. Sort by Cell Identity: Cells are sorted by Cell Identity. See Information Elements and Events. Sort by decreasing RSRQ (Es/Io) (default) Sort by increasing RSRQ (Es/Io) Sort by fixed position: Cells are sorted by Cell Identity and are always assigned the same argument indices.6. The sorting order is set in the General window. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • NT12-2533 ver 1.3) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings.1. a cell with Cell Identity n is always found at argument index n.2. Customizing the Presentation Sorting of Cells You can sort LTE cells in scanning information elements in a number of different ways. the cell with the lowest Cell Identity appears at argument index 1. 16. section 8.2. 16. • • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.

0 User’s Manual 16. Up to 255 EARFCNs can be scanned.3.3. Setup of RSSI Scan: DRT See section 16.4.3. Presentation of RSSI Scan RSSI scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts.4. See Information Elements and Events. LTE band to scan.3. EARFCNs to scan within the selected LTE band. Setup of RSSI Scan: PCTel Bandwidth to scan. Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points 16.TEMS Investigation 14. RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan: General Always “LTE”.2. select a bandwidth from the list. Logging Mode Bandwidth 16.3.3. Bandwidth to scan.2. Spectrum Scanning A spectrum scan shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency. Technology Band Channels 16. Each EARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.1. See section 13. 16. 16. 164 .1.3.3. fixed at 100 kHz.3. section 8.6.

See Information Elements and Events. 16. Setup of Spectrum Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms. Scan Rate 16. the highest selectable resolution being 5 kHz. Note. LTE Scanning 16.5. 16.4. Given in MHz. Technology Band Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth 16. it will come into play only if you are using the LTE scanner to search for WiMAX presence.3. See section 15.3. Setup of Spectrum Scan: DRT The DRT-specific settings are the same as for WiMAX. Setup of Spectrum Scan: PCTel The PCTel-specific settings are the same as for WCDMA. that is. section 8. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. Setup of Spectrum Scan: General Always “LTE”.4.3.4. on the other hand. Spectrum Scan Presentation Spectrum scans are presented in a predefined bar chart. In the presentation window. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz.4.2. however. the chart.1.5. Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits.1.4. the legend pane will list all samples. see section 19.5. Select the LTE frequency band to scan. Given in MHz.Chapter 16.4. NT12-2533 ver 1. that the Triggered Scan option is still associated with WiMAX frames.0 165 .

LTE band to scan. the enhanced power scan is a higherperformance scan that provides selective power measurements in the time and frequency domains. Setup of Enhanced Power Scan: General Always “LTE”.5.5. or else set to zero which means that the choice of window size is made by the scanner for optimal measurement performance. Must be larger than 100. Must be less than or equal to Timing Period Mark. Max: 20000. center.0 User’s Manual 16. Time offset in units of 50 μs.2. The scan will start on the nearest Timing Period Mark with the Timing Period Mark Offset specified.4 MHz Wide Type 2: 3 MHz Wide Type 3: 5 MHz Wide Type 4: 10 MHz Wide Type 5: 15 MHz Wide Type 6: 20 MHz Bandwidth Time Period Reference Timing Period Mark Timing Period Mark Offset Measurement Window Specifies whether the EARFCN given under Channel is the minimum. 16. EARFCN to scan within the selected LTE band. Given in units of 50 μs. Technology Band Channel 16. or maximum frequency of the band to be scanned. 166 . Enhanced Power Scanning Compared to the spectrum scan. Setup of Enhanced Power Scan Bandwidth to scan.5. One of: CW: 100 kHz Normal: 1.1.TEMS Investigation 14. Measurement window size in units of 50 μs.

.0 167 . then the number of bins must be odd. NT12-2533 ver 1. 16.5. If Time Period Reference is set to Center. Resolution Bandwidth Frequency Step Size Remaining Measurement Points Resolution bandwidth in units of 2.1. section 8. Valid range: 2 . See Information Elements and Events. 8000.5 kHz. Presentation of Enhanced Power Scan Enhanced power scans are presented in a predefined bar chart.3. LTE Scanning Number of Bins The number of measurements to make within the specified band. Frequency step size in units of 2..5 kHz. See section 13.Chapter 16.3.6.3.

17. As for other cellular technologies. see the Getting Started Manual. TEMS Investigation can make use of GPS data from the scanner’s internal GPS. Note: You must have GPS coverage to obtain TD-SCDMA scan data. • • Scanning Methods Pilot scanning (section 17. TD-SCDMA UARFCNs to scan within the selected band. General Scan Settings Regardless of scanning method. section 10. TD-SCDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of TD-SCDMA UARFCNs with PCTel scanners. which is indispensable for the TD (Time Division) component of the TD-SCDMA technology.1.4) 17.0 User’s Manual 17. Up to 12 UARFCNs can be selected for pilot scanning.TEMS Investigation 14. TD-SCDMA band or bands to scan.2.2.1. 168 . you need to set the following: Technology Band Channels Always “TD-SCDMA” for TD-SCDMA scanning. Each UARFCN is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.3): Top N RSSI scanning (section 17. This is because a GPS signal is needed for time synchronization. and up to 255 UARFCNs for RSSI scanning. For more information.4.

as explained further below. Number of Pilots To scan the N strongest CPIs. During the cell search procedure. TD-SCDMA Scanning 17.1. section 7. The value N is determined by the Number of Pilots parameter. located between the two data sections. table 6.3.Chapter 17. enter the value N here (N  32). The scanner automatically finds the strongest CPIs. • • Pilot Scanning TD-SCDMA pilot scanning can be done in two different modes: Midamble Top N mode Sync DL Top N mode Depending on the mode. The DwPTS is used for downlink synchronization. Type of Scanning Setup of Pilot Scan • Scan strongest: The N strongest CPIs will be reported from the chosen UARFCNs. Midamble Top N Pilot Scanning This mode measures the Primary Common Control Physical Channel (P-CCPCH). different parts of the TD-SCDMA frame are measured.0 169 . the UE acquires the timing of the DwPTS by correlating with the SYNC-DL code transmitted in the DwPTS.3. To this end it scans the TS0 midamble (144 chips). The midamble is used as a training sequence for channel estimation. which is located just before the first switching point in the Guard Period (GP) and after Timeslot 0. which is transmitted in Timeslot 0 (TS0).223-840. 17. NT12-2533 ver 1. and synchronization. power measurements. The mapping between Cell Parameter Identity (CPI) and the Basic Midamble Code used is given in  3GPP 25. The switching points are used to manage the transition between uplink and downlink (since TD-SCDMA utilizes TDD to separate uplink and downlink).3. SyncDL Top N Pilot Scanning This mode measures the Downlink Pilot Timeslot (DwPTS).

• • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.6. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events.0 User’s Manual PN Threshold Remaining Measurement Points Measurement Mode If the Ec/Io value is below the PN threshold. The modes are described in the introduction of section 17. section 8. Presentation of Pilot Scan Pilot scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows. Double-click the item “TD-SCDMA”. Sorting of Cells You can sort TD-SCDMA cells in scanning information elements in a number of different ways.4.2.1. 17.3. the cell with the next higher CPI appears at argument index 2. Sort by Cell Parameter Id: Cells are sorted in order of ascending CPI.3. Select “Midamble Top N” or “SyncDL Top N”. The sorting order is set in the General window.3. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • 170 . See section 13.3.2.4) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. Ec/Io will not be reported. 17. Sort by decreasing Midamble Ec/Io (default) Sort by increasing Midamble Ec/Io Sort by fixed position: To each cell is assigned the argument that corresponds to its CPI.TEMS Investigation 14. so that the cell with the lowest CPI appears at argument index 1. so that a cell with CPI n is always found at argument index n + 1. See Information Elements and Events. section 3.1. etc.

NT12-2533 ver 1.6. You make the selection under General settings  Technology.4.4. Scanners with both TD-SCDMA and GSM capability can do an RSSI scan on either of these technologies.4. Setup of RSSI Scan What UARFCNs to scan is set in the General settings. 17. RSSI Scanning The RSSI scan returns narrowband or wideband channel aggregate power. Presentation of RSSI Scan RSSI scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts.2.4.1.1.2.2. Bandwidth Remaining Measurement Points Bandwidth to scan: either “Normal” (wideband) or “CW” (narrowband). TD-SCDMA Scanning 17. section 8. See section 13.3.0 171 . The GSM RSSI scan is configured in the usual manner as described in section 14. 17. See Information Elements and Events. see section 17.Chapter 17.

IS-95) RF channels with Andrew and PCTel scanners.1. section 10.1. CDMA Scanning TEMS Investigation supports scanning of CDMA (IS-2000.Scan scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual.3 18.Scan PCTel LX/EX Pilot scanning RSSI scanning Narrowband interference scanning Spectrum analysis 1.TEMS Investigation 14. Follow UE option not supported. the device must have been purchased with the relevant option (wherever applicable).5 18. Andrew i.6 172 Section Ref.3. See also the Getting Started Manual. PCTel MX CDMA Scanning Capability/ Scanning Device 1 18. IS-856. . 18. Scanning Methods TEMS Investigation offers these CDMA scanning methods.4 18.0 User’s Manual 18. supported using the various devices as indicated. Please note that for a scanning method to be actually available in TEMS Investigation. How to configure the Andrew i. chapter 13.4.

2. General Scan Settings The following settings are common to all or most of the scanning methods: Technology One of: • • • Band Channels CDMA One (IS-95) CDMA2000 EV-DO CDMA band or bands to scan. Max: 32. Setup of Pilot Scan: Andrew Minimum time for scan in ms. Max: 0. EV-DO: Scan correlation length in slots. CDMA: Scan correlation length in chips. Max: 16. Compare the discussion of the corresponding parameters in section 18. Pilot Scanning This method scans pilots.0 173 . Must be divisible by 128.2. Ec/Io detection threshold in dB. CDMA RF channels to scan within the selected band. 18. Max: 2048. Scan Rate Report Threshold Number of Top N PN Increment Correlation Length NT12-2533 ver 1. Up to 12 RF channels can be selected.3.3. The PN increment. Min: 512. Entering the number N means scan the N strongest pilots. 18.1. CDMA Scanning 18.Chapter 18. Min: 1. Min: –24. scrambled with cell-specific PN sequence offsets.3. Min: 1. Each channel is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.

no restriction on number of pilots). By raising the threshold you reduce the influence of random noise correlations. Max: 32. In either case. the scanner automatically finds the strongest pilots. static set of pilots (up to 512. The setting –20 dB is recommended. Min: 1. Setup of Pilot Scan: PCTel With PCTel SeeGull MX and EX scanners. General Settings (Not Technology-dependent) Type of Scanning The set of pilots (PNs) to scan on each RF channel is composed in one of the following ways: • Scan selected: User-defined. are presented within the argument range 1 … 12. multiple concurrent PN scans can be performed: for example. and you will thus be able to discern multipath and fading effects more accurately. This is a signal code power threshold (in dB) used for the Delay Spread measurements. only the first 12 selected for scanning are presented.0 User’s Manual 18. The latter option is activated by setting “Follow UE” to Yes.TEMS Investigation 14. regardless of technology.2. If a total of more than 12 frequencies are scanned. Here you pick the pilots you want to scan. This field is visible if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan strongest”. • Selected Numbers Number of Pilots This field is visible if Type of Scanning is set to “Scan selected”.3. up to N = 32) on each RF channel. Entering the number N means scan the N strongest pilots. or the 32 strongest pilots on the RF channel currently used by a CDMA phone that is also activated in the application. i. one PN scan on a CDMA2000 frequency and one on an EV-DO frequency. The output to information elements remains exactly the same with this setup: All scanned frequencies. the Delay Spread values will be affected by random noise more than may be desired. common to all selected RF channels. PN Threshold 174 . If the PN threshold is set too low. Scan strongest: The strongest pilots (“Top N”.e.

This parameter. The maximum pilot window length supported by the scanning receiver is 64. 6. CDMA Scanning Remaining Measurement Points See section 13.1. Settings Specific to EV-DO (IS-856) Pilot Window Length This parameter indicates the length. Start Pilot Pilot Increment Max Cell Radius The index of the first PN allocated. along with Start Pilot and Pilot Increment.Chapter 18. Selection of Measurements to Perform On the rows that follow you specify whether to measure each of the following (at least one item must be set to Yes): Ec/Io The peak pilot Ec/Io value. If a pilot increment is used.6. are applicable only in “Scan selected” mode. or Wider (256 chips). in chips. The maximum radius within which to detect pilots. will appear in the list. . The PN increment.. only the PNs 0. Settings Specific to CDMA One (IS-95) and CDMA2000 (IS-2000) Use Pilot Increment This refers to the inter-sector pilot PN increment used by the access network in assigning PN offsets to sectors.0 175 . Wide (128 chips). 3.. NT12-2533 ver 1. This is also the default and recommended setting. Search Window Size Normal (64 chips). of the time window in which the pilot is searched. if Start Pilot = 0 and Pilot Increment = 3. TEMS Investigation will filter the list of selectable PNs: for example.

This measurement does not appear as an information element. The sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold. Each reported sample is typically based on a 10 ms measurement.0 User’s Manual Pilot Delay Aggregate Ec/Io Delay Spread The number of chips between the expected arrival time and the actual arrival time of the signal.1 The number of chips between the first and last pilot Ec/Io peak above the PN threshold. it is only found in scanner reports. Remaining Options Measurement Mode (EX only) There are two choices. High Speed and High Dynamic. Each sample reported by the scanner is typically based on a measurement 20 ms in length. 1. High Dynamic puts the emphasis on accuracy. These are two algorithms with different priorities. High Speed is faster and accordingly less accurate.TEMS Investigation 14. 176 .

The band. • • • GPS Only: The scanner will rely exclusively on its internal GPS for timing. not for IS-856. protocol. The default and recommended value is 2048 for IS-2000 and IS-95. CDMA Scanning Timing Mode Here you select by what method the scanner should synchronize to the base station’s transmissions. Without the Sync Channel Timing option. GPS Preferred: The scanner will use its internal GPS for timing whenever possible and resort to the Pilot and Sync channels in other cases. the scanner can only use its GPS for timing. Integration (Chips) This is the number of chips over which each signal energy value is integrated. a further field “Selected UE” appears where you select which CDMA phone the scanner should follow. Selected UE If this is set to On.Chapter 18. The Timing mode setting is applicable for IS-95 and IS-2000 only.0 177 . Setting this parameter high improves the accuracy and reliability of the output but also slows the scan down. When the phone switches to a different RF channel. Follow UE. all other controls in the dialog are disabled. Pilot synchronization allows the scanner to operate in indoor environments where GPS coverage is lacking. NT12-2533 ver 1. Pilot Sync Only: The scanner will rely exclusively on the Pilot and Sync channels for timing. and RF channel information is taken from the phone. If you choose this option. This setting is enabled only if the scanner has been purchased with the Sync Channel Timing option. The scan will then cover the 32 strongest pilots on the RF channel that the selected phone is currently using. and 3072 for IS-856. the scanner follows along automatically.

5. 18. Sort by Pilot PN: Pilot PNs are sorted by index. • • • • • Open the General window from the Navigator.1.0 User’s Manual 18.3.4. Presentation: “PN Scan” Bar Charts The PN Scan bar charts present pilot scan data. Presentation: Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart This bar chart shows the strongest pilots scanned. One predefined bar chart is provided for each RF channel scanned.3. 18. Note: The sorting order of the “Sc Best” elements (see Information Elements and Events. Sort by increasing Ec/Io. etc. 18. For a manually selected set of pilots. Each bar chart by default presents peak Ec/Io for each pilot found. section 3.3. Customizing the Presentation Sorting of Pilots You can sort pilots in scanning information elements in a number of different ways.TEMS Investigation 14.5. The updating rate is chiefly dependent on the number of live signals encountered in the network.3. the pilot with the lowest index appears at argument index 1. whereas for the “Top N” scan the number N is only marginally important (since all pilots have to be searched regardless of N). the updating rate is also greatly affected by the size of this set. pilot PN n is always found at argument index n + 1. The sorting order is set in the General window.3. Pilots are sorted by ascending PN offset. the pilot with the next higher index appears at argument index 2. A dialog appears with these sorting options: • 178 .2) is fixed and is not affected by the General window settings. Sort by decreasing Ec/Io (default). regardless of RF channel. Sort by fixed position: Pilot PNs are sorted by index and are always assigned the same argument indices. that is. Double-click the item “CDMA”.

RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan Select Normal or Continuous Wave (“CW”). the measurements are extracted to the same information elements (Scanned RSSI. all other controls in the dialog are disabled. This setting applies to all channels you select for scanning. bandwidth 1.4. 18.1 When the phone switches to a different RF channel. Choose Yes to scan the RF channel that the CDMA phone in the combo box is currently using (plus a number of adjacent RF channels). CW: “Condensed” or CW band. NT12-2533 ver 1.. CDMA Scanning 18. n + 13]. n + 21]. RF channels [n – 13 . If you choose this option. The band.4. on the 450 MHz band. n + 33].1. etc.. in the “CDMA” category). the bandwidth is 50 kHz. the scanner follows along automatically. For the cellular (800) band. n + 26] if 79  n  275. For the PCS (1900) band. 1. RF channels [n – 26 . Presentation: RSSI Scan Bar Chart This bar chart displays RSSI for each RF channel scanned.2288 MHz. 18. otherwise [n – 33 .1..4.6.. the bandwidth is 30 kHz. • • Normal: CDMA band. This option is not available for EV-DO... on the 1900 MHz band. protocol and RF channel information are taken from the phone. Remaining Measurement Points Follow UE See section 13. Bandwidth Regardless of the choice made here. RF channels [n – 21 ..2..Chapter 18. Specifically (n = phone’s RF channel number): on the 800 MHz band.0 179 .

Remaining Measurement Points 18. As regards the rest.3. you can proceed to perform a spectrum analysis in the relevant frequency range. and for the PCS (1900) band it is 50 kHz. enter the Interference Offset in dB.1.1.TEMS Investigation 14. 18.5.6. Narrowband Interference Scanning In this mode the scanner scans a narrow band centered around a specific RF channel. For the cellular (800) band the scanned bandwidth is 30 kHz. Presentation: Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart The results from this scanning method are presented in the CDMA Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart: 180 .6) but is considerably faster.5. identifying other sufficiently strong RF channels as interferers. an in-band RF channel is considered to be an interferer if its strength exceeds the average in-band RSSI by an amount at least equal to Interference Offset. 18. Specifically.0 User’s Manual 18.5. see section 18.5.1. Context Settings See section 13. Setup of Narrowband Interference Scan General Settings Under Channels.5.5. • • Interference Offset Open the General window and double-click the CDMA item. thereby obtaining an even clearer view of the problematic signals.2. This is a threshold governing how strong an RF channel must be in order to be regarded as an interferer. The narrowband interference scan has lower resolution than the spectrum analysis scan (see section 18. Once you have done a narrowband interference scan to identify interferers. 18.1.1. 18.1. you select a single RF channel around which to scan.2. In the dialog that appears.2.

section 7. 18. predefined color coding: • • Yellow: The RF channel is an interferer according to the Interference Offset threshold criterion entered (see section 18. 18. CDMA Scanning Each bar in this chart represents an RF channel.Chapter 18.5.1.1. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan General Settings Choose the relevant CDMA technology. Green: The RF channel is not an interferer according to the Interference Offset criterion.6. An event “Narrowband Interference” is reported when an in-band interferer is detected.0 181 .6.6. Technology Band NT12-2533 ver 1. This chart uses a special. Spectrum Analysis This scanning method shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency. See Information Elements and Events.1).1.3. 18. CDMA frequency band to scan.

• • Context Settings The Andrew-specific settings are the same as for LTE. on the other hand. the highest selectable resolution being 5 kHz. The PCTel-specific settings are the same as for WCDMA. 18.2. the legend pane will list all samples.1.2. In the presentation window.1.3. 182 . See section 15. the chart. Interval between successive scan samples in kHz.6.2.4.6. See section 16. Presentation of Spectrum Analysis Scan Spectrum scans are presented in a predefined bar chart.5.0 User’s Manual Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution Bandwidth Low end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. can of course only distinguish the samples as far as the screen resolution permits. See Information Elements and Events. Given in MHz. 18. section 8. High end of the frequency range to be swept by the scan. Given in MHz.TEMS Investigation 14.5.

see the Getting Started Manual. Regarding band support. 19.2. WiMAX Scanning 19. WiMAX Scanning TEMS Investigation has the ability to scan WiMAX carriers with a DRT scanner.1. section 10. Channels Technology NT12-2533 ver 1. you need to set the following: Band WiMAX band to scan: one of the bands (WiMAX RF Profiles) supported by the scanner. Each channel is specified as a number representing the center frequency of the channel.1.Chapter 19. General Scan Settings Regardless of scanning method. see section 19.4. How to configure the DRT scanner (and the PC along with it) for use with TEMS Investigation is covered in the Getting Started Manual. chapter 12. Up to 1500 channels can be selected.4. Always “WiMAX” at present. For more information.0 183 .1. WiMAX channels to scan within the selected band. and the associated OFDMA bandwidth. • • • Scanning Methods WiMAX scanning methods are as follows: WiMAX preamble scan RSSI scan Spectrum analysis 19.

Within an OFDM frame. None: Do not log to MMC. The bandwidth scanned during preamble scanning is that of the selected band (i.TEMS Investigation 14.trp). and the interference can be either noise or co-channel interference or both. Setup of Preamble Scan • Targeted: Select this if you wish to scan a fixed set of preambles.3. Set the number of preambles to report under Top N. regardless of how this parameter is set. 19. Scan Type • Logging Mode When using a DRT scanner purchased with TEMS Investigation. Enable Preamble Power Enable Preamble CINR Calculation of preamble power. The carrier is the desired signal.0 User’s Manual 19. WiMAX RF Profile. 184 . If you are using a DRT scanner with the optional multimedia card (MMC). • • MMC: Log to MMC.3. you can optionally record a logfile with scan data on the MMC as well.e. Preamble Scanning The WiMAX air interface uses OFDM as modulation method.) The MMC must have been formatted and inserted into the scanner before the scanner is powered on. Carrier to Interference-plusNoise Ratio. each subframe is preceded by a preamble.1. Top N: Select this if you wish to scan the strongest preambles. Calculation of CINR. (This logging has got nothing to do with TEMS Investigation. the scan data is always recorded in regular TEMS Investigation logfiles (*. The preamble is used for synchronization and channel estimation purposes. Specify the preambles under Preamble Index List. currently either 5 or 10 MHz). Up to 100 preambles can be tracked simultaneously.

0 185 . CINR will be measured for each segment. If set to False. Enable AGC Use of AGC (Automatic Gain Control) scanning parameter.Chapter 19. Measurement of multipath delay spread. It should normally be enabled. Measurement of delay relative to GPS. Measurement of channel response in time domain. that is. cluster size N = 3 will be used for CINR measurement. Measurement Mode Enable Channel Response: Time Domain Enable Channel Response: Frequency Domain Measurement of channel response in frequency domain. CINR will be measured over all segments. NT12-2533 ver 1. Measurement of downlink MAP pilot power. cluster size N = 1 will be used for CINR measurement. WiMAX Scanning Enable CFO Enable Delay Spread Enable Absolute Delay Enable DL-MAP Pilot CINR Enable DL-MAP Pilot Power Enable DL-MAP Data Power Use N=3 for CINR Measurements Measurement of Carrier Frequency Offset. Measurement of downlink MAP pilot CINR. Measurement of downlink MAP data power. Robust mode. If set to True. or Rogue mode. since otherwise high level signals may saturate the receiver and cause errors. One of Fast mode. that is.

Here you specify the indices of the preambles to scan.0 User’s Manual Top N This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Top N”. setting the field to N causes the scanner to return the N strongest preambles. The number of samples on which to base each computation of measurement statistics. However. Preamble Index List Detect Threshold Decode Threshold Enable Statistical Information Number of Samples for Stats Enable Frame Prefix Decoding Enable Downlink Map Decoding Enable Uplink Map Decoding Enable DCD Decoding 186 . as reported in the “Samples Taken” information elements (see Information Elements and Events. the actual number of samples used may be smaller. Threshold (in negative dB) below which no preamble detection is reported. Threshold (in dB) below which data is not decoded. which defines the modulation and coding scheme used on the downlink. section 3.6). CINR) to be computed. The Frame Prefix specifies the modulation type and number of symbols associated with one or several downlink bursts that follow the FCH. This must be set on for measurement statistics (mean and standard deviation for RSSI. Compare Enable Downlink Map Decoding. These include the burst profile for each user. Decoding of downlink Frame Prefix (DLFP). Decoding of Downlink Channel Descriptor (a message containing information about downlink characteristics). Decoding of downlink MAP messages. Decoding of uplink MAP messages. Here you specify how many preambles the scanner should report.TEMS Investigation 14. This field is editable if you have set Scan Type to “Targeted”.

RSSI Scanning Setup of RSSI Scan See section 19. Presentation WiMAX scans are presented in a suite of predefined charts and status windows. 19.4.5. Valid for triggered scan only. The number of measurement points left to allocate. 19. Valid for triggered scan only.1. Spectrum Analysis A spectrum scan shows downlink signal strength as a function of frequency.1. 19. Offset from start of frame in μs.4.0 187 . Setting this to Yes means that the scanning will be triggered at the start of a new WiMAX frame.5. Length of time for total averaging in μs. Bandwidth to scan. Logging Mode Average Time Triggered Scan Offset Time (µs) Block Time (µs) Measurement Points 19.1. Logging Mode Bandwidth 19. section 8. See Information Elements and Events.3. Length of time for block averaging in μs. Setup of Spectrum Analysis Scan See section 19.3.Chapter 19. NT12-2533 ver 1.6. WiMAX Scanning Enable UCD Decoding Decoding of Uplink Channel Descriptor (a message containing information about uplink characteristics). select a bandwidth from the list.6.

188 . or find crossed feeders. and handover targets for neighbor lists. is to provide information about all the sectors of a site. best server.0 User’s Manual The purpose of having views that are grouped by preamble index.TEMS Investigation 14. is to provide information that is helpful in determining coverage. without any grouping by segment. The purpose of having views sorted by RSSI or CINR. This can help identify improperly aimed antennas. rather than by RSSI or CINR.

VoIP. However. multiple data connections can be maintained concurrently.1 for recording data collected while executing the scripts. UDP.1. section 10. HTTP.Chapter 20. Service Control 20. such as RAT lock and band lock for AT commands. 1.3. MMS. and WAP. if an Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminal is activated. Capabilities of Devices Apart from technology-related restrictions as noted in section 20. Introduction to Service Control The Service Control tool is used to control the actions of devices that you activate in the application. The recordings will be regular logfiles (extension . SMS.0 (listed in the Getting Started Manual. FTP. See the Getting Started Manual.1.2.0 189 . Ping. phone devices sold with TEMS Investigation 14. Data service testing encompasses the following services and protocols: e-mail. chapter 11 regarding preconfiguration of Fixed Wireless Terminals. video streaming. it is not possible to do data service testing with any other devices at the same time. With multiple devices activated.1–13. Special activities are available • • • Please note that scanning tasks currently cannot be scripted.2.trp). for applying various control functions to devices. TCP. Service Control 20. 20. Which of these are testable for particular cellular technologies is tabulated in section 20.1) normally support all types of script activities. NT12-2533 ver 1.2. See sections 13. • • Circuit-switched voice and video calls are supported. They are set up in the same general way as scripted tasks but are executed manually.

and Ping. HTTP. 20. it should be noted that data service testing with Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals is limited to FTP.0 User’s Manual Regarding other connectable devices.4.3. The Service Control Designer The Service Control Designer window is where you compose service control workflows (scripts): 190 CDMA UMTS Service/Technology LTE .TEMS Investigation 14. Supported Services by Cellular Technology TD-SCDMA Voice calls Video calls E-mail FTP HTTP MMS Ping SMS UDP Video streaming VoIP WAP 20.

Service Control Properties pane Workflow pane Activity pane Configuration Sets pane • • • • The Activity pane is a palette holding all script building blocks: for running services. with numerous screenshots and examples (sections 20. Finally some additional features of the Service NT12-2533 ver 1. use the buttons at the top to toggle between the two display modes. In the Properties and Configuration Sets panes. At the bottom of each pane is a box showing an explanation for the item currently selected. for example all the details of accessing a particular FTP server. for controlling devices. The rest of this chapter is organized as follows. and for execution flow control.18). Then follows a reference part cataloging all script activity types with their properties and associated configuration sets (sections 20.15). The Properties pane contains properties of the activity that you are currently working with (the one currently selected in the Workflow pane).Chapter 20.0 191 .5–20. First comes a hands-on tutorial on how to build and run scripts. items can either be grouped into categories or be listed in alphabetical order.16–20. In the Configuration Sets pane you define various entities that can be reused in any script. The Workflow pane is the area where you assemble your script graphically in the form of a flowchart.

192 . This means that the activity is not yet properly configured. To this end.TEMS Investigation 14. (The cross-reference here. points to the reference section 20.19–20. Basics of Creating Scripts (with Voice) This section covers the fundamentals of creating a complete and valid script that is ready to be run. 20. A similar exclamation mark in the Properties pane indicates the property that is undefined: “Configuration”. Video calls are handled in similar fashion. • Add a voice dial activity to the script.) 1 2 • The Dial box is tagged by an exclamation mark. For purposes of illustration we will build a very simple script that dials single voice calls. and some reference material is given (sections 20.20).16. just like others that follow.0 User’s Manual Control tool are covered. expand the Voice node in the Activity pane and drag the Dial item to the empty workflow.5.

the configuration consists simply of the phone number to call. (In other cases it can be more complex. Service Control • What we need to do is to define a configuration set for the Dial activity. The example below uses a neutral designation “Voice Call Recipient 1”. such as one identifying the subscription having this number.0 193 .Chapter 20. for which you will probably want to substitute something more specific. as will be seen later. For a voice dial. This is done in the Configuration Sets pane. • • • The Properties and Workflow panes are now updated with the configuration data. Finish by clicking the Apply button.) Give the configuration a suitable name. NT12-2533 ver 1.

0 User’s Manual When just dialing a call like this.TEMS Investigation 14.10.5. • Drag the Wait activity to a position just below the voice dial box. it will not have a duration. 1 2 • Set the duration of the wait in the Properties pane: • Finally. The graphical user interface helps you position the Wait box correctly by means of guiding symbols and text. use the Wait activity: compare section 20. The call will be established and then immediately hung up. add a Hang Up activity after the wait. 194 . To give duration to a call.

6. you need to specify whether to use RAS or NDIS. turn to section 20. which is a necessary preparation for running data services. only it contains many more parameters.3.10. Setting Up a Network Connection This section shows how to set up a network connection. NT12-2533 ver 1. 20.4 for guidance. • Expand the IP node in the Activity pane and add a Network Connect activity to the script. In particular.1 for full details.16. Service Control If you want the script to control both caller and receiver.0 195 .Chapter 20. See section 20. • Again you will be notified that a matching configuration is missing: • A configuration for a data connection is created in the same way as one for voice.

point to it from the Configuration field in the activity properties. Setting Up a Data Service Activity In this section. Associate it with the “W995_Dialup_1” configuration set created in section 20. you can pick and choose among them.0 User’s Manual • Once you have the configuration down. This activity needs no particular configuration. The disconnect operation will take down the network connection. Then add a Network Disconnect activity at the bottom of the workflow.6. 196 . We will use the data connection configuration created in section 20.6. if you have multiple network connect configurations defined. we will set up an FTP download as an example of a data service activity. so you do not need to associate it with a configuration set. • • First add a Network Connect activity. Later on.TEMS Investigation 14.7. 20.

Chapter 20. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 197 . you need to create a configuration set representing the FTP server and how to access it. Again this is done in similar fashion as for previously created configurations. Service Control 1 2 • The FTP session itself is handled by the FTP Download activity. Insert an activity of this type between network connect and disconnect: • For the FTP Download activity.

7.TEMS Investigation 14.dat from the FTP server with address 123. logging in as user “TEMS_User”. We will reuse the configuration sets and activities from sections 20. Stand-alone PS Attach and Detach In this section we will perform explicit PS attach and detach operations in isolation. • • We begin with the FTP download workflow from section 20. add a PS Detach and a PS Attach activity.89.45.6 and 20. 198 .0 User’s Manual We will download the file My_10_MB_File.8. in that order (they are found in the IP category). 20.7. reference it from the FTP Download activity in the same manner as before. One reason for doing this could be to measure the time taken by these operations. This will detach the device from the PS network and then reattach the device.67. particularly for the purpose of computing KPIs. • After completing the definition of the FTP server configuration. At the start of this workflow.

You can also save an arbitrary activity sequence as a user-defined snippet: • Select all of the activities by dragging the mouse pointer.0 199 . Snippets A snippet is a fixed sequence of activities that is defined as a building block and can be reused as such. Predefined snippets for all supported services are provided in the Activity pane. then enter the File menu and select Save as Snippet. NT12-2533 ver 1.) Compare chapter 33. 20.8 could be a good candidate for a user-defined snippet. You are prompted to name and describe the snippet. Service Control PS detach PS attach See also section 20.9. The predefined snippets are also tailored to produce all data required to compute KPIs.4. see section 20. For an example of such a predefined snippet in use.9. Example: The detach-plus-attach procedure in section 20. since it will recur in any script where you want to detach and then reattach to the PS network. saving time and effort when creating new scripts.Chapter 20.10. (The KPI computation itself is done using TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic.

This is handy if you want to apply some operation to all of these activities – for example. You can then encapsulate the PS Detach and PS Attach activities within a sequence. to enable or disable them.1. Expand the Control Flow node and from it drag a Sequence activity to a position immediately above the PS Detach activity: • • Select the PS Detach and PS Attach activities by holding Ctrl and clicking each activity. Suppose further that you want a convenient means of turning the detach/attach activities on and off.10. 20.8. then drag them both (using the PS Detach box as handle) into the sequenceActivity1 box. Sequences You can formally define a group of activities in a script as a sequence. You can now enable and disable the detach–attach sequence as a whole: 200 .TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual 20. • Suppose your script includes PS detach followed by PS attach as described in section 20.10. Workflow Control Structures The Control Flow node in the Activity pane contains a number of logical constructs and timers for controlling the script execution flow.

15. then we want to abandon the download. To this end we use an if–else construct in the following manner: • First add a Network Connect activity.5. Now if the phone is handed over to GSM.e. see section 20.0 201 .4. i.16. see section 20. then after the FTP download has completed we want to continue with a video streaming session. and then an FTP Download activity with the Abort property set to On Event and “Handover from UTRAN” selected as event type: • Then add an If–Else activity below the FTP download: NT12-2533 ver 1. so that the throughput is sharply reduced. If–Else Constructs An if–else construct is used to split the execution flow into several branches based on the outcome of a previous activity. Suppose the phone is on a WCDMA network and is instructed to do an FTP download.2. Here is an example.Chapter 20.2. 20. Service Control Compare section 20. the activity should terminate. If on the other hand the phone remains on WCDMA. we want to proceed with a voice call (which does not require a large bandwidth).12. For full details on the Sequence activity.) After a handover to GSM has occurred. (This is accomplished by imposing a “terminate on event” condition on the activity.10.

3. See section 20. 202 . 20. Result = Stopped by Event. set Condition Type to Activity Result. as described in the introduction of this subsection.) – • Add a voice dial activity on the left (to the node “sequenceActivity1”) and a streaming activity on the right (to the node “sequenceActivity2”).0 User’s Manual – For the left-hand branch (“ifElseBranchActivity1”).1 for full details on the If–Else activity.TEMS Investigation 14. For the right-hand branch (“ifElseBranchActivity2”). This is done just as in sections 20. This always evaluates to true.5 and 20. and set the associated attributes as follows: Activity = the name of the FTP download activity.10. • Suppose we want to execute an FTP download five times over. so that the right-hand branch will be executed whenever the condition in the left-hand branch is false. While Loops While loops are used to repeat a sequence of activities a predetermined number of times. set Condition Type to Any. Operator = Equals. by default “ftpDownloadActivity1”. See next screenshot.16.2.7 and is not detailed here. (Not shown in the screenshot below.

by entering the value 5. Below.0 203 .Chapter 20. (Just as with sequences – compare section 20. you first add the empty While construct to the workflow. then fill it with the desired contents.) In the Properties pane. Service Control • Begin by dragging a While activity to the start of the workflow. dropping it onto “sequenceActivity1” in the indicated spot (“Drop Activities Here”): • It may be desirable to insert a brief pause after each pass through the while loop.1 –. • • Now drag the predefined FTP download snippet into the while loop. set the number of times you want to iterate the while loop. You can accomplish this by appending a Wait activity at the end of the FTP snippet: NT12-2533 ver 1. we stipulate that the loop should be run five times in total.10.

a script can also control the activities of multiple devices. the script will perform five FTP downloads in succession with a 10 s idle interval between downloads. we use the Parallel activity from the Control Flow category. See section 20. if one phone is to place a voice or video call to another. if you set Duration to 10 s. one dialing and the other answering. Example 1: CS Voice/Video – Caller and Receiver For example. Parallel Activities All scripts so far have been written for a single device engaged in one activity at a time.4.1.0 User’s Manual • Set the duration of the wait in the Properties pane: For example.2 for full details on the While activity. To create a branching structure for these concurrent tasks.4.TEMS Investigation 14. or assign multiple parallel activities to the same device. 20. caller and receiver must be put in parallel.2.10. See the screenshot below.10. However. where EQ1 calls EQ2: 204 . 20.16.

Chapter 20. Service Control

A parallel structure is also recommended for MMS send/receive.

20.10.4.2. Example 2: Concurrent Activities on Different Devices
Next is a slightly more complicated example. Suppose that we want to control three UEs in parallel, one performing downloads over FTP and the other two looping short voice calls. For this purpose we need to build a somewhat more complicated workflow, as detailed in this section. • First add a While activity and set it to run 10 times. This will become an outer loop repeating the various activities that will be included in it.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

205

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Remove “sequenceActivity1” by selecting it and pressing Delete. (The Sequence activity is created automatically, but in this case we do not need it at the topmost level – compare the steps that follow.) Drop a Parallel activity inside the while loop.

Since the Parallel construct by default provides only two branches, we need to add one more. To this end, right-click the “parallelActivity1” box and choose Add Branch from the context menu. The structure is now expanded with a third branch:

206

Chapter 20. Service Control

It is now time to define the service-related activities. Let us begin with the voice calls: • • • Add while loops to branches 2 and 3 and set each to execute 5 times. Add a voice call snippet (a predefined one is found in the Activity pane) to each while loop. Set the wait time to 10 seconds. To assign the activities to the correct devices, we need to change the equipment (EQ) parameter to EQ2 and EQ3 in branch 2 and branch 3 respectively. This is done in the Properties pane or from the context menu for each activity.

After these steps, branches 2 and 3 of the workflow should have the following structure:

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

207

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Next, define the FTP task for device no. 1. All you need to do here is to add an FTP download snippet to branch 1 and associate it with a functional configuration.

In the screenshot that follows, the voice sequences have been collapsed to clarify the overall structure of the workflow.

208

Chapter 20. Service Control

This script will conduct a total of 10 FTP downloads and 2 × 5 × 10 = 100 voice calls. See section 20.16.2.3 for full details on the Parallel activity. Note: When composing a script for multiple concurrent data service sessions using multiple devices, it is wise to make sure that these sessions are not all initiated simultaneously. It is better to let the sessions start one at a time, allowing at least a few seconds between successive initiations. Insert Wait activities as appropriate to achieve this. (No such Waits are present in the above example, which contains only one data service session.)

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

209

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

20.10.4.3. Example 3: Concurrent Activities on the Same Device
The Parallel structure can also be used to run multiple activities concurrently on the same device, even multiple activities of the same type, provided that the device supports it. The activities concerned are those for FTP download/ upload, HTTP, e-mail, and Ping. The script shown below lets one device perform two concurrent FTP downloads. All instances of the FTP Download activity use the same configuration set; however, to prevent file write conflicts, each activity adds a unique prefix to the target file name (refer to section 20.16.3.9 for details).

20.10.5. Wait
The Wait activity has two chief functions: • • When following a (voice) Dial or Video Dial activity, the Wait gives duration to the call after it has been established. When appearing elsewhere, the Wait activity does nothing, so it effectively halts the workflow branch it is in. After the wait time has expired, the execution proceeds to the next activity.

For usage examples, see sections 20.5, 20.10.3, and 20.10.4. See section 20.16.2.6 for full details on this activity.

210

Chapter 20. Service Control

20.10.6. Wait For
The Wait For activity can be used to: • • • Wait for a particular kind of event to occur. This is straightforward; see the reference section 20.16.2.7 for the fine points. Wait for a scheduled point in time. The schedule can be set up in a number of ways. See section 20.10.6.1 below. Wait for another activity to finish with a predetermined outcome. See section 20.10.6.2.

20.10.6.1. Waiting For a Scheduled Point in Time
Suppose we want a device to dial a short voice call once every 10 minutes. This can be accomplished by putting the voice call inside a while loop which also contains a Wait For activity, providing a timing mechanism. • • Create a While loop and set its termination condition to whatever you like. At the top of the loop, put a Wait For with Trigger = Schedule. – – • If you just want to start the dialing as soon as the script starts, set Start to Immediately. Alternatively, you can specify that the calls should begin at the turn of the hour (“On the Hour”) or at an arbitrary time (“Time of Day”).

To make the loop execute with the desired frequency, continue by setting Repeat to Yes and Repeat Interval to 10 minutes. The loop will then pause at the Wait For activity each time until 10 minutes have passed since the previous turn. This pattern will repeat until the while loop terminates. Add activities for the voice call (Dial, Wait, Hang Up) just as in section 20.5. In the screenshots below, the call duration has been set to 2 minutes.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

211

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Left: Loop controlled by Wait For with Start = Immediately. Right: Loop controlled by Wait For with Start = Time of Day.

20.10.6.2. Waiting For a Given Outcome of an Activity
Instead of collecting data continuously, an alternative (“event-driven”) approach to data collection is to wait until something interesting happens and trigger recording only then. Again taking CS voice as a simple use case, suppose that the voice service is tested by dialing one call after another. If a call proceeds normally, we do not log any data, but if a call is blocked, we want to start a logfile recording to capture what happens over the following one-minute period. • • Create a Parallel structure with two branches. In the left-hand branch, insert a While loop repeating voice calls. Configure the Dial activity to abort if the call is blocked (Abort property set to On Event with “Blocked Call” selected as trigger). In the right-hand branch, put a Wait For activity at the top monitoring the voice calls. Set the Trigger property to Activity Result and stipulate that it should equal “Stopped by Event”. Then add activities for logfile recording beneath the Wait For: Start Recording followed by a Wait with Duration = 1 min and finally Stop Recording.

212

Chapter 20. Service Control

If any call failures are of interest, and not only blocks, then set Activity Result to the catch-all value “Failed” instead. Recording will then be triggered by any voice call that does not complete normally.

20.10.7. Terminate
The Terminate activity simply kills the whole script immediately and unconditionally. One possible application of this activity is to combine it with Wait For to stop a script at a fixed time of day. The Wait For should then have Trigger = Schedule and Start = “Time of Day”. For example, suppose the script repeats a while loop; the sequence depicted below might then be inserted in the while loop to stop execution at 3 p.m.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

213

The activities do not have to be adjacent in the workflow but can be picked arbitrarily.) The destination of a pasted item depends on what. Any except the ones mentioned in subsequent table rows. and Paste commands found in the Edit menu of the Service Control Designer window. if anything.TEMS Investigation 14. (Whatever activity you use as handle will end up on top. is currently selected in the workflow: Item(s) Selected in Workflow None One or more arrows. or Parallel activity Paste Destination Bottom of workflow Above arrow first selected Below activity first selected Bottom of sequence – (cannot paste) • • • 1. When dragging a selection to a new position in the sequence. Editing Workflows and Script Settings You can move activities around in the workflow by clicking and dragging. no activity One or more activities1 Sequence activity If–Else. The same operations can be performed from the window toolbar or from the context menu that appears when right-clicking a workflow item. or copy by holding Ctrl and clicking. If you are selecting a number of consecutive activities and wish to preserve their ordering after they are moved or pasted. While. use the topmost activity as handle to preserve the ordering of activities. note the following: 214 . cut.0 User’s Manual 20. You can also edit workflows using the Cut.11. The editing commands work in standard Windows fashion. A few points merit special comment: • You can select multiple activities to move. Copy. Ctrl-click the activities from top to bottom in the same order as they come in the workflow. Regarding editing of text input fields in the Properties and Configuration Sets panes.

17. 20. • • Activity Properties That Control Execution All activities have some general properties governing their execution: If an activity fails. For full details. or terminate the entire script (On Failure property). 20. However. you can choose to skip that activity. You will be notified if this is not the case (see section 20.Chapter 20. cut.16. use the context menu in the text field.5. bottom part. when building more complex scripts involving multiple devices and control logic. For uncomplicated scripts like our first example in section 20.13). 20. or if a specific event occurs (Abort property).2–20. etc.17. this may seem trivial.1 for full details on the UE control activities. Activities tab: see section 9..0 215 . the Band Lock activity has bands from every supported technology selectable. retry the activity. See section 20. NT12-2533 ver 1.14 on validation).14. a UE control activity in a script can be executed only if the target device is capable of the operation in question. In conclusion. You can have an activity aborted after a fixed length of time. Therefore.1) can also be applied in a script in the form of activities. Validating Scripts Before a script is run. it must be noted that the script activities are inevitably more generic in nature than the manual control functions.13. whereas the manual band lock function in the Navigator (acting as it does on a specific device of a well-defined make and model) can only lock on the bands supported by the device. see sections 20. cannot be used for this purpose. Validation is also crucial for UE control functionality (see section 20. UE Control Functionality A number of control functions accessible from the Navigator (Equipment tab. For the RAT lock and band lock functions. since when composing a script it is not known what devices the activities will apply to. The keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + C.3. Service Control • To copy. the validation becomes a non-trivial issue.12. and paste material in text fields. it needs to be validated to ensure that it is syntactically correct and does not assign tasks that your devices do not support.

the keylock function must not be activated in any of the phones. Running Scripts You can run a script either from the Service Control Monitor or from the Service Control Designer. you will receive a notification “Script validation succeeded”. If you stop a script while an SMS or MMS message is being transferred. it is recommended that you disable IPv6 for all device modems.0 User’s Manual A script is automatically validated when you start it.1.15. It is possible in the application to run several scripts at the same time.2.) When executing a script. 20.5. See the Getting Started Manual. (The script validation does not extend to such usage.15. You can also explicitly have a script validated in advance: • • Enter the Script menu and choose Validate. See section 20. 20. the script will not work properly. Preparations 20. all branches are synchronized before the execution proceeds past the point of convergence.2. If the script passes validation.15. section 8. Windows 7/Windows Vista and IPv6 In Windows 7 and Windows Vista.1 for further details and instructions. except when the devices engage in a service where they interact. Otherwise. How to run only parts of a script is described in section 20.15. however. If it is. In the latter case.15. The script is then ready to be run. and when devices are involved in different workflow branches that converge.2. unpredictable behavior may result. You will be presented with the results.1. 216 . this is not recommended.TEMS Investigation 14.15. General Aspects of Script Execution • The devices involved in a script will execute their assigned activities independently of one another. • • • • 20.15. you should wait until the receiving device has received the message before restarting the script.

3. Click the Stop Script button to stop script execution.15.3.3. 20.tsc). Running Scripts from the Service Control Monitor Click the Open Script button and select your script (file extension . Below is an example (UDP with full duplex tested): NT12-2533 ver 1.15. Monitoring Equipment Status On the Status tab of the Service Control Monitor. Service Control 20. aborted.15.2. Click the Run Script button to start the script. the current status for each device is displayed. and failed activities). Viewing Statistics on Script Execution On the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor. statistics are given on the outcome of each activity type (number of succeeded.0 217 . 20. If a device is engaged in multiple concurrent service sessions.1. one line is printed for each session.Chapter 20. Clicking an underlined number in this table brings up a summary of each activity that has been run.

3).5. as shown below.4. The tab holding the usual contents of the window is now hidden and replaced by Status and Summary tabs which are identical with those in the Service Control Monitor (see section 20.15. Running Scripts from the Service Control Designer • Enter the Script menu and choose Run.15. 20. Click the Stop Script button to stop script execution. You can easily disable any individual activity by right-clicking it or by changing the Enabled flag in the Properties pane. Suppressing Parts of a Script It may happen that you want to run only certain parts of a script and exclude others.15.TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual 20. Click the Return to Designer button to return to the Service Control Designer window. 218 .

Chapter 20. Service Control An activity that is currently disabled appears dimmed in the workflow pane. For example.0 219 . suppose we want to skip the initial detach/attach procedure.2). To re-enable a disabled activity. NT12-2533 ver 1. For example. just set the Enable property to True again. do not suppress an activity whose outcome is used to evaluate a subsequent If–Else condition (see section 20.10. After disabling the sequence comprising the first two activities. the flowchart looks like this: Note: Be sure not to disable an activity that another activity is dependent on.

6. Not all activities have unique properties.16. 20. Band Lock Locks the device to a subset of frequency bands. Presentation of Data Service Testing See section 9. • Filemark property: Filemark text string. • AT Command property: AT command string.1.16. Filemark Enables automatic filemarks.1. AT Sends an AT command. Control Activities 20. 20.16.1. 20. Activate Activates the device so that it can be used in TEMS Investigation.16.) 20.1.1). • Bands property: Specify band or bands to lock on.0 User’s Manual 20. 20. See section 11.TEMS Investigation 14.16.5.1.1.3. This activity has no unique properties.4.4.17. or else manually from the Navigator – see section 8. (Define a configuration for each AT command you want to send.1.16. Deactivate Deactivates the device so that it can no longer be used in TEMS Investigation until you activate it again (using Activate.15.3. Activities (Reference Section) This section also explains all activity-specific properties found in the Properties pane: that is. This activity has no unique properties. 220 . The details are analogous to the manual band lock function on the Navigator’s Equipment tab.2. see section 9.1. those not covered in section 20.1.1.16.3. 20.1.

16.16.16.g. 20. identified by its name (e.8) that concludes the recording and closes the logfile. those that have some device-specific activity assigned to them). not only the devices that participate in the script (i.1.7. Radio Access Technology Lock Locks the device to a particular radio access technology (RAT). Stop Recording Concludes the recording of a logfile initiated by a Start Recording activity (see section 20. device channels cannot be distinguished (for example.9.16. A Start Recording activity must be paired with a Stop Recording activity (see section 20. • Equipment property: Here you select which devices to include in the recording. “startRecordingActivity1”).1.0 221 .1. While recording governed by a script is ongoing. see section 11. the Recording toolbar in the main window) is still enabled and will operate on that recording. Start Recording Starts recording of a logfile. • Technology property: Specify the RAT to lock on. The selection is made at the EQ level.6. and Tags properties: These correspond to the identically named metadata fields that you can define when recording a logfile manually. Description.1. Subject.e.16. The execution of the NT12-2533 ver 1. Notes on Script-controlled Logfile Recording Note that logfiles always record data from all activated devices. recording MS but not DC for a particular device).1. The choice “No Technology” releases a lock that has been previously applied.1. • Recording Activity property: Here you select which Start Recording activity to stop. • • • 20. By default all EQs are selected.16.Chapter 20. 20. Prefix property: You can add a descriptive prefix to the default logfile name. You can thus stop the recording at any time by clicking the Stop Recording toolbar button.8. The following characters are ignored if entered in this field: \ / : * ? ' < > | Directory property: The directory where logfiles produced by the script will be stored. the ordinary recording mechanism (for example.7) and closes the logfile. Service Control 20.1.

2.0 User’s Manual script is not affected by this action. One of: Succeeded. except that the anticipated Stop Logfile Recording activity becomes meaningless and will obviously fail.TEMS Investigation 14.1. Each condition (except the catch-all “Any”: see below) is based on the outcome of a previous activity. Evaluation of conditions proceeds from left to right. Stopped by Timeout.16. Each branch of the construct.2. set Condition Type to Activity Result. is constituted by an “if–else branch” activity which has the following property: • Condition Type property: To define a non-trivial condition. Result: The activity result that you want to match. however. Operator: Boolean operator: “Equals” or “NotEquals”.10. The following attributes are then visible: Activity: The activity (identified by its name in the workflow) whose outcome will determine the value of the boolean expression. 20.10. Control Flow Activities For a hands-on tutorial on how to use these activities. 20. with a boolean condition attached to each branch. Stopped by Event. Failed. (The If–Else construct is set up in that way by default. This value should always be used as a catch-all condition for the rightmost if–else branch. 222 . If–Else Causes the workflow to split into two or more branches.2. At the top level the If–Else activity does not have any unique properties. see section 20. Stopped by User.) For an example of usage. Setting Condition Type to “Any” creates a condition that always evaluates to true.16. please turn to section 20.

When this duration expires. 20. 20. 20. the current turn is completed first. For usage examples. Time: Fixed execution time.2.0 223 . provided that the device supports concurrent execution of the services involved (or several sessions using the same service).3.4.4. Each of the parallel branches is encapsulated within a Sequence activity (see section 20.16. It has no unique properties.2.1. For an example of usage.10. see section 20.5.10. the while loop does not terminate immediately.7.4). Service Control 20.) Event: The while loop is terminated when any of the selected events is reported by the selected equipment. allowing it to be treated as such. see section 20. see section 20.10.2. (For example.2. This activity has no unique properties.16. Terminate This activity terminates the entire script immediately. There is no hard limit on the number of branches.16.2. A device can participate in more than one branch.16.3. While loops can be nested arbitrarily.Chapter 20. While • Condition Type property: Count: Fixed number of iterations.2. Parallel This control structure causes the workflow to split unconditionally into two or more branches. (The running time is compared to the limit before a new turn begins. rather.16.) This activity has no unique properties.10. each of which must involve different devices. the entire sequence can be enabled or disabled in a single action. For an example of usage. NT12-2533 ver 1. as exemplified in section 20. Sequence This control structure formally defines a sequence of activities as a unit.

see sections 20.16. When appearing elsewhere.3. 224 . Wait For This is a conditional wait which lasts until a given condition is satisfied. and 20. After the wait time has expired. An implicit OR relationship holds among devices as well as among events.6.2. 20. Wait The function of the Wait activity depends on its position in the workflow: • When following a (voice) Dial or Video Dial activity. the wait will end as soon as any of the devices reports any of the events. Additional fields Equipment and Events appear where you specify the desired event(s) and the device(s) that should report it. if you specify multiple devices and/or multiple events. extending it beyond the “call established” point for as long as specified by the wait time.TEMS Investigation 14. the Wait gives duration to the call.10.5. For usage examples.10.2. Event: Wait for an event to occur. the execution proceeds to the next activity.7.16. so in effect it temporarily suspends the execution of the workflow branch where it is located. the Wait activity does nothing. If there is no Wait. the call is established and then terminated immediately.4.0 User’s Manual 20. • The Duration property governs how long to wait. • Trigger property: This property determines what to wait for. That is. 20.

Chapter 20. Service Control

Schedule: Wait for a point in time determined by a schedule (which is unrelated to any device activity). Additional fields Start, Time, Repeat, and Repeat Interval appear where you set up the schedule. • Start = Immediately: No wait. This option is intended to be used in loops together with the Repeat option. Its use is best illustrated by an example; see section 20.10.6.1. Start = On The Hour: Wait for a new hour to begin. Equivalent to Time of Day with Time = hh:00:00; see below. Start = Time of Day: Wait for a specified time of day (Time), stated in the format hh:mm:ss. An example is given in section 20.10.6.1. Repeat: This option is intended to be used in loops and has an effect only within such a structure. What it does is to reiterate the “wait for” procedure at regular intervals whose length is defined by Repeat Interval. See the example in section 20.10.6.2. If Repeat is set to No, there will be no repetitions.

• • •

Activity Result: Wait for a particular outcome of another activity in the script. Additional fields Activity, Operator, Result appear where you detail the required outcome: for example, “ftpDownloadActivity1 Equals Failed”. • • • • Result = Succeeded: The activity completed normally. Result = Failed: The activity failed for whatever reason (other than termination by the TEMS Investigation user). Result = Stopped by User: The activity was stopped by the user clicking the Stop Script button.1 Result = Stopped by Duration: The activity was aborted because its maximum duration expired. This can happen only if the activity has its Abort property set to On Timeout: see section 20.17.3. Result = Stopped by Event: The activity was aborted because a specific event occurred (Abort property set to On Event; again, see section 20.17.3).

You must yourself ensure that the monitored activity has a position in the work flow where it will in fact complete to terminate the Wait For activity. This is not considered during validation. For usage examples, see section 20.10.6.
1. If the activity is executed manually from the Navigator as described in chapter 9, “Stopped by User” equates to the user right-clicking the activity in the Navigator and choosing Stop.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

225

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

20.16.3. IP Activities
20.16.3.1. Network Connect
Establishes a data service connection. In the packet-switched case, a PDP context is activated (UMTS) or a PPP session established (CDMA); in the circuit-switched case, the phone works like an ordinary modem and performs a dial-up. Whether NDIS or RAS is used is governed by the Mode parameter, as detailed under Configuration below. NDIS can be chosen for packetswitched only, whereas RAS can be used with both PS and CS. Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals must use an NDIS data connection. Note: For certain devices, setting up an NDIS connection requires prior configuration using a software application delivered with the device. – Some LTE devices must be connected to the network manually, using their connection manager applications, rather than automatically in the Service Control script. Be aware that in these cases, you must still include a Network Connect activity in your script. – For other LTE devices, the connection manager must be started to enable the Network Connect activity in scripts. See section 20.16.3.1.1 below for specifics in this regard on various devices and device categories. A side-effect of the Network Connect activity is to start a restricted form of IP sniffing that is performed continuously for the sake of collecting input to KPI calculations. (This IP sniffing collects only data needed for KPIs and is distinct from the full-scale variety which is initiated by the Start IP Sniffing activity.) If your data collecting device is unable to perform the IP sniffing, you can work around that problem by editing a line in the file <TEMS Investigation install dir>\Application\Investigation.exe.config, which by default reads: <dataServicesConfiguration ipSniffEnabled="true" ignoreIPSniffError="false" /> You can either disable IP sniffing by setting ipSniffEnabled="false", or you can ignore failure to start IP sniffing and go ahead with the execution anyway: ignoreIPSniffError="true". Please note that in either case, no KPI data can be collected. If an Network Connect has previously succeeded but the connection goes down later on, a Network Connection Lost event is generated. (NDIS only.)

226

Chapter 20. Service Control

Configuration property: Mode: Technology to use for connecting to the network: NDIS or RAS. If “Best available” is chosen, NDIS is first and RAS is second priority. For an NDIS connection to be establishable, the device must of course support NDIS. Succeed If Already Connected: This parameter governs what will happen if the device already has a network connection (a valid IP address) set up by other means when the Network Connect activity is run, for example using an external connection manager. • If set to True, the Network Connect activity will count as successful anyway, and on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor it will be noted that a connection was already available. This setting is useful if you want to be able to run Network Connect without full knowledge of the device’s previous activities, and you wish to avoid triggering a failure just because the device was already connected. If set to False, the Network Connect activity will count as a failure.

No matter how this parameter is set, you cannot run the Network Connect activity twice without an intervening Network Disconnect. If you do, the second Network Connect will fail. UMTS/LTE APN: The Access Point Name to use for UMTS and LTE networks. The parameter is not applicable to other cellular technologies. Leave this field empty if an APN is specified in the device (always needed for NDIS) or for the modem in Windows. Regarding devices for which the APN must be configured differently, see the Getting Started Manual, section 10.6.1. RAS Phone Number: Phone number to use when performing a RAS dial. For UMTS this is usually *99#; however, if a CID other than 1 is to be used you need to specify that value, as follows: *99***n#. For TD-SCDMA, enter *98*1#. For CDMA/EV-DO, enter #777. NDIS CID: The CID (Connection Identifier) to connect with when NDIS is used.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

227

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

User Name, Password: Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. If this is the case for you, enter user and password here. IP Address: Local IP address. Leave blank if the IP address is provided automatically by the operator. Primary DNS: IP address of the primary domain name server. Leave blank if this is provided automatically by the operator. Secondary DNS: IP address of the secondary domain name server. Leave blank if this is provided automatically by the operator. Use Header Compression: Use of header compression for packetswitched. (Property of PS bearer.) Not applicable to circuit-switched. Use Data Compression: Use of data compression for packetswitched. (Property of PS bearer.) Not applicable to circuit-switched.

20.16.3.1.1. Network Connect Prerequisites for Various Devices
This subsection details the behavior and requirements of a variety of devices with respect to the Network Connect (and Network Disconnect) activities. Network Connect performed from within TEMS Investigation is referred to as “scripted Network Connect”. The Network Connect activity that is run in TEMS Investigation in cases where the connection setup needs assistance from outside the application is referred to below as “preconnected Network Connect”. For “connection manager”, the shorthand “CM” is used below for convenience. LG LTE Devices • • For LG LTE USB modems, do not use a CM. Doing so will cause a port conflict. Examples of models: AD600, FM300, G7, G13, LD611, VL600. LG Android LTE smartphones using an NDIS connection require tethered network connection setup from the device menu system and preconnected Network Connect. Examples of models: LS840, MS840, MS910, P936. LG Generic: If the device is detected as “LG Generic”, the connection must be set up either from a CM or from the device menu system, and preconnected Network Connect will be used.

228

Chapter 20. Service Control

Qualcomm LTE Devices (MDM9x00 Chipsets) • • • Normally, no CM should be used with any such devices. Qualcomm Android LTE smartphones generally require preconnected Network Connect. If scripted Network Connect fails, then start the CM or enable tethering from the device menu system, and TEMS Investigation will use preconnected Network Connect instead.

Samsung LTE Devices • General procedure: If an AT port exists for the device, TEMS Investigation will try to open that port and use it to control the network connection. No CM should then be used. If no AT port is available, or if the port is blocked, then the device must be configured using a CM, or tethering must be enabled in the device menu system (preconnected Network Connect performed in either case). GT-B3710: Some older firmware of this device without an AT port requires that the CM should be running. TEMS Investigation then communicates with the CM to control the connection. With newer firmware, the device behaves like GT-B3730/3740: see next paragraph. GT-B3730, GT-B3740: Samsung GT-B3730 and Samsung devices with AT support on the LTE Control Port (such as GT-B3740) have support for scripted Network Connect. You cannot have the CM running when executing the Network Connect and Network Disconnect activities, since a port conflict will then occur (both TEMS Investigation and the CM communicate with AT commands over the LTE Control Port). Samsung Android LTE smartphones do not have a CM accompanying them. If the device firmware exposes an AT port, TEMS Investigation will use that port to perform a scripted Network Connect. If no AT port is present in the operating system, a tethered connection must be set up, and a preconnected Network Connect will be performed. Examples of models: I510, R820, R900, R910, R920, R940.

Qualcomm HSPA+ Devices and Other Devices • • Sierra Wireless devices should not need to have a CM running, provided they are detected as Sierra Wireless devices in TEMS Investigation. These NDIS devices should likewise not require use of a CM: Huawei E1820, Huawei E353, Huawei M920, Novatel MC996D, ZTE N910, ZTE Z006Z.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

229

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

If scripted Network Connect fails, you can start the CM or enable tethering from the device menu system, and TEMS Investigation will use preconnected Network Connect instead. • • For Qualcomm devices using a RAS connection, no CM should ever be needed, and scripted Network Connect should work fine. Devices not mentioned in the foregoing generally require preconnected Network Connect.

20.16.3.2. Network Disconnect
Terminates a data service connection. In the packet-switched case a PDP context is deactivated (UMTS) or a PPP session ended (CDMA); in the circuit-switched case the phone performs a hang-up. For certain NDIS-capable devices, an NDIS connection must be terminated using the PC application accompanying the device (compare the Network Connect activity, section 20.16.3.1). Note that in such cases, it is still necessary to include a Network Disconnect activity in the script. If the device is already disconnected, this activity has no effect, but it still counts as successful on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor. (Same behavior as for Network Connect with Succeed If Already Connected set to True.) This activity has no unique properties.

20.16.3.3. PS Attach
Performs a packet service attach. Note that this activity may not be needed since the device may have automatically attached to a PS network when powered on. This activity has no unique properties.

20.16.3.4. PS Detach
Performs a packet service detach. This activity may be useful to make sure that the phone is not attached to the packet service when starting a measurement (for example, if it has attached automatically at power-on). This activity has no unique properties.

230

Chapter 20. Service Control

20.16.3.5. SIP Register
Causes the device to register with a SIP or IMS server. This is a necessary preparation for a VoIP call; see sections 20.16.6.5, 20.16.6.6. A user account must exist on the server. • Configuration property: Proxy: The proxy server to use. May be omitted. Domain: The domain to register with. If Proxy is not used, a valid server name must be entered here. User Name: User name of account on the server. Password: Password for the server account.

20.16.3.6. SIP Unregister
Causes the device to unregister from a SIP or IMS server used for VoIP. This activity has no unique properties.

20.16.3.7. Start IP Sniffing
Starts capture of IP packets. Note that you do not have to use this command to obtain the data required for KPIs; such data is collected automatically. Compare chapter 33.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

231

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Configuration property: Packet Size: Determines how many bytes of each message will be presented. If you choose a fixed packet size, any further bytes in the message will be truncated. If you choose Full packet size, all messages are presented in full and the entire header is always decoded. Filter: Type of filtering to apply to IP packets. • Optimized Performance: Capture of IP packets is reduced to the minimum needed to compute KPIs. (Packets are filtered with respect to IP address, protocol [TCP/UDP], and port.) Headers Only: The first 54 bytes of every IP packet are captured. This is frequently the preferable setting. None: No filtering of IP packets. Note: This means that all packets belonging to any service used by the PC will be captured. (Packets are filtered with respect to IP address only.)

• •

The information element TCP Packet Loss and the event IP Interruption Time require that the Filter parameter not be set to “Optimized Performance”.

20.16.3.8. Stop IP Sniffing
Stops capture of IP packets initiated by the Start IP Sniffing activity. This activity has no unique properties.

20.16.3.9. FTP Download
Downloads a file from an FTP server. Please be aware that paths and file names must have correct case throughout. Note also that you can conduct TCP load tests with the Network Bandwidth activity (see section 20.16.3.15).

232

Chapter 20. Service Control

Configuration property: Source File: The path and name of the file residing on the FTP server, e.g. srcdir/srcfile.dat. No explicit root symbol is used (no leading slash); if the file is in the root directory, type the file name only. Note that the correct orientation of the slashes is dependent on the FTP server operating system. Target File: Drive letter, path, and file name describing where to store the file on your computer, e.g. C:\targdir\targfile.dat. The drive letter must be included. A session ID (integer) is prefixed to the file name. If multiple FTP Download activities execute in parallel, multiple files are created, each with a unique session ID prefixed to prevent conflicts, e.g.: 0targfile.dat, 1targfile.dat. If the Target File field is left blank, no files are stored; this is the default setting. Server Address: The IP address or host name of the FTP server. No ftp:// prefix is to be used. The address may not contain a path to a subdirectory. Server Port: The port on which the FTP server listens for requests. The default port number is 21. Firewall Mode: PASV or PORT, enabling or disabling passive FTP as defined in  IETF RFC 959. Note that it is essential to set this correctly. Local Data Port: The data port the client will use for FTP download. Valid only when Firewall Mode = PORT. User: User name on the FTP server, if required. Password: User password on the FTP server, if required. Account: Account name on the FTP server, if applicable.

20.16.3.10. FTP Upload
Uploads a file to an FTP server. Please be aware that paths and file names must have correct case throughout.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

233

T = terabyte. the file will be written to the root directory.g.dat. that if multiple instances of TEMS Investigation installed on different PCs are uploading to the same server. Note that the correct orientation of the slashes is dependent on the FTP server operating system. G = gigabyte. enabling or disabling passive FTP as defined in  IETF RFC 959. lowercase letters can be used with no difference in meaning. Firewall Mode: PASV or PORT. the number you enter is interpreted as a byte count. each with a unique session ID prefixed to prevent conflicts. if applicable. Server Address: The IP address or host name of the FTP server. If multiple FTP Upload activities execute in parallel. A session ID (integer) is prefixed to the file name. If set to False. if required. The address may not contain a path to a subdirectory. 234 .dat. The default port number is 21. each instance must use a unique target file name. path. if required.g. User: User name on the FTP server. No ftp:// prefix is to be used.TEMS Investigation 14. however. It is possible to specify the unit as follows: B = byte. K = kilobyte. No explicit root symbol is used. e. M = megabyte. Note that it is essential to set this correctly. if you type a file name only.dat.0 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Target File: Path and file name describing where and how to store the file on the FTP server. C:\srcdir\srcfile. a temporary file is created holding the data to upload. Valid only when Firewall Mode = PORT. multiple files are created.: 0targfile.g. Note. e. If you do not specify a unit. Local Data Port: The data port the client will use for FTP upload. targdir/targfile. The drive letter must be included. no file is created. Source File: Drive letter. Account: Account name on the FTP server. Password: User password on the FTP server. Use Temporary File: If set to True. and file name identifying the file to be uploaded. e. Size to Upload: Size of the file to upload (only valid if Use Temporary File = True). 1targfile. Server Port: The port on which the FTP server listens for requests.dat. Alternatively.

HTTP Get Downloads a URL from an HTTP server. • Configuration property: Browser Client: Web browser used to conduct HTTP sessions. Limitations on HTTP Session Concurrency At any given time. Note that the main URL (specified under URL) is downloaded only once. An additional field Time appears for entering the desired session duration. Proxy Server Port: Proxy server port. Regarding concurrency limitations.16. Client Threads: Number of concurrent threads to be used by the client in handling the HTTP session. Internet Explorer: Internet Explorer 9 is used. not even with the TEMS browser. in a Service Control script. Enter the number of bytes to download in the Payload Size field that appears. Internet Explorer use is limited to one device at a time running one HTTP Get activity. NT12-2533 ver 1. Service Control 20.3. Other devices can however employ the TEMS browser to run HTTP Get while Internet Explorer is in use. End Session After Payload Size: The HTTP session is ended automatically after a user-specified amount of data has been downloaded.0 235 . The time is counted from the moment the first HTTP packet is received from the server. While using Internet Explorer. but not under Windows XP. This is supported under Windows 7 and Vista. Therefore. Use Proxy Server: Select whether to use a proxy server for this connection. End Session After Time: The HTTP session is ended automatically after a user-specified length of time.Chapter 20.11. that is. TEMS Investigation can only make use of a single Internet Explorer session running on the PC. Proxy Server Address: Proxy server address. • • TEMS Browser: The internal Web browser in TEMS Investigation is used. see below. that device cannot execute any other HTTP Get activities at all. regardless of the number of threads. URL: Main URL to download.

Proxy Port: (Appears when Connection Mode = WP-HTTP. the phone first contacts and performs a handshake with the WAP gateway before starting to request WAP pages. WAP Get Downloads a page from a WAP server. there are no restrictions on HTTP session concurrency. Note that WAP pages that redirect the user to a different page cannot be downloaded. WP-HTTP is used by WAP 2.3.0. • CO and CL are used by WAP 1. Proxy Address: (Appears when Connection Mode = WP-HTTP.12. • Gateway Address: (Appears when Connection Mode = CO or CL) The IP address of the operator’s WAP gateway. This WAP version may use a WAP proxy. optional) The IP address of the WAP proxy. Connection Mode: One of CO (Connection-oriented).x and require a WAP gateway. The default port numbers are 9201 (CO). 236 . 9200 (CL). CL (Connectionless). the http:// prefix is optional. The default is 8080. The difference between the modes is essentially this: With CO. • Configuration property: URL: URL of WAP page to download. but this is optional. Gateway Port: (Appears when Connection Mode = CO or CL) The WSP port on the server.16. 20. whereas with CL this is not done.TEMS Investigation 14. optional) The WAP proxy port number. neither for a single device nor for multiple devices. The WAP server can be specified as an IP address or host name. or WP-HTTP (Wireless Profiled HTTP).0 User’s Manual When the TEMS browser alone is used.

. The maximum size is 2000 bytes. Given in the format hh:mm:ss. Ping Initiates a sequence of pings. UDP Data transfer tests using the UDP protocol is a good way to determine the optimum data throughput rate for services that tolerate a given degree of data loss.. Number of Pings: The number of pings to send.Chapter 20.ddd. UDP is more suitable than TCP for this purpose.4. (Some WAP portals adapt their contents to the devices accessing them.1 JavaPlatform/JP-8.14.13. Given in the format hh:mm:ss. Interval Time: Time between pings. . How to install and configure this software is described in the document “TEMS UDP Server User’s Manual”.) Example of User Agent string (for Sony Ericsson W995): User-Agent: SonyEricssonW995/R1DB Browser/NetFront/3.ddd. since the rigorous acknowledgement and retransmission mechanisms of TCP (designed to guarantee full data integrity) will always slow down data throughput.16. Max Response Time: Maximum time to wait for each ping response.4 Profile/ MIDP-2. You can let TEMS Investigation run the UDP test in an automated fashion.1 20. • Configuration property: Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the server to be pinged. Packet Size: Size in bytes of the packet sent with the Ping activity. There is no upper limit. 20. found on the installation CD in NT12-2533 ver 1. the make and model of the device and what WAP software it has installed.16... even if the service does not require these safeguards.3. Service Control User Agent: This is a string indicating. The application will then start out at a low throughput rate and gradually increase the throughput until the packet loss becomes excessive.0 237 . among other things.3.1 Configuration/CLDC-1.. UDP testing is done against a PC that is running the application TEMS UDP Server.

If you select manual mode. Packet Size: The UDP packet size (in bytes) that will be used. If you select automatic mode. The TEMS Investigation application has a UDP client built into it which interacts with this server. Duration (sec): The duration of the UDP session.0 User’s Manual the subdirectory Documents. since the parameters are constrained by the relation (packets per second)  (packet size) = throughput. UDP Mode: • Automatic: The TEMS Investigation UDP client will automatically determine the optimum data rate. 238 . Packets per Second: Number of UDP packets to send or receive per second. all parameters are set by the application and cannot be edited. However. Manual: You specify the data rate and packet rate yourself. Full Duplex: Data is sent in both directions concurrently. see the introductory text above.TEMS Investigation 14. this is the packet rate in each direction. The packet and throughput parameters work as follows. In this case. Please note that you cannot test Full Duplex in automatic mode. Receive: The server sends UDP data to the client. • Configuration property: Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the UDP server. TCP Control Port: The TCP protocol is used in setting up the UDP session and also to communicate the test results after the session has concluded. For Full Duplex mode. using the parameters below. when you change one parameter the others will be adjusted so that the above equation still holds true. Throughput (kbit/s): The UDP throughput rate that will be used. Specify the TCP control port to use here. the parameters from Packets Per Second onward (see below) are set automatically and are not editable. you specify the parameter values yourself. • Direction: • • • Send: The client sends UDP data to the server.

See section 20. The client uses TCP to obtain this information from the server after the UDP session has concluded.0 239 .16. which are updated continuously in the course of the UDP session (see Information Elements and Events.4. Therefore.15. UDP testing with the Network Bandwidth activity is similar to the UDP activity. In contrast.15.16. is comparable to assigning multiple concurrent FTP activities to a device.3. It must be kept in mind that the uplink UDP information elements in the category Data. just as for other service sessions.Chapter 20.2.3. section 5. see the example in section 20.14. They do not indicate the amount successfully transferred to the server. • Configuration property: NT12-2533 ver 1. 20. Network Bandwidth (Iperf Testing) This activity measures maximum TCP and UDP bandwidth performance by interacting with an Iperf server. To find out what percentage of packets was actually received by the UDP server. the UDP Upload Throughput information element is no longer reliable.3. section 3. you need to check the summary statistics in the Service Control Monitor. Before you can use this activity. the UDP Download Throughput is always accurate.8) only indicate the amount of data sent.6 for details.10.3. See the Getting Started Manual. you must download the Iperf software and install it on the desired machine. see section 20. on the other hand. when the packet loss rate becomes nonnegligible. Measuring over TCP. Service Control Further Notes on UDP Testing Statistics on completed UDP sessions are output on the Summary tab of the Service Control Monitor.

Listen Port: See above. Please note that SSH2 requires a special TEMS Investigation license option. UDP section (used for UDP only) Bandwidth: UDP bandwidth (throughput) in Mbit/s. set this parameter to True and enter the port under Listen Port. Packet Size: UDP packet size in bytes. User: User name on the remote server. Protocol: The protocol to use for Iperf testing: TCP or UDP. no such port is specified. section 5. If you want to specify a port on which TEMS Investigation should listen for data (not required). Path: Path to Iperf on the remote server. 240 .6. Full Duplex: Data is sent in both directions concurrently. Duration: The duration of the Iperf testing session (hh:mm:ss). see the Getting Started Manual. Port: Port on the remote server. If you set the parameter to False. Port: The port on which the Iperf server listens for requests.0 User’s Manual General section Remote Address: The IP address or host name of the remote server. Telnet/SSH2 section Connection Client: Either Telnet or SSH2 can be used as protocol. Buffer Size: UDP buffer size in kilobytes. Password: Password on the remote server.TEMS Investigation 14. Receive: The server sends data to the client. Direction: • • • Send: The client sends data to the server.2. Use Listen Port: True or False.

Predefined Snippets for IP One snippet is provided for each data service related activity. NT12-2533 ver 1.16.16. Body Text File: Name of file containing e-mail body text. Attachment: (Optional) Name of file to enclose with the e-mail as attachment. but a STARTTLS command is issued later on to set up a secure session. User: User name of e-mail account.Chapter 20. • Configuration property: From: E-mail address of sender.4. Security: • • • None: No security is applied. Messaging Activities 20. E-mail Send Sends an e-mail to an SMTP server.0 241 . Password: Password for e-mail account. Subject: Content of e-mail Subject field.16. Service Control 20. SSL/TLS: SSL or TLS is used during the whole e-mail session.16.1. STARTTLS: The initial communication is not encrypted. all with the following structure: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  <data service activity>  Network Disconnect. When composing an e-mail script controlling both sender and receiver. Server Address: The IP address or host name of the SMTP server. it is best to use a sequence structure with a waiting period: E-mail Send  Wait  E-mail Receive.3.4. 20. Server Port: The port on which the SMTP server listens for requests. To: E-mail address of recipient.

• Configuration property: Server Address: The IP address or host name of the POP3 server. User: User name of e-mail account.4. body text. When composing an e-mail script controlling both sender and receiver. Server Port: The port on which the POP3 server listens for requests.12. it is best to use a Parallel structure. STARTTLS: The initial communication is not encrypted.3. 20. Store Location: Full path to directory in which to store e-mails.0 User’s Manual 20. see section 20. the same as for the WAP Get activity.16. All e-mail contents are written to a single file: header fields.16.4 and 20. it is best to use a sequence structure with a waiting period: E-mail Send  Wait  E-mail Receive. and attachments (if any).10.2. but a STARTTLS command is issued later on to set up a secure session. Password: Password for e-mail account. When composing an MMS script controlling both sender and receiver.3. 242 .16. E-mail Receive Receives an e-mail from a POP3 server. See sections 20.2.16.3.4. Security: • • • None: No security is applied. SSL/TLS: SSL or TLS is used during the whole e-mail session.TEMS Investigation 14. • Configuration property: Gateway section These are WAP settings. MMS Send Sends an MMS.

4. Note that the phone acting as recipient must not have automatic MMS download turned on (where the phone retrieves the MMS message from the MMS Center automatically as soon as it receives a notification). A file with an extension unknown to TEMS Investigation will be sent as an attachment to the MMS (content type “application/octet-stream”). if required. MMS Receive Receives an MMS. is supported. The MMS Receive activity needs its own connection parameters since logging in to the MMS Center frequently requires connecting to a different APN.3. separated by semicolons. Message: Free text field containing the text message of the MMS (if any). Multiple recipients can be specified. Gateway section: These are WAP settings.Chapter 20. see section 20.4. • Configuration property: Connection Parameters section: Same as for Network Connect.3. Please note that operators generally impose a limit on the MMS file size. User. Attachment: The file to send.16. NT12-2533 ver 1.16. The receiving device can be identical with the sender. the same as for the WAP Get activity. MMS Message Center section URL: The URL of the MMS Center (usually beginning with http://).0 243 . including plain-text files and frequently used image file formats.16. try sending very small files to find out whether the size limit is causing the problem. A wide variety of file types. 20.12.1. If you encounter problems sending MMS messages. Password: Login credentials for MMS Center. see section 20. Service Control MMS Content section To: The phone number(s) or e-mail address(es) to send the MMS to.

SMS Center: Phone number to SMS Center. CDMA: AT+MODE. and AT+CMSS.0 User’s Manual 20. Configuration property: Receiving Device: The phone number or e-mail address to send the SMS to. the phone must therefore support the following AT commands: • • • UMTS: AT+CMGF with format 0 or 1 and AT-CMGS. AT+CMGW. Use Custom SMS Center: Set this to True if you want to make use of an SMS Center other than the one specified on the SIM.TEMS Investigation 14. To stick with the SMS Center indicated on the SIM.4.5. 244 . set this parameter to False. The receiving device may be identical with the sender. SMS Send Sends an SMS. Request Delivery Report: Set this to True if you want the device to request a delivery report from the SMS Center. SMS Message: SMS message string. The SMS service is implemented with AT commands.16. Delivery Report Timeout: Time to wait for the delivery report. For SMS Send activities to work.

20. SMS Receive Receives an SMS.4. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 245 .1.7. The retry behavior is governed by the On Failure property.5. The syntax is that of .aspx Starts with: Enter string under Message Match Pattern to match beginning of message text. see section 20.5. all with the following structure: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  <data service activity>  Network Disconnect. • • Message Match Pattern: The pattern to use for matching incoming or stored messages.com/en-us/library/hs600312(v=VS.6. the device waits for the event Call Established. Predefined Snippets for Messaging One snippet is provided for each messaging activity.microsoft. Service Control 20. the device may retry the call.16. see section 20.2. Video Activities 20. Reference:  msdn. 20. Ends with: Enter string under Message Match Pattern to match end of message text.16.6. The point of doing this is to catch a message already received by the device before it performs the SMS Receive activity.16. SMS messages stored in the device will be searched for matching messages.NET Framework regular expressions.90).Chapter 20.4.16. The call duration is specified by means of a subsequent Wait activity. If this event does not occur. Video Dial Dials a phone number and conducts a video call. Search Text Messages in Device: If set to True.16.2. After dialing.17. • Configuration property: Match Type: • Regular expression: Enter regular expression under Message Match Pattern to match whole message text.

The port entered and the three following ports will be allocated to RTP data.2. #. and p (for pause).16.16. specify the duration of the streaming session here. Proxy Address: The IP address or host name of the RTSP proxy. the activity terminates. By default ports 5004–5007 are used. Hang Up Hangs up a video call.5.5. Max: 20 s. 9. 246 .5. This activity has no unique properties. RTP Port: Here you specify ports to use for RTP on your PC. Prebuffer Length: Length (in seconds) of segment to buffer during initial buffering. Answer Waits for an incoming video call to arrive and answers it when it arrives. Min: 1 s.. Streaming Duration: For Streaming Mode = “Live”.TEMS Investigation 14. 0. Max: 20 s. When this time has expired.3.. Use Proxy Server: Specify whether to access the streaming server through an RTSP proxy server. 20. Min: 1 s. • Configuration property: RTSP Port: The RTSP port on the streaming server. 20. Rebuffer Length: Length (in seconds) of segment to buffer during rebuffering.4. The default port number is 554. Streaming Download streaming video from a streaming server and play it in TEMS Investigation. see chapter 27. 20. Valid characters are: +..16.0 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Phone Number: The complete phone number (including country code) to call. This activity has no unique properties. . *. For a general discussion of video streaming testing.

6. you may instruct the device to retry the call.16.2.16.16. Predefined Snippets for Video • • Video Call snippet: Video Dial  Wait  Hang Up. The format is .6. see section 20.16.3gp. After dialing. Streaming Mode: “Normal” means downloading a video clip of known length (on-demand streaming). • Configuration property: Streaming Link: The text string of the WAP page RTSP link to the stream that is to be downloaded. RTSP Port . “Live” means tapping into a live stream or repeating playlist delivered by a streaming server.6.5. the device waits for the event Call Established..16. Streaming Server: The IP address or host name of the streaming server. see section 20.. WAP Streaming This activity is used to do streaming via a WAP page.16.. section 20.. 20. URL . NT12-2533 ver 1. The call duration is specified by means of a subsequent Wait activity.Chapter 20.1. Streaming Mode: See the Streaming activity.0 247 .5. 20.4.3. WAP Streaming snippet: PS Detach  PS Attach  Network Connect  WAP Streaming  Network Disconnect. Voice Activities 20. If this event does not occur. Dial Dials a phone number and conducts a circuit-switched voice call.6.12.5.17. File To Stream: The file name of the video clip or streaming session description to be downloaded from the streaming server. Service Control Target File: Name and storage location for received streaming file. section 20. User Agent: See the WAP Get activity.2. The retry behavior is governed by the On Failure property.5. 20.16.

16. during a CS voice call. • Configuration property: Measurement Type: • • • M2F DL + UL: Mobile-to-fixed audio quality measurement using Call Generator. Valid characters are: +. this should be the number to the Call Generator or MRU: see section 36. Answer Waits for an incoming CS voice call to arrive and answers it when it arrives. 20. PESQ Measurement Performs audio quality measurement (AQM).6.. For AQM measurement. 0.16. M2M DL: Mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement using Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU).3. See chapters 35–37.TEMS Investigation 14. and p (for pause). 20.6. This activity has no unique properties.6.2. 9. *.3. 20. including PESQ.. M2M DL + UL: Mobile-to-mobile audio quality measurement using Audio Capturing Unit (ACU).3.0 User’s Manual • Configuration property: Phone Number: The complete phone number (including country code) to call. . 248 .4. Hang Up Hangs up a CS voice call.16. PESQ Duration: The length of time for which to collect audio quality measurements.. #. This activity has no unique properties.

16. Codec: Voice codec. or AMR-NB. AMR-WB. The point of this mechanism is to have poor quality files automatically saved for further study. Codec Rate: Voice codec rate. AMR-WB. This activity has no unique properties.9.6.6. VoIP Answer Waits for an incoming voice-over-IP call to arrive and answers it when it arrives.6. CH3: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 3/LINE OUT 3.16. Service Control Audio Channel (only used for M2M DL + UL): • • • • CH1: Choose this channel for the phone connected to LINE IN 1/ LINE OUT 1 on the ACU.6.711 A-law. one of: G. Codec Rate: Voice codec rate. VoIP Dial Dials a voice-over-IP call. CH2: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 2/LINE OUT 2.6.Chapter 20. 20. • Configuration property: Phone Number: The phone number to call.9.7. Recording Threshold (only used for M2M DL + UL): All audio files (*.0 249 . See also section 20.5. • Configuration property: Codec: Voice codec. 20. one of: G.6.0\PESQ. or AMR-NB. CH4: Channel for phone connected to LINE IN 4/LINE OUT 4. NT12-2533 ver 1.pcm) with a PESQ value worse than this threshold value will be stored under My Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. VoIP Hang Up Hangs up a voice-over-IP call. 20.711 A-law.16. See also section 20.16.16.

both fixed and wireless. 20. This setup is necessary to enable PESQ measurement for VoIP. the audio file will be saved under [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14. All network interfaces except the testing device must be disabled. Note that the measurements are found in the Media Quality information element category: see Information Elements and Events.16.16. Caller and callee must use the same speech codec.16. How to Set Up VoIP Testing A number of things must be observed when setting up and running VoIP scripts. so that it can be controlled which side hangs up the call. You must not have any other measurement devices plugged into either PC when doing VoIP testing.6. The callee script must therefore complete its SIP Register activity before the caller script reaches VoIP Dial. the callee must be registered before the caller places the call. Predefined VoIP snippets are provided. Store AQM files: Yes or No. You cannot have an Ethernet cable connected either.6. see the technical paper “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. MOS limit: If the MOS value for an audio file is lower than or equal to this threshold. • Configuration property: Duration: The length of time for which to collect voice quality measurements. VoIP Voice Quality Performs audio quality measurement (AQM) including PESQ/POLQA.10. section 3. For a full tutorial on testing VoIP.9. See chapter 38. Two scripts must be prepared. found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.6.8. each running an instance of TEMS Investigation. • The calling device and called device must be connected to different PCs.9. Below is a summary of the salient points.0 User’s Manual 20. one for the caller and one for the callee. Both caller and callee must register with the SIP or IMS server to be used for VoIP.0\PESQ. Furthermore. • • • • • 250 .TEMS Investigation 14. The Duration parameter should be set differently for caller and callee. nor any other internet connections in parallel. see section 20.

17. Failure Handling Section • On Failure: This property determines what will happen if an activity fails (when first attempted).6.) Enabled: True or False.17. Service Control 20. NT12-2533 ver 1. Activity Section • • Name: Name given to the activity. the activity is disabled and will not be performed when the script is run. • • • 20. • 20. for FTP Download. VoIP Dial snippet: Network Connect  SIP Register  VoIP Dial  VoIP Voice Quality  VoIP Hang Up  SIP Unregister  Network Disconnect. 20. VoIP Answer snippet: Network Connect  SIP Register  VoIP Answer  VoIP Voice Quality  SIP Unregister  Network Disconnect. (Only appears for certain non-editable activities such as the “root” activity at the top and bottom of the workflow. if no such configuration set exists.16. Activity-specific properties are covered in section 20. Equipment: The EQ to which the activity is assigned. If set to False. Configuration: Reference to a configuration set of the type associated with this activity.17. For example.2. you need to create one in the Configuration Sets pane. General Activity Properties These properties are common to all or many activity types.Chapter 20. This is indicated by the activity being dimmed by a semi-transparent greenish box in the flowchart. Predefined Snippets for Voice • • Voice Call snippet (CS): Dial  Wait  Hang Up.0 251 . an FTP server configuration set needs to be selected here.10.16 in connection with their respective activities. The combo box is populated with all existing configuration sets that fit the activity.1. Description: Free-text field where you can optionally enter a description of the activity.

On Timeout: The activity will be aborted after a fixed period of time. Delay – the time to wait before each retry. On Event: The activity will be aborted if and when one of the specified events occurs. Descriptions of Configuration Sets All types of configuration set are associated with a particular service. otherwise it will run to completion. 252 .1. 20.TEMS Investigation 14. Retry: If an activity fails. a set of further parameters appear: Retries – the number of retries. in which case it applies to the entire script.3. it will be retried. For that reason each configuration set is described in section 20.16 in conjunction with the activity or activities that use it.17. – Note that this property is also possessed by the root activity. What you indicate here is thus a maximum duration for the activity.0 User’s Manual – Continue Script Execution: If an activity fails. the activity is abandoned. Stop Script Execution: If an activity fails. When you choose this option. Configuration Sets 20. On Failure – what action to take if all retries fail (continue or stop script). Compare the Terminate activity. – – 20.18. and the whole script is terminated. the activity is abandoned. unless it has already completed before that time. and the execution proceeds to the next activity in the workflow branch in question. which aborts the whole script with immediate effect. Termination Section • Abort: – – Never: The activity will execute as long as it takes to complete.18.

18. you use the Import tab.1.0 Service Settings. click the Export button.18. Each configuration set is now exported as a file named according to the format TEMS.. All configuration sets currently known to the application are listed in the window. Managing Configuration Sets You can manage configuration sets using the Settings Manager utility.>. To perform the export. For a tutorial on how to use these functions in conjunction with script saving/loading in order to port scripts between PCs.2. Now select where to export the configuration sets. Click the Target button and point to the desired directory.0 253 .18. see section 20.19. Exporting Configuration Sets To export configuration sets you use the Export tab. Alternatively. right-click in the list and choose Select All/Unselect All. choose File  Manage Settings. This window appears: 20. choose Start  [All] Programs  Ascom  TEMS Products  Utilities  TEMS Investigation 14.1. in standard Windows fashion.<service name>Settings.2. • • 20.2.Services. Service Control 20. To select/deselect all sets.Chapter 20..2. • Select the configuration sets you want to export by clicking them in the list.<.config. Shift + click and Ctrl + click can also be used. NT12-2533 ver 1. • To launch the Settings Manager utility.Settings. in Windows. Importing Configuration Sets To import previously exported configuration sets.

choose Tools  Manage Backups. in standard Windows fashion. and click the Restore button. a backup of the configuration sets will be created whenever you use the Clear Settings command. From the Tools menu you can delete all configuration sets by choosing Clear Settings. Select the configuration sets you want to import by clicking them in the list. • 20. Deleting Configuration Sets You can delete a configuration set from TEMS Investigation by selecting it on the Export tab and clicking the Delete button. • • 20.0 User’s Manual • Click the Source button and browse to the directory you want to import from. The file will receive the extension .18. The Save Script dialog contains the following options: 254 . If the Enable Backup option is selected. click the Import button.tsc (for “TEMS Service Control”).19. right-click in the list and choose Select All/Unselect All.TEMS Investigation 14. Saving and Loading Scripts To save a script to file. • To restore configuration sets from a backup. To perform the import. select the backup of interest from the list. select it and click Clear.2. Shift + click and Ctrl + click can also be used. The window is populated with all configuration sets found in that directory. click the Save button on the Service Control Designer toolbar. To delete a backup.3. To select/unselect all sets.

2.) Redistributable: All configuration sets referenced in a script are saved with the script. This means that changes to a configuration set will automatically propagate to all scripts that reference it. Service Control • • Description: Free-text field where you can optionally enter a description of the script. Choose this option if you are going to use the script on several computers. Start TEMS Investigation. NT12-2533 ver 1. – 20. Note that configuration sets can also be saved separately: see section 20. making the TSC file a self-contained and independent entity that can be immediately reused on a different PC.19. On the “receiver” PC (with the above data from the sender available on some suitable storage medium): – – – – Import the configuration sets exported from the sender. (This is the default setting.18. Open the sender’s script. – Standard: No configuration sets are saved with the script.Chapter 20. To open an existing script stored on file. click the Load button on the Service Control Designer toolbar. Save your script with Format set to Redistributable. Tutorial on Porting Scripts between PCs Follow these steps to share a script and its related configuration sets between two computers: • On the “sender” PC: – – – • Save your workspace. Export your configuration sets.1.0 255 . Open the sender’s workspace. The script can now be not only run but also freely modified on the receiver PC. Format: You can save the script either with or without the configuration sets it uses. Choose this option if you are going to use the script on one PC only.

20. Further Functionality in the Service Control Designer Window 20. Saving Workflow as Image • You can also save the contents of the workflow pane as an image. Activity Filter The Activity Filter combo box at the top of the Activity pane can be used to filter the list of activities so that it shows only the activity types supported by a particular device. This is most conveniently done from the context menu: • Select all of the activities you want to modify by dragging the mouse pointer or by Ctrl + click. then right-click the selection and choose the desired command from the context menu.2. To this end.20. Context Menu in Workflow Pane The context menu that appears when you right-click in the workflow pane has functionality that is mostly mirrored in other places: in the regular window menu and in the Properties pane.TEMS Investigation 14. The rest is standard Windows functionality.20. except the Move Left and Move Right commands which you can use to change the ordering of activities in a workflow.1.0 User’s Manual 20.19. The Refresh button to the right of the Activity Filter combo box updates the activity list with any new user-defined snippets that have been created since the list was last refreshed.2. By default all activities are shown (“All”). 256 . The context menu is especially useful for changing properties (EQ assignment. on-failure behavior) of several activities at once. choose File  Save As Image in the Service Control window and select the desired image file format. 20.20.

3. You can also click and drag to select a portion of the workflow pane that you want to enlarge. To reverse the mouse-click zoom function. the mouse pointer by default has the usual point-andclick function. click the Zoom Out button on the window toolbar. After you click the Zoom In button on the window toolbar. mouse clicks in the workflow pane will magnify its contents in predefined steps. Service Control 20.20. To return the mouse to pointing mode. Zooming the Workflow Pane In the workflow pane. You can however switch the mouse to zoom mode. where mouse pointing actions have the effect of zooming the workflow pane in or out. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 257 . click the Pointer button.Chapter 20.

Regarding control functions applied from the Navigator.0 User’s Manual 21. For clarity. Device properties that correspond to aspects of the Cell Lock control function in the Navigator (described in section 9.1. Nokia. Some devices have Navigator control functions that correspond to device properties for other devices. Overview of Properties by Device This overview covers certain Sony Ericsson. 21. To access the property dialog of a device. and Samsung phones. do as follows: • • Right-click on the device on the Navigator’s Equipment tab. see section 9.1. Device Properties From TEMS Investigation you can view and modify certain properties of devices.1. Other supported devices share little or none of the control functionality listed here.5) are labeled “CL” in the table. Choose Properties from the context menu.TEMS Investigation 14. 258 . these instances are marked with an “N” (for “Navigator”) in the table below.

No. access control BLER target control (WCDMA) C/A measurements (GSM) Channel verification (GSM)1 Disable handover CL EDGE capability control HSPA capability control L3 messages. 3. Device Properties Sony Ericsson C702/C905*/W760i/W995* Sams. N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N NT12-2533 ver 1. Samsung Galaxy S 4G Xperia arc S* (Qualc. access control Speech codec control (GSM)3 TxPower control (GSM) 1. prevent handover to specified cells.) Control Function Samsung Infuse 4G TM506/Z750i Access class control Barred cells. 2. Changing order of priority between codecs is supported for C905*/ W995* only.Chapter 21.0 Nokia NTM3 K790i/a W600i K800i K600i 259 . That is. discard/ignore Lock on ARFCN CL Lock on BSIC CL Lock on PLMN Lock on SC CL Lock on UARFCN CL Prevent handover2 CL Reserved cells. See chapter 43.

Functions of Dialog Buttons Besides OK and Cancel. you must switch the corresponding “Default/Modified” field to Modified (can be done by double-clicking the value).1. listing messages and mode reports delivered by the phone. which means no alteration of regular phone behavior.1. 21. You can turn the reporting on and off for each item listed. Properties of ST-Ericsson Chipset Based Phones This section deals with viewable and editable properties of ST-Ericsson chipset based phones: Sony Ericsson phones except Xperia arc S. Any changes to the properties will apply as long as the phone remains activated in TEMS Investigation. like OK. To activate a control function. Common Controls Each of the nodes in the property grid contains a field Default/Modified. the Properties dialog contains the buttons Restore Defaults and Apply. 260 . It is also applicable to the subset of those properties exhibited by the Samsung Galaxy S 4G.0 User’s Manual 21. but without exiting the dialog. and the Samsung Galaxy S 4G and Infuse 4G models. without exiting the dialog. These buttons have the following functions: • • Apply saves all changes made to settings.2. see Information Elements and Events.2. 21. At the outset this field has the value Default everywhere. section 6.TEMS Investigation 14.2. When you activate the phone in the application. Note the following: • • “Path Searcher Report (A2)” must be checked for the Finger Info information elements (WCDMA) to be valid. Regarding “TPC Info Per Cell”. Extended Reports This item appears for certain Sony Ericsson phones.2. the phone retrieves all settings you have specified for it. Restore Defaults resets all settings to their defaults. then proceed to set the other parameters as desired according to the subsections below.

2.2.1) you can both define a subset of codecs that should be enabled and change the default order of priority between the selected codecs. 21. Device Properties 21.Chapter 21. 9 Every phone is by default allocated randomly to one of these classes. MCC. the phone will go into limited service mode. 15 21.” button in the right-hand field listing codecs.1. Classes 0 . chapter 4).. Membership of these classes entitles a phone to make access attempts in various special situations. CAS Lock on PLMN You can lock the phone on a PLMN.. NT12-2533 ver 1. the user interface shown below appears. If you lock on a PLMN that is not available. Note that this function can be meaningfully applied only if the SIM supports multiple PLMNs..3.. Speech codecs When you click the “.. CAS Access Class Here you can manipulate access class settings ( 3GPP 22.2. Check the classes that you want the phone to be a member of..2. specified by an MCC and MNC combination.2. CAS Speech Codec For certain phone models (indicated in section 21.011.2. Classes 10 .2. MNC Define the target PLMN here.0 261 . You can change the default allocation here.

Then use the arrow buttons on the right to adjust the order of priority for the selected codecs. Number of adjacent channels Specify one or two channels.TEMS Investigation 14.2.0 User’s Manual • Use the arrow buttons in the middle to move any codecs you want to disable from the Selected box to the Available box. • For other phone models you can only select which codecs should be enabled. 21. By default all codecs are enabled. GSM Adjacent Scan Phones capable of C/A measurements on hopping channels can be set to measure either one channel or two channels on each side of the carrier. see above.2. 262 . this is done in a regular property grid. Those that you leave in the Selected box will remain enabled.4.

Prevent: The phone will be prevented from camping on the channels checked under ARFCNs. namely to prevent reselection to a specified channel set. you must first lock the phone to the GSM RAT (see section 9.2.Chapter 21. GSM Barred Cells Here you can alter the phone’s behavior in GSM idle mode with respect to barred cells. Device Properties 21. 21. All cells allowed: The phone will camp on any cell.0 263 . Normal: No effect on default behavior. NT12-2533 ver 1.3). Only barred cells allowed: The phone will camp only on barred cells. Note: To apply this kind of lock. GSM Cell Selection When the phone is in idle mode.5.8) and to a GSM band (see section 9.1.2. Mode Normal: The phone will not camp on barred cells.1. Lock: The phone will be locked to the set of channels checked under ARFCNs. This inhibits all reselections to other channels.6.2. The inverted operation is also possible.2. ignoring cell barring. this normally prevents the phone from accessing it. ARFCNs Control mode Check the channels you want to lock on or exclude. it can be locked to one channel or to a set of channels. regardless of the signal strength and quality of neighboring cells. If the “barred” flag is set for a cell.

you can do one of the following: • • Prevent handover to specified channels. This function can be used to force data transfer over GPRS rather than EDGE. ARFCNs Control mode Check the channels you want to prevent handover to or restrict handover to.7. a very low RxLev for the serving cell. Specifically. Force handover to a specified channel.2. The phone will then report no RxLev for these channels. Selecting a single channel forces handover to that channel. Disable handover altogether. or restrict handovers to a chosen channel set. 21. and no RxLev for other neighboring cells.2. GSM EDGE Capability For EDGE-capable phones you can choose to disable the EDGE capability. you can manipulate its handover behavior. Normal: No effect on default behavior.0 User’s Manual 21. Disable handover: The phone will be prevented from performing any handovers at all.8. GSM Handover When the phone is in dedicated mode. Prevent: The phone will be prevented from performing handover to the channels checked under ARFCNs. • 264 . The phone will then report a very high RxLev for any such cell. Lock: The phone will be able perform handover only to the set of channels checked under ARFCNs.TEMS Investigation 14.2.2. No: EDGE disabled. EDGE allowed Yes: EDGE enabled.

2.. NT12-2533 ver 1.”). and other cells: Normal No change from normal cell barring behavior. 21. see section 26. Layer 3 Messages For certain Sony Ericsson UEs you can discard Layer 3 messages of specified types.2. GSM Tx Power For each GSM frequency band you can specify a Tx Power value which will override the network allocated Tx Power.Chapter 21.0 265 . Note: The UE must have been activated at least once for the full tree of Layer 3 message types to appear here.2..2.2. Number of Layer 3 message types selected under Message types. Regarding the latter.005. check the types of Layer 3 message that you want to discard. section 4. In the dialog that appears. WCDMA Barred Cells Here you can modify the phone’s behavior with respect to accessing of barred. see  3GPP 45. 21.11.10.2. Default/Discard Loaded Message types To enable the function.9.1.) Enter the desired new Tx Power in dBm for the GSM 850 MHz band. The phone can store up to 10 message types in its memory. reserved. Device Properties 21. Click the browse button (marked “. select Discard here.3. Tx Power GSM 850 (dBm) (etc. Discarded messages are colored red in the Layer 3 Messages window and tagged with a special note in the plain-text decoding.

Control mode Normal: No effect on default behavior.0 User’s Manual Mode All cells allowed: The phone will access any cell. WCDMA Cell Selection Here you can lock the UE to selected UARFCNs or scrambling codes in WCDMA. Only reserved for operator use: The phone will only access cells that are reserved for operator use. BLER Target value The BLER target for the UE will change to the value you set here.331.13.2. in idle mode as well as connected mode. also barred and reserved ones. Lock: The phone will be locked to the set of UARFCNs/scrambling codes that you select in the UARFCNs and Scrambling codes fields. 266 . Only reserved for future use: The phone will only access cells that are reserved for future use.12.2. Regarding the format of this value. see  3GPP 25. 21. Only reserved: The phone will only access reserved cells. Only barred or reserved: The phone will only access cells that are barred or reserved. Only barred: The phone will only access barred cells.TEMS Investigation 14.2.2. WCDMA BLER Target For certain Sony Ericsson UEs you can override the BLER target set for the UE by the network. 21.

These categories are defined in  3GPP 25. you must first lock the phone to the WCDMA RAT (see section 9. table 5. Up to 32 target UARFCNs can be specified.14. If you have specified multiple target UARFCNs. HSDPA + HSUPA: Both HSDPA and HSUPA are enabled. If HSUPA is enabled. Up to 32 SCs can then be listed as targets. table 5. Note: To apply this kind of lock. However. These categories are defined in  3GPP 25. HSDPA: HSDPA is enabled (but not HSUPA.Chapter 21. you can enable or disable these capabilities.8) and to a WCDMA band (see section 9.1a. note that if you list more than one UARFCN. you can set here what HSUPA (E-DCH) category the phone should report. or all of HSPA.1. UARFCNs Check the UARFCN you want to lock to. you cannot also select scrambling codes as targets. To be able to specify target SCs.3).2. Device Properties Scrambling codes Lists the scrambling codes to lock on.1g. 21.2.306. HSDPA category If HSDPA is enabled.1. Allowed technologies R99 only: Only WCDMA R99 is enabled. WCDMA RRC Radio Capability For phones supporting HSDPA.0 267 . you can set here what HSDPA (HS-DSCH) category the phone should report.306. you cannot add any target SCs (the Scrambling codes field is grayed). you must first have selected a single target UARFCN. even if the phone supports it). HSUPA category NT12-2533 ver 1.

21. 21. Specify the scrambling code to lock on.3.0 User’s Manual 21. you can lock the phone to a single ARFCN. Reversed: The phone will camp only on barred cells.3.3. 21.3.TEMS Investigation 14. Specify the band containing the channel you want to lock on.1. Specify the UARFCN to lock on. Enable sector lock UARFCN Scrambling code Set this to Yes to enable the sector lock function. Sector Lock Control (WCDMA) These settings apply in WCDMA mode.3. Enable channel lock Band ARFCN Set this to Yes to enable the channel lock function. Cell barring Normal: The phone will not camp on barred cells. Ignored: The phone will camp on any cell. Specify the ARFCN of the channel to lock on. GSM Cell Barring Control This setting governs how the phone behaves with respect to barred cells in GSM. The channel lock function works in idle mode only.2. ignoring cell barring. The phone will be locked to the chosen UARFCN and scrambling code. Properties of Nokia Phones (NTM3) Channel Lock Control (GSM) In GSM mode. 268 .

as explained in section 9. 21. All disabled: All messages are disabled. 21. the following options exist: All enabled: All messages are enabled. you must enable all logs with “Vocoder Packet” in their names. Device Properties 21. This is true for the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc S as well. which always means all messages without restriction. Regarding the NV (Nonvolatile) interface. (The settings you make here do not affect the scope of All enabled. for certain devices such as Option data cards and Sierra Wireless UMTS data cards. For speech codec information elements to be populated. Common.6. Properties of Samsung LTE Modems For Samsung LTE modems.) Please note that if you disable everything here. What properties are editable depends on what product you are using. Properties of Qualcomm Chipset Based Devices Properties of Qualcomm chipset based devices are mostly limited to enabling and disabling of various logs. for this device all control functions are applied from the Navigator. LTE For each of these top-level message categories. Properties of GPS Units You can inspect and change some properties of a GPS unit.6. RAT lock and band lock functions are available.5.4. NT12-2533 ver 1. However. no reports from the MS device channel will be displayed in TEMS Investigation.1. see section 9. various message categories can be enabled and disabled.0 269 . Select messages: When this option is chosen.1.Chapter 21. further fields appear which allow you to enable or disable various subcategories of messages.

• Setting Up a User-defined Event Open the Event Definition window. which trigger the event when they evaluate to true.0 User’s Manual 22.1. see Information Elements and Events. you can define events of your own. 22.7). These expressions can contain: • • • Layer 3 messages other events conditions involving information elements.TEMS Investigation 14. Regarding this window. Events TEMS Investigation generates events to indicate noteworthy occurrences in the cellular network.3. Predefined and User-defined Events Definitions of all predefined events are found in Information Elements and Events. chapter 7.2.5. 22. Click Add. Presentation of Events Events that occur are listed in the Events window. User-defined events are specified by logical expressions. 270 . A number of events are predefined. section 8. Events can also be presented: • • • as symbols on the map (see section 31.8. 22.4) as audio signals (see section 22. in addition to these.4) as symbols and vertical lines in line charts (see section 29.

the event can be triggered by any device.0 271 . Events Name System Mobile Enter a name for your user-defined event. The structure of the expression is displayed in the box beneath the Name field. You build up the event expression by using the add buttons on the right. Choose the desired message from the dialog that appears. 22.3.3.Chapter 22. If you choose a specific external device in this combo box. The choice in this combo box governs what will be selectable when you click the Add Element button. 22.1. the event is triggered only when the event expression is true for this particular device.2. • Adding an Information Element Criterion to the Event Expression Click Add Element and choose Information Element from the context menu. • Adding a Layer 3 Message to the Event Expression Click Add Element and choose Layer 3 from the context menu. NT12-2533 ver 1. If you choose “Any”.

3. choose an event from the combo box.3. Available operators are AND. click Add Element and choose Event from the context menu. click Add Operator and select an operator or delimiter from the context menu.0 User’s Manual Information element Argument Value: Changed Value: Threshold Choose an information element. OR.TEMS Investigation 14. 22. XOR. In the new dialog that appears. 22. Choose a threshold operator (“=”. or “<”). Adding an Operator/Delimiter to the Event Expression To build a composite logical expression. • • Adding an Event to the Event Expression In the Add User Defined Events dialog. exceeds. specify it here. and NOT.4. and set the threshold value. If the information element has an argument. Choose this to trigger the event whenever the value of the selected information element changes. or drops below a certain value.3. • In the Add User Defined Events dialog. you will need logical operators and possibly delimiters (brackets). 272 . “>”. Choose this to trigger the event when the selected information element assumes.

NOT. the logfile must be reloaded for the events to become visible. The following event gives a rough indication that the poor C/I is probably due to a noise problem: the poor C/I coincides with a very low signal strength.5. NT12-2533 ver 1.6. Two common ones are co-channel and adjacent channel interference. See section 22.4. 22. Click Delete. • • Deleting User-defined Events Select the event you want to delete in the Event Definition window. but the fact that the signal is overwhelmed by assorted random disturbances – i. Events Note: Events used in the expression for a user-defined event can be combined with the OR operator only (not with AND. Example of Event Definition This example is taken from GSM. the main problem is not interference from other callers. or XOR). Keep adding items to the event expression until it is complete. 22. however.6 below for an example of a logical expression. Click Edit and make the desired changes. • • Editing User-defined Events Select the event you want to edit in the Event Definition window. Note: If a user-defined event is added or modified after a logfile is loaded. The new event is now added to the list in the Event Definition window. In certain circumstances. 22. There are many possible causes of poor C/I values. Then click OK to exit the Add User Defined Events dialog.e. including other man-made signals so faint that they merely add up to a quasirandom disturbance. what is usually called “noise”.0 273 .Chapter 22. This means thermal noise generated within the circuits of the phone as well as external background noise from a plethora of sources.

Click OK. 13. From the Add Information Element combo box. 7. open the Event Definition window. Click OK to finish. 6. The event expression should now look as follows: C/I Worst < 10 AND RxLev Sub (dBm) < –99 15. choose “C/I Worst”. To associate events with audio signals. 8. you use the Audio Indications window found in the Configuration folder in the Navigator.7. Click Add Element and choose “Information Element” from the context menu. 274 . 10. Click OK. Under “Information Element” choose “RxLev Sub (dBm)”. 12. 2. Click Add Operator and choose “AND”. 11. 14. 5. Choose “Threshold”. Click Add Element and choose “Information Element”. 4. From the Configuration folder in the Navigator.TEMS Investigation 14. This is useful if you are performing a drive test on your own and need to keep your eyes on the road.0 User’s Manual 1. Set Value to 10. Set Value to –99. and choose “<” from the combo box. Name the event “Noise Indication” (or whatever you like). Choose “Threshold” and choose “<” from the combo box. 9. The event is now added to the event list and can be used in the Map window and in other presentation windows. Audio Indications for Events For each event you can specify an audio signal to be played when the event occurs. 3. 22. Click Add.

Events 22.0 275 . Listen to the selected sound file. NT12-2533 ver 1. Check to use the internal speaker of your PC. Click Apply to add the current audio indication and keep the dialog open. Adding Audio Indications Click Add in the Audio Indications window. Enter the path to the WAV file you want to use.Chapter 22. Mobile Event Sound Use PC speaker Test • • Choose an external device.1. Choose an event.7. Click OK when you are done adding audio indications. The events that are now associated with sounds are listed in the Audio Indications window. or click Browse and select the file.

Muting All Audio Indications To disable all audio indications. 22.TEMS Investigation 14.7. 22.7. From now on.2.7. • Deactivating Audio Indications To deactivate an audio indication: Select the audio indication. You might find this attractive when doing post-processing. To activate a deactivated audio indication: • Select the audio indication.0 User’s Manual 22. Click Deactivate Sound.4 below). Click Edit and make the desired changes.7. They may however be deactivated (see section 22. no audio indications will be played until you decide to enable them again.7.3. Activating Audio Indications Audio indications are by default active.5.4. 22. 276 . independently of their status (active or deactivated): Click Mute All. • Editing Audio Indications Select the audio indication to be edited. Click Activate Sound.

NT12-2533 ver 1. Click Save and enter a file name (extension .7.svt).0 277 . Click Open to load an *. 22.7. 22. • Saving and Loading Audio Indications Select the audio indication you want to save. and deactivated ones will remain deactivated. The status of the audio indications will remain the same as before you clicked Mute All: active audio indications will start playing again. Click Delete.svt file in the Audio Indications window.7. • Deleting Audio Indications Select the audio indication to be deleted.Chapter 22. Events To re-enable all audio indications: Click Undo Mute All.6.

see Information Elements and Events. chapter 2. Types of Presentation Window The following presentation windows are available in TEMS Investigation: Window Type Status window Event Counter window Message window Video Monitor GPS window Line chart Bar chart Chapter Ref.TEMS Investigation 14. For an overview of information element categories. 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 278 . either in real time or during logfile analysis. Regarding predefined events. Presented Data The presentation windows are used to present information elements. Presentation: Basics This chapter covers the fundamentals of data presentation.2.0 User’s Manual 23. Full details on information elements follow in chapters 3 and 4 of that volume.1. chapter 7. see Information Elements and Events. Data is presented in fundamentally the same way in both cases. 23. and messages. 23. differences are noted whenever relevant in the chapters that follow. events.

right-click any empty part of the worksheet. Presentation: Basics Window Type Map window Chapter Ref. Alternatively. choose Set Equipment Number. 31 23.3. Select the equipment (EQ/MS/DC) number in the dialog.1. devices are represented by their channels: • • • MS for radio measurements DC for data service measurements PS for positioning equipment. NT12-2533 ver 1. • • The change will affect all presentation windows that display data from a specified device (as opposed to. for example. and choose the same item from the context menu. 23. Event Counter windows). The EQ designations currently do not appear in presentation windows.3. as opposed to the Navigator and Service Control components. Device Channels: MS/DC/PS In presentation windows.Chapter 23.0 279 . From the Worksheet menu. “Set Equipment Number” Function There is a shortcut for changing which device to present data from in an entire worksheet: • • Bring the worksheet of interest forward by clicking it.

Note: The above applies without qualifications in analysis mode. things are somewhat different: it is still possible to inspect previously recorded data. In drive-testing mode. the presentation automatically reverts to the present time. When you select a point in time in a history window. it is possible to visualize numeric information element values by means of a range of colors. it is drawn in black in graphical presentations and left out in textual presentations. Whenever an information element is invalid. • Window Updating and Synchronization A fundamental distinction can be made between “snapshot” windows. Video Monitor) “history” windows. however. other history windows highlight the same time instant. You can always turn off the color coding and use a fixed color for drawing. see section 26. 23. for use in that window only.TEMS Investigation 14. whereas the snapshot windows are updated to show the data that was current at this time. bar charts. The map plots a maximum of two new theme markers every second.5. For example. Regarding synchronization between message windows and other windows. line charts. Color Ranges In many types of presentation windows. GPS window. Event Counter windows). but in many window types.3 for details. the line chart plots two points every second. In status windows. and • All windows are synchronized. custom color ranges for information elements can be defined. as soon as a new message arrives from the phone.4.5. 280 . These colors are defined in the Navigator. which accumulate information and display the whole history of the testing session. message windows.0 User’s Manual 23. or has no color defined for its current value. The exactness of the synchronization is limited by the time resolutions of the various presentations. which show the situation at one instant in time and are constantly refreshed in drive testing mode (status windows. see section 5. or statistics on it (maps.

NT12-2533 ver 1.7. Presentation: Basics 23. Export/Import of Presentation Windows Status windows.0 281 .7.6. 23.Chapter 23.) From the File menu. Other Window Properties The appearance of any presentation window can be changed by altering the window properties. see appendix B. • • • Export To export a presentation window.7. The extension depends on the window type. line charts. and message windows can be exported. maps. (Open a new window if necessary. that is.2. • • • Import To import a saved presentation window. saved along with all their current settings in a file separate from the workspace. proceed as follows: Select the window. From the File menu. Type a file name and click Save. Select the desired file and click Open. 23. choose Import. which are accessed by right-clicking in the window and choosing Properties from the context menu.1. proceed as follows: Focus a presentation window of the same type as the one you want to import. and click it. choose Export. You can later import the window into the application again by opening the file. 23.

a blank template is available which you can use to compose your own status windows. Also. these are listed in Information Elements and Events. The setup wizard is intended to be run only once. Note: Setting the number of columns and rows in the status window cannot be done with the setup wizard.2). General The status windows present information elements in tabular form. In addition. Status Windows This chapter explains the workings of status windows.3. chapter 8. 24. To set up a status window.2. See section 24.1. you cannot enter text in the status window using this tool. A number of ready-made windows are provided for presenting particular categories of information. Later on.3. which is described in section 24.0 User’s Manual 24. For these purposes you must use the Properties dialog.TEMS Investigation 14. you can modify the window using the Properties dialog. use the setup wizard (section 24. Setting Up Status Window Contents The contents of a status window are conveniently set up using the setup wizard. 282 . 24.

This dialog opens: NT12-2533 ver 1. Click Browse and select a font. Name Name the new status window. and the contents of the current window will be lost. Note that changing the name later will create a new status window. Status Windows • Right-click in the status window and choose Setup Wizard. click Add. To add an information element.0 283 . Font • • Click Next to proceed to step 2 of the setup wizard.Chapter 24.

Choose an information element. 284 . Enter an argument for the information element (if it needs one). Choose an information element category.0 User’s Manual Mobile System Information element Argument Choose which device to pick the information element from.TEMS Investigation 14. See Information Elements and Events. chapter 2. • Select the View tab.

Choose alignment for the displayed values.Chapter 24. In that window. This checkbox with accompanying combo boxes appears only for the CDMA window Finger Info.0 285 . Keep track of the all-time-low and all-time-high values by means of vertical lines. and can only assume a limited number of values. etc. Check to display numeric values as colored bars. NT12-2533 ver 1. See screenshot in section 24.6. Center. Min/Max indicator Associated information elements Information Element 1 Information Element 2 • Select the Color tab to customize colors and color ranges.2. Right Bar Constant length Check to display values alphanumerically. This is useful for information elements that represent states. Status Windows Value Left. you can visualize the thresholds “T-Add (dB)” and “T-Drop (dB)” as vertical black lines drawn on top of the bars in the Energy column. Draw the bar with constant length.

3. • Changing Status Window Properties Right-click in the status window and choose Properties from the context menu. If you want to define a special color range here. The Mode tab governs the layout and appearance of the window: 286 .TEMS Investigation 14.3 for details on how to do this). uncheck the box and specify the range (see section 5. Click OK when you are done adding information elements. 24.0 User’s Manual Use common color ranges Check the box if you want to use the default color range of the information element. Then exit the setup wizard by clicking Finish. • • Click Apply to add more information elements.

Set the number of rows. See below. all the information elements currently shown in the window will be taken from that device. regardless of earlier settings.) Columns Rows Font Mobile • To edit the contents of the status window. use the Cell Content tab. Status Windows Name Header Enter a new name if desired. Check if you want a header in the window. Click Browse and select a font.0 287 . If you choose a device in this box. (The contents of the header are defined on the Cell Content tab. (To pick individual information elements from a different device.Chapter 24.) Set the number of columns. NT12-2533 ver 1. select the Cell Content tab.

Then click Edit. except that it has an extra field for entering text: 288 . The dialog that appears is identical with the Add dialog in the setup wizard (see section 24.2 above).TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual • Double-click on a row and select an information element from the list.

4. To do this. you might want to show the same information element for several devices. All columns are then repeated once or twice in the window. then selecting the desired percentage of the current font size.5.0 289 . create new columns as needed on the Mode tab. Use the In and Out options to step the font size up and NT12-2533 ver 1. then select the desired number of column groups. 24. 24.Chapter 24. • Right-click in the status window and select Column Group from the context menu. Repeating Columns in Multiple Groups In status windows with a small number of columns (up to four). multiple column groups reduce or eliminate the need for vertical scrolling. Status Windows In a status window. you can optionally rearrange the data by dividing the rows into several groups (up to three) and displaying these groups side by side horizontally. This feature is handy when the default window layout has a large number of rows. Changing the Status Window Font Size You can adjust the font size in the status window by right-clicking in the window and selecting Zoom. and modify headers and insert information elements on the Cell Content tab.

expressed as a number of radio subframes (5 ms).e.0 User’s Manual down. rows represent timeslots. respectively. A repetition period p means that the DPCH is transmitted in every pth subframe.6.6. down arrow (yellow) = downlink. If a code straddles multiple columns. Repetition period: This is the DPCH repetition period on the downlink and uplink respectively. The arrow shows the direction of transmission: up arrow (blue) = uplink. if the code takes up m columns. and columns represent the leaves of the channelization code tree for the DPCH (i. • – – 290 . Non-standard Status Windows TD-SCDMA Physical Channel Monitor This window has a unique design and presents data on TD-SCDMA Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCHs). 24. • • In the top left corner is displayed the current Work UARFCN. The size of the window itself is not affected by these operations. the number of codes available when the maximum spreading factor is used). The numbers are to be read as follows: x  y = channelization code no. 24. this means that the spreading factor for that timeslot is reduced.1. In the grid. – A code in use in a timeslot is indicated by an entry in the corresponding row and column(s) in the grid. x out of the total number of channelization codes y in that timeslot (the latter being conditioned by the value of the spreading factor).TEMS Investigation 14. Specifically. the spreading factor is 16/m.

the interference signal code power for the timeslot. T-Add = –13 dB and T-Drop = –15 dB. Window Properties You can right-click in this window to select which devices to display data from.1.6. NT12-2533 ver 1. For the setup. CDMA Finger Info window with T-Add and T-Drop thresholds drawn as dashed vertical lines in the Energy column. 24. 24. In this case. i. Status Windows – Codes are colored according to the same rules as the information element “Timeslot ISCP (dBm)”.6.1. CDMA Finger Info This window indicates the T-Add and T-Drop thresholds by means of a window-specific feature.Chapter 24.2 (View tab). see section 24. as shown in the screenshot below. The color gray means that no valid ISCP measurement is available (which is always the case on the uplink).2.0 291 .e.

0 User’s Manual 25. To rename a tab. What events to show is user-configurable. 292 . In the Event Counter window provided under Presentation  Analysis. 25. This way it can be transferred to a spreadsheet application or other suitable program. right-click it to open its Properties dialog.4. To remove an existing tab. See section 25. Window Tabs Tabs are provided in this window to allow grouping of events into categories. Event Counter Windows An Event Counter window keeps track of the number of times a set of events have occurred. 25. right-click in the window and choose Remove Tab from the context menu. • • • To add a new tab.2. Copying Window Contents You can copy the entire contents of a tab in an Event Counter window to the Windows clipboard.1. right-click in the window and choose New Tab from the context menu. a number of tabs are preconfigured.1.TEMS Investigation 14.

1. which is user-editable.Chapter 25. Events Tab Here you choose which event types to display on the currently active tab (the tab from which you access the Properties dialog). Resetting Event Counter Windows The counters in an Event Counter window can be reset by the user at any time by right-clicking in the window and choosing Reset Event Counter Windows. 25. A Total column is also provided which adds up the number of events from all selected devices.4. Event Counter Windows • • Right-click the tab and choose Copy to Clipboard from the context menu.0 293 . The event counting in the window is done in a separate column for each selected device. This resets all counters in all open Event Counter windows. 25. Counters are reset automatically. General Tab On this tab you choose which devices to show events from. move the events you want to display to the Selected Events list box. 25.2. • Using the arrow buttons. NT12-2533 ver 1. • Changing Event Counter Window Contents and Properties Right-click in the Event Counter window and choose Properties from the context menu.3.4. The General tab also holds the window title. 25. Paste the copied selection into the desired application.4. in both drive testing mode and analysis mode: • • when a new logfile is opened when a logfile is closed.

The tab also holds the window title.1. They are also used to present events generated by TEMS Investigation.0 User’s Manual 26. Message Windows The message windows are used to list messages and reports received or transmitted by external devices (Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages. and error reports). 26. • Changing Message Window Contents and Properties To access the message window Properties dialog. mode reports.1. Preconfigured message windows are listed in Information Elements and Events.1. 26. MS and DC channels are distinguished. chapter 8. 294 .TEMS Investigation 14. General Tab On this tab you choose which devices to show messages from. right-click in the window and choose Properties. which is user-editable.

Any type of event can always be shown.0 295 . first move “Information Element” to the Selected Columns box. move the events you want to display to the Selected Events list box. then select this item and click Edit. Using the arrow buttons. Message Symbols: Arrow showing message direction. Message Name: Name of message or event. A new dialog now appears where you select what information element to display. regardless of the nature of the messages.1. • • • • • • • • Columns Tab Here you decide which columns to include in the message window: Equipment: The device that delivered the message. • Events Tab Here you choose which events to display in the message window. Event & Message Symbols: Event icon or arrow showing message direction (both types of symbol being placed in the same column). Message Info: Message or event information. you must select it on this tab in order for it to display in the message window. the checkbox next to the category is shaded gray.1. Messages Tab Here you choose which message categories to display in the window.1. The item Mode Reports  Sony Ericsson  Legacy Reports contains mode reports originating from certain older Sony Ericsson GSM phones that are no longer offered for sale with TEMS Investigation. Note that if you add a user-defined event (section 22. Mobile System: The wireless technology from which the message originates. Message Windows 26.3. Event Symbols: Event icon. 26. If at least one item in a category has been deselected.Chapter 26. 26. Information Element: Value of a user-selected information element.4. To select the element.2.3). The ready-made windows are preconfigured in this regard. NT12-2533 ver 1.

Plain-text Message Decoding In all message windows. if you double-click one Layer 3 message and then another.TEMS Investigation 14. To open a message in a new window. 26. However.5. Suppose. Protocol: The protocol to which the message belongs. 26. right-click again and choose Cancel Reload.10) are highlighted in red in the Layer 3 Messages window. one or more rows are selected (colored) in each message window. you can make the window catch up by right-clicking it and choosing Reload. right-click the message and choose New Detail Window. The new window now becomes the active one. Each message window normally reuses a single detail window. Further. Presentation of Discarded Messages Layer 3 messages (from certain Sony Ericsson phones) that have been discarded according to the settings on the phone property page (see section 21. that you just clicked somewhere in a line chart. For example.2. 26. To abort the reload procedure. Message Window Catch-up If you open a new message window when in drive testing mode.2. but its contents will not change any further. Message Window Synchronization When message windows synchronize with each other and with other presentation windows. you can double-click a message to open a new window detailing the contents of the message.4. the second message will replace the first in the Layer 3 detail window. 26.2.0 User’s Manual • • Time: Timestamp of message. when you have deactivated all external devices. the new window will not load any messages (for performance reasons). The old window will remain open. You can copy text from this window to the Windows clipboard by selecting the text. The message windows are then updated according to the following rules: 296 . then right-clicking in the window and choosing Copy from the context menu.3. for example. an explanatory string is added to the plain-text decoding of such messages.

If several rows match equally well (for example. The freeze affects only the message window you clicked in. all these rows are selected. If there is no such exact correspondence.7. the row or rows immediately preceding the user-selected item are selected and colored gray. Freezing a Message Window This section applies to drive testing mode only. that row alone will be selected. and its message flow is halted. searching. If the user-selected item and the message window selection belong to the same air interface message. Searching. You can unfreeze the window in any of the following ways: • • • by dragging its scroll bar by right-clicking the scroll bar and choosing Bottom by pressing the End key on the keyboard. Filtering Functions These are found under Show/Hide in the context menu.1. nothing is selected in the window. Filtering. NT12-2533 ver 1. and highlighting message window contents are available from the message window context menu. You can freeze a message window by clicking an arbitrary message. and Highlighting in Message Windows A number of functions for filtering.0 297 . the message window selection is colored blue. a message and one or several events triggered by that message). 26. 26. Message Windows • If one message window row matches the user-selected item better than any other. (If no such rows exist.7. not any other windows.6.Chapter 26. The window will then stop updating.) • 26.

26.7. Search again: Repeats the search last performed in the Message Search dialog. hiding all messages with the same log code/name as the selected message.0 User’s Manual • • • Show only messages of this type: Reloads window contents to show only messages with the same log code/name as the selected message.2. Find next message of this type: Finds the next message of the same type as the one selected (going forward in time). Hide messages of this type: Reloads window contents. Search for message: Opens a dialog Message Search which is explained below.TEMS Investigation 14. 298 . Find previous message of this type: Finds the previous message of the same type as the one selected (going backward in time). Undo: Undoes a “show only” or “hide” command that is currently in force and reverts to unfiltered presentation. • • • • Search Functions These are found under Search in the context menu.

Match case Match whole word Search up Also search message contents • Click Find Next (or press the right arrow key) to go to the next message matching the search criteria. “UL” matches “ULDCCH” but not “Scheduling”. Only match items where the search string occurs as a whole word. a dropdown is continuously updated with matching message names. from which you can optionally make a selection. For example.Chapter 26. Message Windows Message Search Dialog Find what String to match in message header (and also in its contents. Also look for matches in (plain-text decoded) the message contents.0 299 . if the Also search message contents option is checked). By default only the message header is searched. The latter is the default. Search backward (up) instead of forward (down) in the message flow.7. This action is equivalent to the Search again command on the context menu. Only match items with casing that exactly matches the search string. NT12-2533 ver 1. Highlighting Functions These are found under Highlight in the context menu. As you type text in this field.3. 26.

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

Color bars: Select a color in which to highlight all messages of the same type as the selected message. Multiple highlights can be applied, with different colors representing different message types. See the example below. None: Removes the highlighting (if any) for all messages of the selected type.

26.8.
26.8.1.

Window-specific Features
Mode Reports Window

In the General window, under WCDMA, you can adjust the updating frequency (in the TEMS Investigation application) for List Search reports from Qualcomm-based terminals.

300

Chapter 27. Video Streaming and the Video Monitor

27.

Video Streaming and the Video Monitor

TEMS Investigation supports streaming of video recordings through UMTS and CDMA phones. The application is equipped with a built-in streaming video client which has been designed to imitate as closely as possible the corresponding client software found in phones. The application supports both on-demand streaming, where a video clip of known length is downloaded, and various forms of live streaming (such as tapping into a live stream or repeating playlist delivered by a streaming server), where the duration of the streaming session is specified by the user.

27.1.

How to Test Video Streaming

To test the video streaming service, you need a phone capable of handling this service. All UMTS phones sold with TEMS Investigation 14.0 possess this capability. The mechanics of setting up and conducting a streaming session are handled by the Streaming activity in scripts: see section 20.16.5.4. Video clips suitable for testing are supplied on the installation CD in the subdirectory Video Clips. A readme file in this directory explains the file name syntax used and gives reference VSQI values obtained for these video clips in clean conditions. If you are using files of your own for testing streaming, the file names should contain a numeric value followed by “kbps”. This value should indicate the bit rate of the stream (video + audio), not counting overhead. If multiple numeric values are given in the file name, the first is used. If the file name does not contain a numeric value, the VSQI algorithm (see chapter 40) will use a bit rate value received from the server, but the VSQI score will then be less accurate.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

301

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

27.2.

The Video Monitor

To display the streamed video clip, you use the Video Monitor window:

Only one instance of the Video Monitor can be open, so only one video stream can be replayed at a time. (On the other hand, it is perfectly possible to do streaming with several phones simultaneously and monitor information elements and events for all these sessions in other presentation windows.)

27.2.1.

Properties of the Video Monitor

Right-click in the Video Monitor to access its Properties dialog:

Device Enable audio

Here you select the device that delivers the video stream. Check this box to play the streamed audio through the PC speakers.

302

Chapter 27. Video Streaming and the Video Monitor

27.3.

Evaluating Video Streaming Performance

Throughput and other performance measures for video streaming are presented in the “Streaming” information elements belonging to the Data category. See Information Elements and Events, section 3.8. Data on which video streaming KPIs are based is delivered in the form of KPI events; see Information Elements and Events, section 7.4. Some of these data items deserve special comment: • Information element Streaming Packet Loss: Packet loss is of particular interest for streaming, since the received signal is presented in real time in TEMS Investigation. Information element Streaming VSQI and events Streaming Quality VSQI, Streaming Intermediate VSQI: VSQI (Video Streaming Quality Index) is a quality measure developed specifically for estimating the viewerperceived video and audio quality of a video streaming session. It is described in more detail in chapter 40. VSQI is also the subject of a technical paper which includes general discussions of video streaming as well as video quality measurement. This paper, “Video Streaming Quality Measurement with VSQI”, is found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. Information element Streaming MTQI and event Streaming Quality MTQI: MTQI (Mobile TV Quality Index) is a refinement of VSQI which is discussed in chapter 41. It appraises video quality only. Event Streaming State: This event is provided for monitoring the activities of the streaming video client.

27.4.
• •

Troubleshooting Video Streaming

UDP ports for video streaming must be free. See the Getting Started Manual, section 8.2.8. Testing of video streaming with TEMS Investigation requires that RTP/ UDP traffic can be run with the phone used as modem. The function cannot be used if RTP or UDP traffic to and from the Internet is blocked (intentionally by the operator, or for whatever reason). For close-up scrutiny and troubleshooting of the video streaming service, you can monitor the message traffic over the RTP, RTSP, and RTCP protocols in the IP Protocol Reports window. See Information Elements and Events, section 8.8.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

303

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

28.

The GPS Window

This window shows data from the GPS unit. If several GPS units have been detected by TEMS Investigation, the window shows data from the one currently selected as “Preferred” (see section 8.5). Exactly what data is displayed depends on the type of GPS; below is an example:

The fix source is one of the following: • • • • • • • • • 2D 2D with DGPS (Differential GPS) 2D: SPS Mode (Standard Positioning Service) 2D: PPS Mode (Precise Positioning Service) 3D 3D with DGPS 3D: SPS Mode 3D: PPS Mode DR (Dead Reckoning)

28.1.

Changing GPS Window Properties

The GPS window can be configured to show only the parameters that interest you:

304

Chapter 28. The GPS Window

Units Tab Speed Altitude View Tab Basic Check to show the latitude, longitude, altitude and speed of the GPS unit, the fix source, and the number of satellites seen. Check to show the direction of travel, graphically and numerically, in degrees clockwise from north. Check to also plot samples whose position is labeled as invalid by the GPS unit. 1 Choose km/h or mph. Choose meters or feet.

Heading Show invalid positions

1. This option exists to allow presentation of positions incorrectly regarded by the GPS as invalid.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

305

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

29.

Line Charts

In line charts you can plot numeric information elements in order to visualize how their values evolve over time. Line charts can also present events. Preconfigured line charts are listed in Information Elements and Events, chapter 8.

29.1.

Organization of the Line Chart Window

Chart pane

Chart pane

Legend pane

Additional Information pane

Y-axis pane

The Line Chart is subdivided into the following panes: • • one or several Chart panes, containing the charts themselves a Y-axis pane for each chart, showing the scales for the plotted information elements

306

Chapter 29. Line Charts

• •

a Legend pane, describing the nature and origin of the information elements shown, and indicating their values at a single point in time an Additional Information pane, displaying arbitrary information elements in textual format.

A maximum of four charts can be accommodated, along with their associated Y-axis panes. The legend can only gloss one chart at a time. The relative sizes of the panes can be freely adjusted by dragging the interior frame handles.

29.2.

Contents of the Line Chart Panes

The Chart Pane The information elements that can be plotted in a line chart are chiefly measurements of physical quantities. The plotting can be done either as a curve or in the form of successive vertical bars. Events are indicated by thin vertical lines accompanied by a symbol identifying the event type. The symbols used for predefined events are given in Information Elements and Events, chapter 7. To see the names of the events, open an Events window. The Chart pane is synchronized with the Legend and Additional Information panes (as well as with all other open presentation windows, as explained in section 23.4). During logfile analysis, clicking in the Chart pane displays details on the selected time instant in the two text panes. You can also move backwards and forwards in a logfiles segment with the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard. In the chart, a thick vertical line indicates the point in time currently selected in the presentation. Scrolling the chart by means of the scroll bar does not change the time instant selected, so neither the text panes nor other presentation windows will be updated. To select a new point in time, just click in the chart. While recording, you can freeze the line chart by clicking the Hold button. Clicking the button once more (now labeled Release) makes the chart catch up with the presentation in the other windows.

NT12-2533 ver 1.0

307

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual

The Y-axis Pane The Y-axis pane associated with a chart shows the scales of the information elements plotted there. Each scale is drawn in the same color as the information element, except when several elements share the same scale, in which case the scale is black. If the pane is too narrow to show all scales at once, you can scroll between scales using the arrow buttons. The scales can be changed; see section 29.4.3 (“Upper visible limit”, etc.). The Legend Pane In the legend full details are provided (for one chart at a time) on the information elements plotted for the currently selected time instant. At the extreme left in the legend, the color coding of the chart is explained. Parameters (SC/BSIC, [U]ARFCN, PN) associated with elements are given in columns of their own wherever possible. To focus the legend on a different chart, right-click anywhere in the Line Chart window and choose the desired Legend Chart item from the context menu. The Additional Information Pane This is a sort of status window where an arbitrary set of information elements can be displayed (for example, elements which cannot be plotted). You can choose different contents in this pane for different charts, as described in section 29.4 under Additional Information Tab. However, as long as contents have only been defined for one single chart, this data will be shown in the pane regardless of which chart the legend currently refers to.

29.3.

Time Scale

The horizontal axis of the line chart does not have an exact time scale, and so is not labeled with a unit of time. However, as a rule of thumb, two points are plotted each second both in idle and dedicated mode. If the phone spends some time in GSM no service mode, there will be a gap in the chart to show this, but the length of this gap might not be equivalent to the period of time with no service.

308

Click Edit Chart.4. • • Editing the Contents of a Chart Select the chart you want to edit in the list box. click Add Chart.4.1. This dialog appears: NT12-2533 ver 1. Adding Charts • To add a new chart in the Line Chart window. 29. Changing Line Chart Contents and Properties To edit the contents of the line chart and their presentation. right-click anywhere in the Line Chart window and choose Properties.2. 29.Chapter 29.4.3.4. you can edit the line chart window name and deselect the horizontal grid lines which by default are drawn in the background. Editing General Properties of a Chart On the General tab of the Line Chart Properties dialog.0 309 . Line Charts 29. 29.

If you move the same element to Selected IEs again. 310 . Using the arrow buttons. chapter 2. it is taken from the same device as before. the element is taken from the next device. and the like cannot be plotted.g. From elements with an argument the value with the lowest argument is picked. and the value with the next higher argument is shown. A maximum of seven elements can be presented. See Information Elements and Events. signal strength). one of two things will happen: • • if the element has an argument. for the Line Chart template it is MS1). The first time you move an information element to Selected IEs. You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to select multiple items in the boxes.TEMS Investigation 14. timeslot indicators. Flags. otherwise. The information elements that can be plotted are chiefly those that represent or are derived from measured physical quantities (e. scrambling code indices. move the elements you want to present from the Available IEs to the Selected IEs list box.0 User’s Manual Information Elements Tab Here you edit the set of information elements to plot and how to present them. it will be picked from the device the line chart is drawn for (see the title bar. frequency and channel numbers. • • First select information element category in the System combo box.

Color: Fixed NT12-2533 ver 1. the neighbor ranking) changes. neighbors. This is done by clicking the Edit IE button. tightly packed vertical bars. scanned channels). As far as possible. the MS and argument can also be edited directly at any time. Line Charts Naturally. Choose this if you want the element to be plotted as successive. and consists simply in your selecting one fixed color yourself. The point of this is to ensure that you can easily see when the sort order of the list (e. one and the same color is used throughout for a given channel. If it is chosen. This option is available for all elements.0 311 .g.g. See section 29. In the ensuing dialog you also customize the presentation of the information element: Mobile The device to pick the information element from. This option is available only for elements made up of sorted channel lists (e. IE Argument Style: Bar Style: Line Color: Assigned to channel The argument (if any) of the information element. Note that it is possible to change the device for all chosen elements at once. You can adjust the line width.Chapter 29. the application automatically assigns a color on the basis of what channel is shown.4.4. Choose this if you want the element to be plotted as a line.

the limit is automatically changed for all other arguments as well. If you move the same element to Selected Events again. this setting adjusts the range in the Y-axis pane. the plot color turns deeper when the phone enters dedicated mode. move the event you want to present to the Selected Events list box. Clicking the Edit Event button pops up the following dialog: Mobile Symbol The device to pick the event from. it will be picked from the device the line chart is drawn for (see the title bar).) Lower visible limit for IE Draw threshold line at Change color in dedicated mode Events Tab Here you decide which events should appear in the line chart presentation. For complex information elements.0 User’s Manual Upper visible limit for IE Upper limit of the value range shown for this information element. This setting works the same way as Upper visible limit for IE. 312 . If you check this box. it is taken from the next device. The image file used to label the vertical line indicating the event. Check this if you want to compare the plotted values with a threshold line drawn at a specified value. • Using the arrow buttons. (The dedicated mode color is not usercustomizable. The first time you move an element to Selected Events.TEMS Investigation 14. That is. Lower limit of the value range shown for this information element. and the brighter color chosen in the Color box is reserved for idle mode.

4. Presenting Data from a Different Device If you want to present the same data as before in a chart but from a different device. • Deleting a Chart In the Line Chart Properties dialog. (The information elements and events selected in the charts will be unchanged. Exporting the Line Chart Window The line chart window can be exported separately to a file with extension .0 313 . A shortcut is therefore provided for this operation. From the context menu.7.Chapter 29.4.5. • Right-click in the Line Chart window.4.3. See section 23. Line Charts Additional Information Tab Here you choose the information elements to view in the Additional Information pane. Clicking the Edit IE button in this case only enables you to change the device and argument. 29. 29.4. it is impractical to edit the MS field for each information element separately as described in section 29. since the additional information is presented only as text and not graphically.lch. except that here any information element can be selected. choose Change MS: • For each chart.5. NT12-2533 ver 1. select the chart you want to delete and click the Delete Chart button.) 29. This tab works exactly like the Information Elements tab. select the device to pick data from.

but the chart itself is generic and can present any measurement data. One of these is a parallel coordinates presentation. The bar chart is especially suited to the presentation of frequency scans. chapter 8. Bar Charts Bar charts are used to view successive snapshots in time of a selected set of information elements. Preconfigured bar charts are listed in Information Elements and Events. 314 .0 User’s Manual 30. The bar chart has a number of presentation modes. which is strictly speaking a different means of visualization but is integrated into the bar chart window.TEMS Investigation 14.

showing the scales for the displayed information elements a Legend pane.Chapter 30. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 315 . describing the nature and origin of the information elements shown. and indicating their current values an Additional Information pane. displaying arbitrary information elements in textual format. The legend can only gloss one chart at a time.1. containing the charts themselves a X-axis pane. Organization of the Bar Chart Window Chart pane X-axis pane Legend pane Additional Information pane Y-axis pane The bar chart is subdivided into the following panes: • • • • • one or several Chart panes. Bar Charts 30. The relative sizes of the panes can be freely adjusted by dragging the interior frame handles. A maximum of four charts can be accommodated. displaying labels for the bars drawn a Y-axis pane for each chart. along with their associated Y-axis panes.

as explained in section 23.4.0 User’s Manual 30. The Chart pane is synchronized with the Legend and Additional Information panes. If the pane is too narrow to show all scales at once. To reset the max and min indicators. for instance. just click once more on the bar.g. The Legend Pane In the legend full details are provided (for one chart at a time) on the information elements displayed in that chart.2. see. To refocus the legend on a different chart. except when several elements share the same scale. which will from then on keep track of the maximum and minimum values assumed by this parameter since the bar was clicked. the color coding of the chart is explained. one indicating transmit power).TEMS Investigation 14. Clicking a bar displays max and min indicators. The value range visible on the y-axis can be changed. 316 . The X-axis Pane The X-axis pane provides labels for the data distributed on the x-axis (for one chart at a time). as well as with all other open presentation windows. but they can also show the value of an information element or consist of arbitrary text.4. you can scroll between scales using the arrow buttons. The Y-axis Pane Along the y-axis of a chart are shown the scales of the information elements plotted there.1 (Visible limit for IE). By default the labels are simply consecutive numbers.1. At the extreme left in the legend. in which case the scale is black.4. The (U)ARFCN and SC/BSIC are left out if they are not directly relevant to an element (e. See section 30.2. Each scale is drawn in the same color as the information element. section 30. Contents of the Bar Chart Panes The Chart Pane The information elements that can be plotted in a bar chart are chiefly measurements of physical quantities. just click in that chart.

• Deleting a Chart To delete a chart: In the Bar Chart Properties dialog.Chapter 30.3. You can choose different contents in this pane for different charts. 30.2. as described in section 30.3. Setting Up General Bar Chart Properties To set up some general properties of the bar chart and its presentation. NT12-2533 ver 1. Bar Charts The Additional Information Pane This is a sort of status window where an arbitrary set of information elements can be displayed (for example. 30. rightclick anywhere in the bar chart window and choose Properties.3.1.4.3. select the chart you want to delete and click the Delete button.0 317 . elements which cannot be drawn in a bar chart). Adding Charts To add a new chart in the bar chart window: • Click Add. 30.

• • Setting Up Bar Chart Contents In the Bar Chart Properties dialog. You will now work through a sequence of three dialogs.0 User’s Manual 30. In doing so you specify 1. and how to label it 3. Click Edit.4.5. select the chart you want to set up in the list box. The procedures are gone through in detail in sections 30. you can edit the bar chart window name and specify that horizontal grid lines should be drawn in the background.3. Editing General Properties of a Chart On the General tab of the Bar Chart Properties dialog.3. what data to plot in the chart. The first dialog that appears is this: 318 .4.1–30. and how to present it 2. Examples of bar chart presentations are found in section 30.4. what data to display in the Additional Information pane.3.TEMS Investigation 14. what interval to show on the x-axis. 30.

Data. Colors: You can always keep the default color range for the information elements. or a set of components of complex information elements.) The default color range is defined in the Navigator and is dependent on the information element value (see section 5. Flags. signal strength. The information elements that can be displayed are chiefly those that represent or are derived from measured physical quantities (e.0 319 . Colors In this step you select the following (full details on subsequent pages): • Presentation mode. Besides. channel numbers. Bar Charts 30. fixed.4.g. quality measures). These fundamental presentation modes are offered: – – – • Bar chart: Single IE with multiple components Bar chart: Components from multiple IEs (fixed set) Parallel coordinates presentation/Stacked bar chart Data: One or several information elements. The bar chart is very flexible in that it can be configured in a variety of ways. Presentation Mode. there is one other option: either to define your own colors for use in the bar chart. • NT12-2533 ver 1.3). window-specific colors. and the like cannot be displayed. are chosen. timeslot indicators. or to use predefined. (Which choice is available depends on the presentation mode.1.Chapter 30.

4. Click Choose IE to select an information element: The item contained in each element indicates what the visible range of the element will be in the bar chart. and whether the scale will be flipped with the lowest value at the top. one which consists of several components. i.1.TEMS Investigation 14. by making it dependent on another (suitably chosen) information element: see section 30. 320 . • • In the Edit Chart dialog.1. Single IE Presentation Mode In this mode a single information element is displayed.e. By default this range is equal to the native range of the element (as stated in the Range/Unit column in Information Elements and Events). select Bar chart: Single IE with multiple components.0 User’s Manual 30. The element must be one with arguments.4. Max The visible range of the information element. If you want to change these settings: • Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): Visible limit for IE: Min. It is possible to dynamically adjust the number of components to show.2.

This dialog appears: • • NT12-2533 ver 1. For an example of a Single IE presentation. Otherwise. • • • Make your changes. Define one fixed color to be used throughout in this chart. To do this. Bar Charts MS Flip scale The device from which to pick the information element. To keep the default colors. Click Choose IEs to select your data. uncheck it. see section 30. check the Use common colors box. Back in the Edit Chart dialog. To this end. 30. You will then be prompted to define colors later on. • Now click Next to proceed to the next step.1.0 321 . uncheck Use common colors and select a color in the box next to the information element. decide what colors should be used in the chart.2. Select Bar chart: Multiple IE components (fixed set). check the Use common colors box in the Edit Chart dialog. You have two options: – – Keep the default color range for the information element. Check this if you want to flip the y-axis for this information element so that the lowest value is at the top and the highest at the bottom.5. then click OK. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog.Chapter 30. disregarding the default color range. Multiple IE Components Presentation Mode This mode displays an arbitrary fixed set of information element components. To set up this presentation. proceed as follows: • First decide whether you want to use the default color ranges of the information elements or define a fixed color for each element.4.

the Choose Information Element dialog appears: • Select an information element. In either case.e. • To specify the data that should be represented by a bar (i. depending on the type of bar chart concerned (template or predefined. in the relevant table row. For each index you select one piece of data: an information element with no arguments. a varying number of information elements may already be listed. 322 . A new row will then be inserted at the bottom of the table once the contents of the bar have been specified. an index on the x-axis).). If you have checked Use common colors. the Color column will be absent from this dialog. click the button in the IE column. To add a new bar.0 User’s Manual Here. click the Add button.TEMS Investigation 14. or one component of an element having arguments. etc.

The standard Windows color dialog appears. you are now prompted to define a color for this data item. select the corresponding rows in the table. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog.1.5. If you have unchecked Use common colors. and click Remove. Pick a color and click OK. If the information element is one with arguments. as described for the Single IE presentation mode (see section 30. Click OK to exit the Edit IE dialog. To the IE for Fixed Layout dialog is now added the data item and color defined for the selected index. The indices of the removed rows disappear from the table. Click Next to proceed to the next step. pick an argument.Chapter 30. • • For an example of a Multiple IE Components presentation. The table will look something like this: • To remove items from the bar chart. When you are done specifying the bar chart contents.0 323 .1). see section 30. click OK to return to the Edit Chart dialog. Bar Charts • Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): • • • • • Specify range and scale properties. but when you exit the dialog all items will be renumbered starting at 1. You can select all rows with Ctrl + A.4. NT12-2533 ver 1.

and arguments are displayed in the y-direction. this arrangement may be reversed (one bar for each argument. Each information element may have arguments.3. It has the following fundamental properties: • • A set of information elements is shown. • In the stacked bar chart.1.4. Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart Presentation Mode This presentation mode is the most complex one. at a fixed x-axis coordinate.TEMS Investigation 14. The information elements are distributed on the x-axis. The parallel coordinates presentation does not use bars and is thus not a bar chart in the literal sense. it plots all components of each information element on the y-axis. information elements stacked).0 User’s Manual 30. and an arbitrary number of components of each element may be shown at the same time. one composite bar is drawn for each information element. and connects with a line each set of components that have the same argument: arg 0 arg 1 arg 2 IEs 324 . all its components being stacked on top of each other: arg 2 arg 1 arg 0 IEs Optionally. Rather. There are two graphical representations of the above (conceptually quite distinct): a stacked bar chart and a parallel coordinates presentation.

rather than information elements. This dialog appears: Here. Selecting Data After deciding the basic properties of the presentation: • Click Choose IEs to select your data. depending on the type of bar chart concerned (template or predefined. arguments stacked. etc.0 325 . such a presentation is possible but hardly has any natural interpretation within the TEMS Investigation framework. Setting Up Basic Properties of the Presentation To set up this presentation. make these settings: Do not uncheck IEs on x-axis.). a varying number of information elements may already be listed.Chapter 30. check the Stacked bar chart box: • Uncheck IEs on x-axis. arguments stacked if you want to reverse the roles of the axes so that arguments. If you want a stacked bar chart instead. Bar Charts The parallel coordinates presentation is selected by default in this mode. are distributed on the x-axis. proceed as follows: • Select Parallel coordinates (default) / Stacked bar chart. If you want a parallel coordinates presentation. NT12-2533 ver 1.

click Add. 326 . despite the fact that the bar segments (except the bottom one) will be displaced in relation to the scale bar. the Choose Information Element dialog appears.TEMS Investigation 14.1). • • Click OK to exit the Edit IE dialog.1. Note: The y-axis scales look the same also for stacked bar charts. click the corresponding button. To add a new information element.4. Click OK in the Choose Information Element dialog. In either case. as described for the Single IE presentation mode (see section 30. A new row will then be inserted at the bottom of the table once the details have been specified.0 User’s Manual • To specify the details of how an information element should be presented. Double-click the item (or click the Edit button): • Specify range and scale properties. • • Select an information element.

0 327 . . To this end. NT12-2533 ver 1. select the corresponding rows in the table and click Remove. you need to decide what colors should be used in the chart. but when you exit the dialog all items will be renumbered starting at 1. see section 30. Click Next to proceed to the next step. For example: • To remove information elements from the bar chart. You have two options: • • Keep the default color ranges for the information elements. • Finally.. The indices of the removed rows disappear from the table. You can select all rows with Ctrl + A. The colors are chosen by the application and cannot be edited. When you are done: • For an example of a Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart presentation. When you are done specifying the bar chart contents. dialog is now added the data item defined for the selected index. Coord.Chapter 30. one for each argument. Use fixed colors.5.. check the Use common colors box. Bar Charts To the IEs for Par. Choose this option by unchecking Use common colors. click OK to return to the Edit Chart dialog.

Interval The interval selected here governs what portion of the x-axis will be visible in the bar chart. Interval and Labeling In this step you take care of the following: • • Indicating the interval to show on the x-axis. e. (Optional) Specifying text labels on the x-axis instead of the default numeric indices. it may be a good idea to have the interval governed by Scanned Channels No Of. and only such elements are selectable. Example: If you want to display scan data. • Choose Fixed to set an unchanging interval.2. Choose Set by IE to have the interval dynamically governed by an information element.0 User’s Manual 30. Note that this is done independently of the data selected in the preceding step.g. Then the number of indices on the axis will always be • 328 . Scanned RxLev. so that accepting the defaults will cause all data to be shown. The default values in the boxes are dependent on the data selected in the previous step. This element must denote the current number of something in order to make sense.TEMS Investigation 14.4.

. There are two options: • 30. This dialog works like the Information Elements tab in the line chart properties (see section 29. Example: If you want to display data on neighbors. Note: The Set by IE option is disabled for the Multiple IE Components presentation. since this by itself stipulates a fixed number of x-axis indices. check Text labels on axis. Click the Compose button. Additional Information Here you choose the information elements to view in the Additional Information pane. A dialog appears where you enter a string for each index.4. it is impractical to edit the MS field for each information element NT12-2533 ver 1.3).4.0 329 .Chapter 30. found in the information element Neighbor Cell Name.3. Select Text strings from IE to pick labels from a text-format information element. ..4. Select User-defined text labels to specify arbitrary text as labels. and the space available in the chart will be fully utilized at all times. Presenting Data from a Different Device If you want to present the same data as before in a chart but from a different device. Alternatively. either those given under Fixed or the arguments of the information element chosen under Set by IE. • • any information element can be selected clicking the Edit IE button only enables you to change the device and argument. Bar Charts equal to the number of channels currently scanned. the bar width being adapted continuously. 30.4. you might want to label the x-axis with the neighbor cell names. Labeling By default the x-axis is labeled simply with numbers. • • To enable user-defined text labels. but since the additional information is presented only as text and not graphically. you can replace the numbering with text labels.

Single IE Single IE presentation: Neighbor RxLev (Sorted).5. there is a shortcut for this operation. select the device to pick data from. From the context menu.1.4. 330 .TEMS Investigation 14. (The information elements selected in the charts will be unchanged. • Right-click in the bar chart window.) 30. Therefore. choose Change MS: • For each chart. Examples of Bar Chart Presentations Here are a couple of examples of how the presentation modes can be used.1.0 User’s Manual separately as described in section 30.

Note that only half of the legend is visible in the picture. and with user-defined text labels added on the x-axis. Bar Charts Multiple IE Components Multiple IE Components presentation displaying an assortment of single-value IEs and selected components of multivalue IEs.Chapter 30.0 331 . NT12-2533 ver 1.

any unexpected line shape).bch.0 User’s Manual Stacked Bar Chart. Each point on the horizontal axis represents a network parameter. Parallel Coordinates Parallel coordinates presentation (the predefined Radio Parameters Parallel Bar Chart for WCDMA).TEMS Investigation 14. represents a moment in time. and the colored line. Exporting the Bar Chart Window The bar chart window can be exported separately to a file with extension .7. connecting a set of parameter values. 332 . See section 23. This arrangement allows the user to spot instantaneously any pattern that is out of the ordinary (that is. 30.6.

Then you can proceed to set up what data you want to present on the map. are central: • • First. The concepts are explained again as they are brought up later in the chapter. and you might not have use for all of it. A map of the world is provided with the installation. If you have loaded a cell file and want to view cell information. You might want to skim this section the first time around to make yourself familiar with the concepts. How to do this is explained in section 31. use this section as a reference.5.0 333 . numeric values can also be easily accessed.2. Map windows are fully user-configurable. 31. Map A map is a set of geographical features which are treated as a unit.1.5. turn to section 31. you must work through some preliminaries which are described in sections 31. A map usually consists of several map layers (see Layer) and is presented in a Map window. events. or uncompressed TIF format.Chapter 31. to be able to use a map file in TEMS Investigation. The following sections. Highlights of This Chapter This chapter contains a great deal of information.5. Map Windows Map windows are used to display a map of your testing area and present your drive test route graphically on this map. Map Concepts In this section. Data on cells. TEMS Investigation must have access to positioning data.4. 31. Note also that to be able to plot measurements on a map. some central concepts relating to Map windows are defined. Like the other presentation windows. NT12-2533 ver 1.3–31. however. Map files used in TEMS Investigation must be in MapInfo. and information elements are shown along the route in symbolic form. Map Windows 31. bitmap.

bitmap. which contain information relating to the cellular network. One presentation layer is predefined for each main type of theme. zoom levels.1. you should construct a GeoSet file for it to be able to save changes to the map later on.TEMS Investigation 14. 31.0 User’s Manual TEMS Investigation supports the following map formats: MapInfo. colors. . . which make up the map itself. A presentation layer contains one or several themes. GeoSet A GeoSet (file extension . Constructing a GeoSet from Map Files A Map window in TEMS Investigation works with a GeoSet instead of an ordinary workspace. These files are from now on collectively referred to as TAB files. Additional layers can be defined by the user.3. A map layer may.id. This file can then be opened in a Map window.ind. for example. etc. Each layer is stored in five different files with the extensions . a further layer is provided for pinpoint markers (see section 11. labels.3). and . and presentation layers. all of the same main type (see Theme below).gst) is a special type of workspace used for map layers.map. Label A label is a text string that belongs to a map and can be displayed on it. for example. projections. There are two types of layer: map layers. Layer A layer is a set of data from a particular category which is displayed in a Map window. and TIF (uncompressed only). 334 . displaying. If you have a new map that you want to use in TEMS Investigation.dat. A GeoSet contains settings regarding layer order. an information element or a type of event. consist of all the roads or all the water areas on the map. Theme A theme is a component of a presentation layer.tab. If your map is in MapInfo format. it consists of a number of map layers and a workspace which ties them together. .

Chapter 31. but then any changes made using the Layer Control will be lost. The GeoSet file must be in the same directory as the TAB files.7. Choose File  Save GeoSet. If possible. • Copy the map’s TAB files to your map directory.bmp). Choose File  Exit to close the GeoSet Manager. avoid using 24-bit bitmap images as maps. Click Open Map Files.5. All the selected layers are added to the Layer Control. This will save your new GeoSet file under the name you entered in the GeoSet Name edit box. The map is now displayed with all its layers. you must generate TAB files for it. You are ready to start presenting data: see section 31. Click Save. On the Map window toolbar. • Name your new GeoSet in the edit box of the toolbar. Note: The GeoSet Manager will ask you to open a GeoSet.2. you can construct a GeoSet. Once you have your TAB files. Click Layer Control. You are prompted to name the GeoSet. NT12-2533 ver 1.0 335 . click the Start GeoSet Manager button. • The map should now be displayed in the Map window. Click Cancel to ignore this. Click OK. • • • • • Click Add. Note: It is possible to load TAB files in a Map window directly. See section 31. Select the TAB files you copied to your map directory and click Open. Map Windows If your map is in bitmap format (extension . without constructing a GeoSet. • Select your newly created GeoSet file and click Open.4. This is done by positioning the map as described in section 31.

enter the coordinates (in decimal degrees) of the point you wish to use. 31. • In the Distance section. Positioning Bitmap and TIF Maps If you open a map in bitmap or uncompressed TIF format that has not yet been assigned geographical coordinates and scale information.1. Click the Pick button in the Reference Point section.2. Specifying the Map Scale In this step you indicate the distance between some two points on the map. On the map. click the point that has the given coordinates. in the Latitude and Longitude fields. 31.4. • • • Specifying the Map Position In this step you input the coordinates of a point on the map.4.4. In the Reference Point section. you must supply this data yourself.TEMS Investigation 14. 336 . Click Position Map. click the Pick button. so that the map scale can be calculated.0 User’s Manual 31.

a dashed blue line appears. Click OK. to get started with presenting data. enter 90°.5.Chapter 31. Presenting Data: Themes This section describes how to present cellular network data on the map.5. For example. presenting an event. 31.5. • Your map is now positioned. The *. 31. presenting a set of information elements (at most three). • 31. in order to present data. enter the actual distance between the two points. The coordinates of the chosen points appear in the X_Y fields. click the first point and keep the mouse button down. Therefore. each presenting a different kind of data: • • information element (IE) themes. • Setting the Map’s North Direction What remains is to indicate the north direction of the map. Release the mouse button at the second point. Map Windows • On the map. a positive number indicating a clockwise offset. see section 31. you can also modify presentation layers and create new ones. in the North Offset Angle field. In short. In the Distance field. see section 31. The offset lies between –180° and +180°.tab is created. you do not need to worry about handling presentation layers. How to do this is described in section 31.3 event themes. all your work is to do with themes and is covered in the present section.3.4.7.tab file is the map file you will use from now on. if the map is oriented with north pointing up. enter the offset between the map’s x-axis and its direction of north.5. you use presentation layers and fill these with themes. A file with the same name as the image but with the extension .0 337 .1. Themes and Theme Types A theme is basically a bundle of settings describing how to present a set of data. When you move the mouse. A set of presentation layers is already supplied in the application. These are the main types of theme.4 NT12-2533 ver 1. In the Direction section. However.

Click Add/Edit Themes to view the current presentation layers and the themes within them. How to manipulate layers is the subject of section 31. the Pinpoint theme. see section 31.5. 31. see section 31. as is seen in this screenshot (where some layers have been expanded). Certain presentation layers are predefined. 338 . along with a number of themes.5.2.0 User’s Manual • • cell themes.5. you always put it in a presentation layer.7. RF Quality. Presentation Layers When you create a theme. The various types of theme are put in different layers: • • • • IE themes in the Coverage. You can add new presentation layers if desired. presenting pinpointing information.5. presenting cell information.TEMS Investigation 14. There are several subtypes of cell theme. and AMR layers event themes in the Event layer cell themes in the Cell layer the pinpoint theme in the Pinpoint layer.6.

It is not possible to define these attributes differently in the map. select one of the layers (or create a new layer to put the theme in: see section 31. Map Windows 31. Presenting Information Elements To present information elements.Chapter 31.3. The colors. dedicated mode. These govern the appearance of a marker that is plotted on the map. as set on the Info Element tab of the Navigator: see section 5. By varying its color. sizes. the marker can code the values of up to three numeric information elements. it is appropriate to use the color and size attributes for information elements with a continuous value range. To create a new IE theme: • • In the Theme Settings dialog. and so on: More generally. and use different symbols when the phone is in idle mode. you create information element themes (hereafter called IE themes). and symbols used in the map are always the default ones for each information element.5.0 339 .3.7). For example. you can have the marker color governed by RxLev and the marker size by RxQual. and to use a suite of symbols for such things as status parameters having a small set of possible values. and shape. size. Click Add Theme: NT12-2533 ver 1.

chapter 2. and select an argument if applicable. of course. Color • Size In this section you specify a rule for the theme marker size. Select an element.TEMS Investigation 14. This setting decides how far from its true position on the map the theme marker will be drawn. 340 . See above. This means. a positive offset is to the right relative to the direction of travel. Choose the device from which to pick the information element. In this section you specify a rule for the theme marker color: • Choose Range to have the color governed by an information element. that the color will not carry any information. Using offsets enables you to display several routes side by side.0 User’s Manual System Mobile Offset (pixels) Choose an information element category. See Information Elements and Events. in the same way as for the color. The offset direction is at right angles to the direction of travel. Choose Fixed to use a fixed color.

for instance circles. will then be plotted along the route at the shortest possible time intervals (about factors influencing this updating rate. see section 31. Uniform markers. when the phone switches to a different RAB). and not for showing measurement data. Map Windows Symbol In this section you specify a rule for choosing the shape of the theme marker. 31. Arrival of new measurement data. Another basic fact to keep in mind is that the position of a theme marker does not necessarily correspond exactly to a pair of GPS or pinpointing coordinates. positions will still be interpolated and plotted throughout the gap. See below. The Fixed options are useful if you want to use an IE theme just for plotting the route. Map positions.3. in the same way as for the color.3. Here is a summary of the factors that affect theme plotting and updating: • Interpolation. If you want to plot such an IE with high frequency.1 below). interpolation is of course impossible.5. Loss of positioning data.0 341 .1. whether delivered by a GPS or pinpointed. include another IE that is frequently updated in the same theme. then pick a symbol in the second. and no extrapolation of the route is attempted by TEMS Investigation. However. On the other hand.Chapter 31. it appears in the box in the Theme Settings dialog under the layer it belongs to. If you choose Fixed.5. if no more positioning data is obtained. are constantly interpolated (linearly) to enable plotting at half-second intervals. Notes on Route Plotting and Updating The updating frequency for IE themes is governed by a number of factors. If GPS data is lost for an extended period of time (for instance while driving through a tunnel) but GPS coverage is eventually regained. A new theme marker is plotted only if a message with fresh data has been delivered by the measurement device. whether markers are actually plotted at this rate depends on other circumstances. Note also that certain information elements are not updated regularly at all but only on special occasions (for example. • • NT12-2533 ver 1. Once the IE theme has been defined. Note that some information elements are not updated this often. Updates will thus be less frequent in idle mode than in dedicated mode. pick a font in the first combo box. A general rule is that new theme markers are drawn at most twice a second.

you create an event theme. select the layer named Event Layer. Click Add Theme: Event Mobile Choose an event type. markers are drawn more sparsely. you must reload the logfile to make this event theme visible.4. a new theme object (whether a symbol or a line) is drawn next to the latest one if the centers of the two objects will be more than 5 pixels apart on the screen. The plotting density on the map is dependent on the current zoom of the Map window. Note: If you create a new event theme for a user-defined event after loading a logfile. when you zoom out. more markers are filled in to show the route in more detail.0 User’s Manual • Map zoom. 31. Choose the device from which to pick this type of event. • • In the Theme Settings dialog. Presenting Events To present an event. Specifically. 342 .TEMS Investigation 14.5. When you zoom in.

This enables the creation of cell themes displaying arbitrary groups of cells. in the XML cell file format. • If this is checked. Select your image.5.) Cell information for different technologies can be kept apart in the presentation. Select the font. If this is not checked.5.Chapter 31. Furthermore. It has the same meaning as for information elements. The themes can be defined at any time.3. NT12-2533 ver 1.3. individual cells can be tagged with a type.5. as is evident from section 31. Wi-Fi and WiMAX both follow GSM.2.0 343 .10). Presenting Cell Information1 To present cell information. with the obvious exception of GSM-specific information such as the Cell ARFCN theme. see section 31. the bitmap is drawn exactly as-is. This presentation also applies to WiMAX cells and Wi-Fi access points defined in an XML cell file (see the Technical Reference. then pick a symbol and set its size and color. the underlying layer shines through. 31.5. Map Windows Offset (pixels) Set the offset.7.5. i. all white pixels in the bitmap become transparent. Note that this requires a bitmap with a white background.1 below. How to load cell files is described in section 6.7. sections 4. It is also possible to draw cell information for multiple technologies in the same theme.9 and 4. For events it is appropriate to use a non-zero offset (for instance 20 pixels) so that event theme symbols are not hidden by the IE theme markers plotted on the route. you do not have to load a cell file first. a couple of cell themes are predefined. otherwise no transparency is achieved. with a separate theme for each. It is possible to have more than one cell file loaded. Where the presentation differs between cellular technologies. Bitmap Transparent Select this to use a bitmap image as event symbol. • Font Select this to pick an event symbol from a font.e. (In fact.5. and set its size. you create cell themes. 1. See section 31.

5.5. However.2 Visualization of neighbor relations (Cell Color theme): section 31. All cell sites are always plotted. to avoid clutter.5.5.5.5.5.5.1 Indication of serving cell and handover (Cell Line theme): section 31.5. Presentation on Map Three-sector site (three cells) Omni cell The zoom of the Map window does not affect this theme. see sections 31.5.5. Choose a cell theme type. regardless of the zoom.TEMS Investigation 14.4 In the Theme Settings dialog. To create a new cell theme.1.5.3 (GSM:) Indication of cells using the same ARFCN as a given cell (Cell ARFCN theme): section 31. proceed as follows: • • • 31. 344 .4.5. which by default hide the Cell theme. Note that certain cells are filled with other colors by other cell themes. Click Add Theme. text labels have been turned off in all of the remaining illustrations in section 31. select Cell Layer.3 and 31. Each cell is tagged with a text label if you turn on the Cell labels option (see below). The Cell Theme This theme is concerned with basic plotting of cell sites.5. The Select Theme Type dialog appears.5.5.0 User’s Manual The following kinds of cell theme exist: • • • • Basic plotting of cell sites (Cell theme): section 31.

7. (Regarding cellular technology support in the CEL and XML cell file formats. section 4.0 345 . In XML cell files this is identical with the CELL_TYPE element: see the Technical Reference. chapters 3 and 4. Cell presentation NT12-2533 ver 1.) Cell type Type of cell indicated in cell file. see the Technical Reference.Chapter 31. Choose a cellular technology to plot only cells from that technology. Choose ALL to plot cells from all technologies.13. You might want to create one Cell theme for each technology. This section governs how cells are drawn. GSM and WCDMA cells are told apart by inspection of what type of channel is defined (ARFCN or UARFCN). Map Windows Setup Dialog Cells to plot System This section governs which of the cells defined in the cell file will be plotted. In CEL files.

the following plotting rules apply: • If the antenna direction is not stated in the cell file. The color to be used for the border of the cell symbol. The color to be used for the interior of the cell symbol.TEMS Investigation 14. taken from the cell file. incompletely described cells will not be marked as such in any way.3 and 31. it is set to 360º in the plot (omni cell.4).0 User’s Manual Radius (pixels) Border color Fill color The radius of each cell symbol (circle/sector of circle) in pixels. Incomplete cells The default color to be used for cells that are incompletely described in the cell file. this highlighting ceases to be visible if a Cell Color or Cell ARFCN theme is also displayed: see sections 31. When you select a cell. full circle). it turns red. see the illustration in section 31. In either case. (However. is as follows: • • • • • GSM: Cell name WCDMA: Cell name and SC LTE: Cell name TD-SCDMA: Cell name CDMA: Cell name 346 . Uncheck to make the symbol transparent.5.6.5. If the beam width is not stated. If you uncheck this option. The displayed information.5. provided that the cell is completely described in the cell file.5. • Cell labels If you check this option. a text label will be printed next to each cell. it is set to zero degrees in the plot (sector centered on “twelve o’clock”).

rather.Chapter 31. this theme is used to indicate • • the serving cell (WCDMA/CDMA idle mode.) Additionally. LTE. Use with Phone Data For a phone.2.5. GPS data and the contents of a signal strength information element are correlated with the coordinates in the cell file.0 347 . no interaction with base stations is involved during scanning.5. The Cell Line Theme This theme is used to indicate serving cells and positions where handovers have taken place. the theme indicates positions where handovers have taken place.5.5. provided that cells from both cellular technologies are visible in the Cell theme (section 31. Inter-system handovers are visualized in the same way as intrasystem handovers. and the cell is identified which a user terminal at the same position would be most likely to use. GSM. Technology-specific information: Parameters used to measure signal strength • • • • • • • GSM: RxLev WCDMA: Aggregate Ec LTE: RSRQ TD-SCDMA: Ec/Io CDMA: Aggregate Ec WiMAX: Channel RSSI Wi-Fi: WLAN RSSI NT12-2533 ver 1. TD-SCDMA) active set members (WCDMA connected mode/CDMA traffic mode) (The user interface uses only the term “serving cell”. This points out the cell that uses the currently strongest signal as measured by the scanning device. Of course. Map Windows 31. the Cell Line theme gives a best server indication. The Cell Line theme has different meanings depending on the data source: phone or scanner.1). Use with Scan Data With scan data.

Setup Dialog Below.5.3.0 User’s Manual Presentation on Map route line to current serving cell Like IE theme markers (section 31.TEMS Investigation 14. ensuring that large swaths of the map are not completely covered by such lines when the Leave trail option is checked. all that is said of serving cells/active set also applies to best server indications. cell lines are plotted with a variable density. This density is governed among other things by the zoom of the Map window.1). 348 .

Note that they are independent of the Serving cell settings. These settings govern the indication of current and past serving cells/active set members. i. Check this to leave all serving cell lines on the map.5.3). The line width is adjustable. The line will remain on the map. the line is shifted in the same way as an IE theme marker. At handover. Pick a color in the combo box. although no actual handover is involved. Before choosing the information element (and an argument if applicable). It has the same meaning as for information elements (see section 31. although no actual handover is involved. The line remains after the phone has moved on. choose the desired category in the System combo box. a line is drawn from the position where the old serving cell or active set member is last used. Check this to continually display a line connecting the current position along the route with the current serving cell/active set members. Serving cell Serving cell line Fixed color Color governed by IE Leave trail Serving cell list changed Line to added cell Line to removed cell NT12-2533 ver 1. Select this to have the serving cell line drawn in a fixed color.0 349 . Map Windows System Mobile Offset (pixels) Governs what IEs are selectable.Chapter 31. a line is drawn from the position where the new serving cell or active set member is first used.e. This feature is available also for best server indications. Set the offset for the starting point of the line. Select this to have the color of the connecting line(s) governed by an information element. See Color governed by IE below. These settings refer to indication of handovers. Choose the phone whose serving cells are to be displayed. This feature is available also for best server indications. At handover.

The neighbor relations shown are those indicated in the loaded cell file.5.5. The only phone data fed into this theme is the serving cell data. independently of the phone’s interaction with the network.3. Neighbors indicated for all active set members (dashed red lines). By default.0 User’s Manual 31. However.TEMS Investigation 14. the neighbor presentation is not affected by the phone’s neighbor reporting. the theme will be displayed with that cell as serving cell instead. The Cell Color Theme This theme is used to visualize the neighbor relations of the current serving cell/active set members or of an arbitrary user-selected cell (only one cell at a time). in the realtime presentation as well as during logfile analysis. the cell drawn in green will be the phone’s current serving cell. if you click an arbitrary cell. Active set members pointed out by solid lines (black). 350 . active set WCDMA example: Cell Color and Cell Line themes. Presentation on Map yellow color from Cell theme GSM example: Cell Color theme (no route). therefore.

5. Map Windows • • The presentation for LTE and TD-SCDMA is similar to that for GSM.5. by default. cells drawn in yellow (or highlighted in red) in the Cell theme will be overlaid with the differently colored cells of the Cell Color theme. By default the Cell Color theme is drawn on top of the Cell theme (section 31. The fill color to use for neighbors of the serving cell. The fill color to use for the serving cell. the version of it displayed in the underlying Cell theme will be visible instead). That is. If you uncheck this box.1). Setup Dialog System Mobile Colors: Serving cell Not used. The presentation for CDMA is similar to that for WCDMA. Choose the phone whose serving cell is to be displayed. as in the above figures.0 351 . the cell is not drawn (and. Colors: Neighbor cells NT12-2533 ver 1. the choice does not matter. the neighbor cells are not drawn in this theme. If you uncheck this box.Chapter 31.

TEMS Investigation 14. The Cell ARFCN Theme (GSM) This theme is used to point out other cells that use a specified BCCH or TCH of a selected cell. A context menu appears. do as follows: • Right-click the cell of interest. To display the theme. matching cells are colored as follows: • • Cells that use the selected ARFCN as BCCH are colored cyan (light greenish blue). listing the BCCH and the TCHs that it uses.5.0 User’s Manual Colors: Servingto-neighbor lines • If single serving cell in use: Check this to display dashed lines connecting the serving cell with each of its neighbors. 352 . • 31. for each active set member. It is intended as an aid in GSM interferer identification.4.5. a function no longer supported in TEMS Investigation. Cells that use the selected ARFCN as TCH are colored blue. The theme is retained since loading of old logfiles containing interferer identification data is still supported. dashed lines connecting the active set member with each of its neighbors. If multi-cell active set in use: Check this to display. Choose the ARFCN that you want to search for among other cells: By default.

other cell using same ARFCN as BCCH By default the Cell ARFCN theme is drawn on top of the Cell theme but beneath the Cell Color theme.0 353 . Map Windows Presentation on Map selected cell. NT12-2533 ver 1.Chapter 31. The fill color to use for cells that use the selected ARFCN as TCH. so you may need to hide the latter or change the ordering of the themes. Setup Dialog System Same BCCH ARFCN Same TCH ARFCN Not used. The fill color to use for cells that use the selected ARFCN as BCCH. the choice does not matter. BCCH selected in context menu other cell using same ARFCN as TCH Cell ARFCN theme.

3). and color of waypoint symbols. Visibility of Themes In the Theme Settings dialog. Note: The Pinpoint theme is needed in order for the Map window pinpointing mechanism itself to work.0 User’s Manual 31. • • Editing Themes To edit a theme: In the Theme Settings dialog. this theme should never be removed. Click Edit.TEMS Investigation 14. The following properties can be edited for the Pinpoint theme: Symbol Line Type.5. size. the checkbox next to each layer and theme governs whether or not it is visible. Color and width of lines connecting waypoints.5.5.1.6.8. 31. Therefore.7. 354 . Presenting Pinpointing The Pinpoint theme presents the markers that you create when positioning data by pinpointing in the Map window (see section 11. select the theme you want to edit. 31.

Map Windows • • To show a theme. check the box. click Down.5.10.7). 31. The ordering is of particular relevance for cell-related themes (section 31.5. uncheck the box. The Right-hand Pane Information on Single Theme Markers (Info Tab) When you select a single theme marker on the map.1 and the Info tab shows (some of) the data represented by this marker.0 355 . Deleting Themes To delete a theme: • • In the Theme Settings dialog.9. click Up. the selected cell is presented as a serving cell and is colored green. To move the theme downwards. Click Delete. • • • Reordering Themes To change the order in which themes are superimposed within a layer: In the Theme Settings dialog.Chapter 31. 31.5. To hide a theme.1.5).6. To move the theme upwards. 31. The same also applies to layers (section 31. NT12-2533 ver 1. select the theme you want to move.6. 1. Exception: If a Cell Color theme is active. the marker is highlighted in red. select the theme you want to delete. 31.

a selection of cell and channel parameters are shown. the cell parameters are replaced by a set of Wi-Fi parameters.TEMS Investigation 14.6.0 User’s Manual IE marker Event marker For cells. 356 . if you click a neighbor of the cell described in the Cells section of the Info tab. the Info tab instead shows statistics on the selected data: see section 31. along with the cell’s defined neighbors (the red cell is highlighted): Cell markers For Wi-Fi access points. There is further interplay between the map and the Info tab. so that its own neighbors are displayed instead.2. If a group of theme markers is selected. the neighbor will take over the role of serving cell in the Cell Color theme. For example.

(It is not possible to select an arbitrary set of objects. statistics for the chosen marker set are computed and shown on the Info tab: • The Information Elements box holds the information elements contained in the selected theme markers.Chapter 31.2. Press and hold Ctrl. NT12-2533 ver 1. maximum. cells that are within the rectangle but have never been serving cells are not shown. and number of samples. Statistics can be computed in both recording and analysis mode. A green curve indicates the cumulative distribution. Textual information is then presented on the Info tab. The Cells box shows all cells that have been used as serving cells at the positions included in the marker set. For the Area Statistics tool. It should be noted that the map plotting may be more or less thinned out (see section 31.) Expand the information element to view the full set of statistics: mean.5. Map Windows 31. use the Area Statistics Tool. Click the marker where you want the segment to begin. Next to the name of an element is shown the mean value of the element calculated over the selected markers. (Averaging of signal strength values takes place in the mW domain.6. There are two ways to select a set of theme markers: To select all objects within a rectangular area. Click and drag in the map pane to mark the rectangle. The Events box shows the number of occurrences of every event that has a theme defined for it (not just those actually found among the selected theme markers).) When you release the mouse.3. and graphs are drawn on the Graph tab. • • On the Graph tab. Theme Statistics (Info and Graph Tabs) You can view some basic statistics for a set of theme markers selected on the map. so that more data goes into the statistics than actually appears on the map. a histogram is drawn for each information element contained in the selected theme markers. then click the marker that is to be the endpoint of the segment.0 357 . To select a segment of a route.1). minimum. use the Selection Tool.

Besides the presentation layer.7.5 introduced the concept of presentation layer. however.3. Layers Section 31. proceed as follows: Click Add/Edit Themes. 31.1. Generally speaking. To create a new presentation layer. • In the dialog that appears. click Add Layer: Layer name Name the new presentation layer.0 User’s Manual 31. which make up the map itself and cannot be edited. displaying full details of theme settings. for instance to set the visibility of each layer. Adding Presentation Layers Normally there is no need to add new presentation layers. since predefined layers are provided for the various types of theme. if you should want to define a set of data that you want to manage separately in a convenient way (for instance turn the visibility on and off). it is possible to make a number of settings that do not affect the contents of the layers. there are also map layers. Theme Legend (Legend Tab) The Legend tab gives an overview of all presentation themes.6. then you should put that data in a separate presentation layer.TEMS Investigation 14. 358 . In both types of layers. These settings are detailed below. or selected ones. This section treats layers in more detail. 31. However. layers are sets of data which together make up the contents of a Map window. Use the combo box at the top to select what to show.7.

Note: The Layer Control can be accessed either from a Map window or from the GeoSet Manager. NT12-2533 ver 1.7. Layer Control The Layer Control dialog is used to edit various properties of layers. use the Layer Control of the GeoSet Manager (see section 31. Changes made from a Map window affect only that window and cannot be saved. Up.1. select it and click Down. If you want to make changes that can be saved. 31.Chapter 31.) To move a layer upwards.5. Down Change the order in which layers are superimposed on the screen. corresponding to the theme types listed in section 31. select it and click Up.10). • To open the Layer Control: Click the Layer Control button.2. (The top layer is first in the list. To move a layer downwards.0 359 . Map Windows Layer type Choose a layer type.

Set label properties for the selected layer. Set display properties for the selected layer. (No further history of views is maintained.2.) 360 .8. Previous View This command returns you to the previous map view. Selectable Automatic Labels Not used. should be turned off for map layers. Note that the visibility of labels may be conditioned by the zoom range. The unit of distance is governed from the Control Panel in Windows (e. The Scale Bar This command shows and hides a scale bar showing distance in kilometers or miles. 31.0 User’s Manual Add Remove Visible Add a layer.1.8. Regional Options  NumbersMeasurement System). Check to make the labels of the selected layer visible.TEMS Investigation 14. Map Context Menu When you right-click in the map. Disabled for presentation layers. Disabled for presentation layers. Check to make the selected layer in the list visible. should be turned off for map layers. For labels to be visible. Select a TAB file and click Open. a context menu appears with choices as described below. the layer they belong to must be visible. 31.8). Editable Display Labels Not used.g. Disabled for presentation layers. Remove the selected layer. 31. See Labels below.5. Note that the visibility of presentation layers can also be set in the Theme Settings dialog (see section 31.8.

See sections 31. Changes are only temporary and cannot be saved. 31. Layer Control: Manage layers or change displaying or labeling properties. Selection Tool: Click a presentation layer object to select it. Area Statistics Tool: Click and drag to view statistics for presentation layer objects within a rectangle (see section 31.1. View Entire Layer This commands zooms out to show the whole of the chosen layer.3. For example. Open Map: Open a map.2. see section 31. or add. Some of these activate functions described earlier in this chapter.6. edit or remove themes. use the layer control in the GeoSet Manager.Chapter 31. NT12-2533 ver 1. Doubleclick the object to inspect what information it contains.10.0 361 . The Map Window Toolbar This section gives a description of the Map window toolbar buttons. To make changes to the GeoSet. GeoSet Manager: Start the GeoSet Manager which is used for creating new GeoSet files and for changing the properties of a GeoSet.2). but many others relate to map handling and have not previously been mentioned. It should be the same as in the cell file.2). Zoom In: Enlarge a portion of the map to view it in more detail. Add/Edit Themes: Add or remove presentation layers. See section 31.6.7.5. See section 31.4. Position Map: Position a map which is in bitmap or uncompressed TIF format. See section 31. Map Windows 31.9.4.8. Setting the Map Projection This command allows you to set the map projection. 31. Press and hold Ctrl to select a segment of a route (see section 31. choose an information element layer to view the whole of your route.10.8.3 and 31.

Clear Map: Remove all the information in presentation layers from the map. Pan Tool: Move the map by clicking and dragging. except cell site information. However. Pinpoint: Mark waypoints on the map. choose View. choose Entire Layer. The following buttons are enabled only when an object belonging to a theme has been selected: First Item: Select the first object of the same type. Click in the map to indicate a starting point.0 User’s Manual Zoom Out: View a larger area than the current map view. right-click in the map. If you have zoomed in and want to view the entire route again. 31. right-click in the map. Ruler: Measure the distance of a route on the map consisting of straight line segments. Previous Item: Select the previous object of the same type. and specify one of the presentation layers. choose Map Properties. Center Map: Click a spot in the map to center it around this spot. while changes made in a Map window cannot be saved. Holding down the Ctrl key swaps the zoom operations. then click at each turn. see section 11. changes made using 362 . Regarding positioning of logfile data by pinpointing in the Map window. Last Item: Select the last object of the same type. The distance of the last segment and the total distance are shown on the status bar at the bottom of the Map window. GeoSet Manager The GeoSet Manager looks and works much like a Map window. To change the unit of distance. Next Item: Select the next object of the same type. Double-click at the endpoint.10. and select the Defaults tab.3.TEMS Investigation 14.1.

Projections It is possible to set which projection to use for a GeoSet. click the Start GeoSetManager button on the Map window toolbar. To start the GeoSet Manager. 31.2. Map Windows the GeoSet Manager can be saved to the GeoSet (*.1.Chapter 31. make sure you choose the projection of the layer you usually work with. See section 31. If your GeoSet contains multiple layers with different projections.gst) file associated with the map.7. Layer Control The Layer Control works the same way as in Map windows.10.0 363 .2. • To change the projection.10. NT12-2533 ver 1. choose Map  Projections. 31.

The General Window In the General window. are collected miscellaneous settings that affect the behavior of the TEMS Investigation application.TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual 32. found on the Navigator’s Menu tab in the Configuration folder. 364 . These settings are covered elsewhere in this manual in the appropriate contexts.

Full detail on technical matters is given in separate documents which are found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.4. In the present version of TEMS Investigation. A number of KPIs are not present in the ETSI specification.0 365 . KPI data can be collected for GSM and WCDMA. 33. Purpose of KPIs Most of the KPIs have been designed according to ETSI TS 102 250-2 V1.Chapter 33. TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic are the products to use for explicitly generating KPIs and reports that present them.1 for performance measurements. that is. NT12-2533 ver 1. however. these are tagged “not in ETSI” in the Technical Reference. where a “KPI Report” function was provided.1. Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) 33. chapter 10. all data needed for KPIs is recorded in TEMS Investigation logfiles. KPIs are not computed in TEMS Investigation or handled explicitly in the application in any way. chapter 10. 1. retainability. and integrity. Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) are offered in TEMS products for measuring the user-perceived performance of a number of circuit-switched and packet-switched services. Listings and brief definitions of the KPIs are found in the Technical Reference.1 The present chapter gives an general discussion of KPIs as well as an overview of how to obtain them with TEMS products. to measure accessibility. Note that this is different from certain previous TEMS Investigation versions.

1. in order for a service to be accessible in a packet-switched network. Even if a service was accessed successfully.3.1. such as (in the packet-switched case) manual reactivation of the PDP context. under given conditions for a requested period of time. the user’s perception of the performance may vary greatly. accessing an IP service (for WAP and MMS) activating a WAP session. Integrity Integrity indicates the degree to which a service is maintained without major disturbances once it has been accessed. Retainability Retainability is the ability of the user to keep a service.2.1. Obtaining KPIs with TEMS Products General Procedure To obtain KPIs. For example. Accessibility Accessibility is the ability of the user to obtain a service within specified tolerances and under other given conditions. perform the following steps: 1. 33. Compose a TEMS Investigation script that executes one or several services. Integrity KPIs show the performance of successful service attempts.1. 33. the service testing should be enclosed by the 366 . from very good to unacceptably bad.2. performing an attach and a PDP context activation within an active PDP context. 33. i.1.TEMS Investigation 14. once it has been accessed. 33. Furthermore.0 User’s Manual 33. Retainability of a service or session also implies that the user does not have to perform any manual operations that are not necessary under stable network conditions. The script structure should be modeled on the predefined snippets that are provided for each service type in order to ensure that all aspects of the data collection are in accordance with ETSI KPI definitions. the user must be able to execute a chain of operations: • • • accessing the packet-switched network as such.e.2.

see Information Elements and Events volume. The mathematical relationships between sample size and statistical accuracy are given in a separate document. and generate KPI reports using one of these products. 33. and particularly section 20.4. 2. NT12-2533 ver 1. These events underlie the computation of KPIs.2. found on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.9 on snippets. section 7. 3.0 367 .Chapter 33. Run the script in TEMS Investigation. “Statistical Guidelines for Collecting KPI Data”. Obtaining Significant KPI Statistics To obtain reliable KPI statistics you need to collect sufficient amounts of data. For details. please consult the documentation accompanying the relevant product.3. 33. Key Performance Indicators – KPIs (UMTS) control activities Start Recording and Stop Recording.2. special KPI events are displayed in the window Events Of KPI Type. “Events of KPI Type” When you test services in TEMS Investigation.2. “Data Events”. Open the logfile(s) produced by the script in TEMS Discovery or TEMS Automatic. See chapter 20.

368 . Reference is made to the previously used algorithm (the “old SQI”). and attention is drawn to certain important differences between the algorithms. As wideband speech codecs are now being deployed in mobile phones and networks.1.TEMS Investigation 14. but no comprehensive point-by-point comparison is made. This chapter examines the workings of the SQI algorithm.1. or CDMA cellular network as perceived by a human listener. However.3). SQI for CDMA SQI for CDMA uses an SQI-MOS algorithm similar to those for GSM and WCDMA. 34. Speech Quality Index – SQI TEMS products offer the quality measure SQI (Speech Quality Index) for estimating the downlink speech quality in a GSM. 34. Computing SQI for GSM and WCDMA requires data collected with Sony Ericsson phones. although its fundamental function remains similar to that of the old algorithm (the output of which is still available in TEMS Investigation). 34. See also the document “Speech Quality Measurement with SQI” which is included on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.1. Background SQI for UMTS SQI for GSM and WCDMA is a long-standing feature of TEMS products.0.1. WCDMA. SQI for CDMA can be based on data from any CDMA phone that is connectable in TEMS Investigation. in TEMS Investigation 9. The focus of this chapter is to describe the new algorithm (called “SQI-MOS” in the application. the SQI algorithm was completely reworked. the SQI-MOS algorithm includes a model for rating wideband speech. SQI for CDMA currently does not support wideband.2.0 User’s Manual 34. see section 34.

In GSM.75 FR/HR. the percentage of radio frames/blocks that are lost on their way to the receiving party. 5.Chapter 34.65 1. GSM) or block error rate (BLER.85. no such quantity is reported by UEs in WCDMA mode. 4. 7. In contrast.4 FR/HR. and 12. WCDMA).2 FR.e. Handovers are not modeled independently in any way by SQI-MOS. This is available in GSM only. usually because of bad radio conditions.15 FR/HR. and GSM HR all GSM AMR-NB and AMR-WB modes up to 12. and these are treated like any other frame/block errors by the SQI-MOS algorithm. NT12-2533 ver 1. handover block errors can usually be avoided thanks to the soft handover mechanism. 6. The general speech quality level and the highest attainable quality vary widely between codecs. 7.1. 34. It should be noted that in WCDMA. 10. • Input to the SQI-MOS Algorithm UMTS SQI-MOS for UMTS takes the following parameters as input: The frame error rate (FER. GSM FR. each speech codec has its own strengths and weaknesses with regard to input properties and channel conditions.95 FR/HR.7 FR/HR. 6. The speech codec used.2. the current algorithm also does not consider the distribution of frame/block errors over time.9 FR/HR.0 369 . the old SQI algorithm includes a special “handover penalty” mechanism lowering the SQI score whenever a handover has occurred. and 12.2 FR. Speech Quality Index – SQI 34. i. Frame/Block errors also occur in connection with handover. for wideband. SQI-MOS for UMTS is implemented for the following codecs: • • GSM EFR. The same basic SQI-MOS model is used for all supported speech codecs. on the other hand. every handover causes a number of frames to be lost. • • The bit error rate (BER). 5.65 kbit/s: – – for narrowband.2. but the model is tuned separately for each codec to capture its unique characteristics. 8. Moreover.1 More generally.60.

5. SQI-MOS Output The output from the SQI-MOS calculation is a score on the ACR1 MOS scale which is widely used in listening tests and familiar to cellular operators. The score is thus a value ranging from 1 to 5. 8. for wideband.9.2.15. and 12. compare section 34. 370 .5 s (CDMA) 2–4 s Such a high update rate is possible thanks to the low computational complexity of the algorithm.65 kbit/s: – – for narrowband. including bit rate information The general discussion of these parameters in section 34.95. 7.2. 10. 7. 6.2. 34.1.3. The SQI-MOS algorithm produces a new quality estimate at intervals of • • (UMTS) approximately 0. 5. ACR stands for Absolute Category Rating: this is the “regular” MOS test where speech samples are rated without being compared to a reference.2. CDMA SQI-MOS for CDMA closely resembles WCDMA SQI.1 applies equally to CDMA (with the term “handoff” substituted for “handover”). and 12. 6. SQI-MOS for CDMA is implemented for the following codecs: • • • • QCELP13K EVRC SMV VMR-WB (narrowband input only) 34.0 User’s Manual • all WCDMA AMR-NB and AMR-WB modes up to 12. Input parameters are: • • Frame error rate Speech codec used.2.65.85.4.75.TEMS Investigation 14. 1.60.2. 4.7.

and no exact mapping exists in this case either. PESQ measures the quality end-to-end. A further complicating circumstance is that there is no simple mapping between wideband and narrowband SQI-MOS.4. NT12-2533 ver 1. a given MOS score indicates.0 371 .pesq. This means that 1. SQI-MOS vs. 2.3. that is.2 The exception is the wideband modes. whereas SQI reflects the radio link quality only. The highest attainable quality is therefore markedly better for wideband.2. which was trained using listening tests alone. a higher quality for wideband than for narrowband. rather than actual listening tests.4. See  www. This is completely different from the old SQI algorithm.Chapter 34. in absolute terms. for reasons sketched in section 34.1. it is necessary to consider what speech bandwidth has been encoded.1. Note carefully that PESQ and SQI-MOS do not have the same scope. Regarding the latter.org. Alignment of SQI-MOS and PESQ The SQI-MOS algorithm has been designed to correlate its output as closely as possible with the PESQ measure (Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality). 34. as benchmarks. where adjustments to the models have been made using the results of external listening tests. Narrowband vs.3. the SQI-MOS models have mostly been trimmed using PESQ scores.0. however. the two algorithms are distinct (even if similar in general terms). This is because wideband speech coding models a wider range of the speech frequency spectrum and is thus inherently superior to narrowband coding. The same MOS scale and range are used for both (as is the custom in the field of speech quality assessment). Wideband SQI-MOS (UMTS) It is necessary to point out that narrowband and wideband SQI-MOS scores are not directly comparable. no objective speech quality measure of the caliber of PESQ was yet commercially available. 34. At the time that work was done. see section 34. Old SQI (UMTS) The old SQI (still available in the application) is expressed in dBQ. also taking the fixed side into account.4.1 In fact. Speech Quality Index – SQI 34. It should be stressed that SQI-MOS cannot be derived from these dBQ scores.1. It follows from this that when interpreting a figure such as SQI-MOS = 4.

SQI-MOS. but they do it in completely different ways. since CDMA SQI currently does not extend to wideband.0 User’s Manual PESQ and SQI values may differ while both being accurate in their respective domains. in certain circumstances. Also bear in mind that PESQ and SQI-MOS use fundamentally different approaches to quality measurement: • PESQ is a reference-based method which compares the received degraded speech signal with the same signal in original and undistorted form. i. Notes on PESQ for Wideband (UMTS) (This subsection is relevant for UMTS only. Below is a brief discussion of this topic.) The PESQ algorithm for wideband (8 kHz) speech coding – as opposed to that for narrowband (4 kHz) – is afflicted with certain recognized shortcomings. Such averaging is not required in the case of SQI-MOS. 1. even for clean speech. One relevant fact is that. • Both methods try to assess to what degree the distortions in the received signal will be audible to the human ear. PESQ scores need to be averaged over a range of speakers in order to eliminate speaker bias.1 This difference in output range would not in itself be problematic if wideband PESQ behaved similarly to narrowband PESQ as a function of FER/BLER. variation stemming from the characteristics of individual speakers. This is a phenomenon independent of the circumstances described in section 34. on the other hand. 372 .4.e. since the speaker-contingent variation is already built into the model (it has been trained with a large number of speakers). The use of PESQ as a benchmark therefore complicated the development of SQI-MOS for wideband. 34.TEMS Investigation 14.3.2). wideband PESQ has been found to produce lower scores than narrowband PESQ. is a no-reference method that works with the received signal alone and extracts radio parameters from it (as described in section 34. a mapping could then be applied to align the wideband scores to narrowband.1.

975.1 Only clean speech ratings from these tests were used.4).) For the reasons explained above it was necessary to resort to other reference material besides PESQ scores in order to avoid biasing the wideband SQIMOS model. For narrowband.0. Speech Quality Index – SQI Unfortunately. Since RxQual is merely a mapping of time-averaged bit error rates into a scale from 0 to 7 ( 3GPP 45. while the rock-bottom SQIMOS (the worst possible score. this variability is limited to a few tenths of a MOS point. but so far with no satisfactory results. The material used was the results from listening tests conducted during standardization of the AMR speech codec. wideband PESQ scores for different speakers show a spread of more than one point on the MOS scale. “Quality in Clean Speech and Error Conditions”. section 8. See  3GPP TR 26. Wideband PESQ is much more sensitive to speaker bias than is narrowband PESQ (compare the introduction of section 34.2. attained at very high FERs/BLERs2) was left unchanged. it cannot of course provide more than a rough indication of speech quality. at zero FER/BLER). NT12-2533 ver 1.008.0. and consequently outputs from the two are not directly comparable.5. 2.4): at a fixed FER/BLER. FER = 60% was selected as endpoint. This tuning resulted in an adjustment of the SQI-MOS model that is linear as a function of FER/BLER.e. The largest correction was applied to the cleanspeech SQI-MOS score (i. speech quality in GSM networks was often measured by means of the RxQual parameter (which is also available in TEMS products).Chapter 34. since PESQ (as is well known) sometimes judges severely disturbed speech in a misleading manner: certain very bad (almost muted) samples receive high PESQ scores. The upshot of this is that no straightforward mapping between wideband and narrowband PESQ can be constructed. version 7. (It is probable that the task of assessing wideband speech quality requires further refinement of the mathematical models used. 1. Attempts have been made within ITU to develop such a mapping. GSM Comparison with Other Radio Parameters In the past. things are not that simple.0 373 . Samples with FER > 60% were excluded from the SQI-MOS modeling. 34.

can be purchased as an option with TEMS Investigation.org. PESQ.862. and CDMA networks. see also  www. A summary of the possibilities is given in the following table: Auxiliary Components Call Generator. 35.2 37 38 VoIP Mobile to mobile 374 .pesq. Measurement Setups in TEMS Investigation Audio quality measurement (AQM) in TEMS Investigation can be done in a number of contexts and hardware configurations.TEMS Investigation 14. For in-depth information about PESQ. is the industry standard for voice quality measurement. The PESQ algorithm is defined by the ITU-T standard P.0 User’s Manual 35. It can be performed in GSM. WCDMA. AQM modules Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU) Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) (2 PCs used) AQM Computed By AQM modules AQM modules PC PCs Service CS voice Call Parties Mobile to fixed Mobile to mobile Mobile to mobile Ref.1. The PESQ algorithm measures endto-end speech quality by comparing one party’s undistorted input signal (serving as reference) with the degraded version of the same signal received by the other party. The severity of the degradation as perceived by human listeners is assessed using highly refined models of the human ear and the brain’s processing of auditory input. 36.1 36. short for Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality. including PESQ. Audio Quality Measurement (AQM): General Audio quality measurement.

0 375 . 36. connected to the fixed telephone network (section 36. The downlink AQM module can optionally be mounted along with the phone in an equipment case. The computation of AQM scores is done in dedicated hardware units called AQM modules: one connected to the phone and to the PC. and one housed in the Call Generator.1).16.1. NT12-2533 ver 1. Mobile-to-fixed Audio Quality Measurement with Call Generator This section describes the AQM setup where a Call Generator acts as the receiver of AQM calls. The call may be received: • • by a stationary component known as the Call Generator. AQM with Call Generator/MRU 36. taking care of the uplink.2).6. These modules contain DSP hardware. handling the downlink. measurements are made mobile-originated voice calls. 1.Chapter 36.4). or by a Mobile Receiving Unit (MRU) housed in a mobile phone (section 36.1 Further technical information about these methods of audio quality measurement is found in the document “AQM in TEMS Products (Including PESQ)”.0. which is included on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. Below is an overview of the measurement configuration. AQM with Call Generator/MRU In this AQM configuration. MRUs are not offered for sale with TEMS Investigation 14. The product version does however still support AQM with previously purchased MRUs. A separate MRU User’s Manual is also available. It is referred to by the M2F DL + UL option in the PESQ Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20.

0 User’s Manual TEMS Investigation. and volume. To merge uplink AQM data into the logfiles. • • 376 . the logfile export function is used. See section 11. The AQM modules also record a number of further audio quality measurements such as echo delay. The received (degraded) signals at either end are forwarded to the respective AQM modules.1. The phone calls the Call Generator and plays the reference sentences. The Call Generator responds by playing the same reference sentences. The downlink AQM data is written to regular TEMS Investigation logfiles. See Information Elements and Events.7. Service Control script Reference audio Downlink AQM module Transmitted audio Test terminal Downlink AQM Received degraded audio (from Call Generator) Voice calls Logfile containing downlink AQM data Reference audio Uplink AQM data in XML files (copying/ download) Logfile with uplink AQM data merged in and downlink AQM data timeadjusted TEMS Investigation. section 3. echo attenuation. yielding uplink and downlink PESQ scores.TEMS Investigation 14. logfile export Call Generator with uplink AQM module The measurement procedure can be summarized as follows: • • • The speech segments to be used as references are loaded into the AQM modules and into the test phone. The uplink AQM data is stored in XML files. where the signals are compared with the originals.

3. the MRU does not have an AQM module. This is the M2M DL option in the PESQ Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20.0 377 . AQM with Call Generator/MRU 36.4).2. NT12-2533 ver 1. Service Control script Reference audio Downlink AQM module Transmitted audio Test terminal Downlink AQM Logfile containing downlink AQM data Received degraded audio (from MRU) Voice calls Reference audio MRU (Mobile Receiving Unit) Logfile with AQM data timeadjusted TEMS Investigation. MRU. Another important difference is that only downlink AQM scores are obtained with this method. Obtaining AQM Data Here is an overview of how to record and present audio quality measurements in practice.16. logfile export 36.6.1 is that the fixed Call Generator is replaced by a Mobile Receiving Unit. Mobile-to-mobile Audio Quality Measurement with MRU The main difference between this setup and that described in section 36. Measurement configuration: TEMS Investigation.Chapter 36. It covers the both the Call Generator configuration and the MRU configuration. as recipient of the AQM calls.

36. The AQM algorithms require a fixed preset volume. If you wish to synchronize AQM calls from multiple phones.e.2. using a different AQM module with each phone. section 10. • Practical Considerations You can plug a headset into the AQM module during measurement to listen live to the received audio. which governs how long to maintain the call and collect audio quality measurements. Phone supporting audio quality measurement: one of those listed as AQM-capable in the Getting Started Manual. see chapter 20): – – Add a Dial activity. However.0 User’s Manual 36. section 3.3. • Compose a script as follows (for details of all activities.16. Finally. Call Generator or MRU.3. • • • Prerequisites You need to possess the following: License for collecting AQM data: see the Getting Started Manual.3.6. For mobile-to-fixed AQM.3.4. • 36. set a value for PESQ Duration. set Measurement Type to “M2M DL” to designate an MRU as receiving party in the same manner.2. Recording AQM Data The description below assumes that a single phone is used to make audio quality measurements.3. Conclude with a Hang Up activity. See section 20. One AQM module is required for each phone that you want to measure AQM with. The phone will then make voice calls to a Call Generator (identified by its phone number).3. you must not adjust the volume using the headset.1. One or several downlink AQM modules (either stand-alone units or DSP cards mounted in an equipment case). Add a PESQ Measurement activity after the Dial. since that would distort the AQM output. sequences of the form Dial  PESQ Measurement  Hang Up as just described) in separate branches in a Parallel – – 378 .TEMS Investigation 14. set Measurement Type to “M2F DL + UL”. It is possible to perform such measurements with several phones at once.1. put the calls (i. For mobile-to-mobile AQM.

you must wait for the AQM module to start up its DSP and finish some preprocessing. section 7. see section 11. so that they can be included in any presentation.7. 2” and “Pre Processing Ready” appear in the Mode Reports window. however.0 379 . To have the above procedure automatically repeated as many times as desired. – – • Book-end all of the above activities with Start Recording and Stop Recording to have the calls recorded in a logfile. • • • • 36.1. This is because the logfile export procedure also corrects the time alignment for downlink data (again. See section 11.7. NT12-2533 ver 1. Associate the phone with the AQM module on the Navigator’s Equipment tab: see section 9. Merging Uplink AQM Data into Logfiles After completing your measurements. Wait until the reports “Dsp Started Ver. To also make all calls terminate at the same time. Connect your AQM equipment case (or alternatively your phone and stand-alone AQM module) to the PC and point to the requisite driver files as described in the Getting Started Manual. The same information elements are used regardless of the choice of AQM setup. although no uplink AQM data is recorded in that case.5. 36.2). Make sure that the phone’s number is defined in TEMS Investigation and enter the number manually if necessary: see section 8.Chapter 36.5.3. 36.2. Presentation of AQM Data Information Elements All AQM data is available as information elements. enclose everything defined so far within a While construct.2. use the logfile export function to merge the uplink AQM data (recorded by the Call Generator) into the logfile. When using the AQM module for the first time after connecting it. which already contains the downlink AQM scores.1.7. The red LED on the AQM module should go out. If precise time alignment for AQM data is not of interest.7. simply use the same PESQ Duration for all calls. the logfile export can be skipped.4. Note that this operation is necessary also for mobile-to-mobile AQM. AQM with Call Generator/MRU construct. Run the script and record your logfiles.

the 5.5 s offset for downlink data is removed so that all data is correctly aligned. see section 11. 380 . See the Technical Reference. or one speech sentence. Downlink Frequent AQM is not displayed at all prior to merging.2.5 s. you must keep in mind that this data will lag behind other information elements because of the processing delay in the DSP. section 10. When viewing (downlink) AQM data in real time.5.7. or when analyzing a logfile where the uplink AQM data has not yet been merged in.0 User’s Manual Status windows named Speech Quality are provided where all AQM information elements (as well as some other data) are presented.) 36. PESQ Key Performance Indicator A PESQ-based KPI is computable on the basis of TEMS Investigation data. (For full details. When you merge the uplink AQM data into the logfile.5.2.TEMS Investigation 14. The offset is 5.1.

This configuration is referred to by the M2M DL + UL option in the PESQ Measurement activity of the Service Control script (see section 20.0 381 . NT12-2533 ver 1.Chapter 37. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) In this AQM configuration. which call each other in pairs. all measurement is conducted during mobile-tomobile voice calls. Up to four mobile devices. are connected to an Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) which relays the audio to the PC. TEMS Investigation. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 37. Obtaining AQM Data Here is an overview of how to set up the Audio Capturing Unit AQM configuration and how to record audio quality measurements.6. Service Control script Voice calls Reference audio PESQ calculation Audio Audio Capturing Unit Test terminals Relayed degraded audio Logfile with downlink and uplink PESQ Voice calls 37.1.16.4).

2. • • • • • Prerequisites You need to possess the following: License for collecting AQM data: see the Getting Started Manual.16. For each phone pair.1. USB hub for phones (delivered with ACU). Audio Capturing Unit (TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB). chapter 16.2.5 mm cable for Sony Ericsson Xperia arc.3. chapter 16. • 382 .1 below show the structure of the ready-made scripts.1.3.TEMS Investigation 14.1. • Compose a script similar to the sample script files which are provided in [My] Documents\TEMS Product Files\TEMS Investigation 14.5 mm cable for Huawei C8600 3. Regarding the PESQ Measurement activity.0\Scripts. one dialing and the other answering.3.6. Recording AQM Data This section assumes that all equipment has been prepared and interconnected as described in the Getting Started Manual. Run the script and record your logfiles.2. Custom audio cables (these are phone model specific and need to be ordered separately): – – – • 2.1.4. refer to section 20.0 User’s Manual 37. Audio adaptor cables for connecting audio cables to the ACU (delivered with ACU). Preparations See the Getting Started Manual. section 10. The diagrams in section 37. 37. Nokia C7 Sony Ericsson W995 phones use the SE System Connector cable from the AQM module cable kit. section 3. 37. use a Parallel activity with one branch for each phone.1.3. Phone supporting audio quality measurement: one of those listed as AQM-capable in the Getting Started Manual.

Chapter 37. on the TerraTec box using the physical controls. If the volume is not kept constant. NT12-2533 ver 1.1. Recommended Structure of AQM Scripts AQM script for one pair of phones. in the TerraTec PC user interface. incorrect PESQ scores will result.3. AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) Note: Be sure never to alter volume levels anywhere during measurement – whether in the phones.0 383 . or in Windows.1. 37.

The suite of “Echo” elements as well as Speech Path Delay are only relevant when interacting with a PSTN. 37. however. chapter 5. 384 .1.TEMS Investigation 14. that for AQM with ACU the following holds: • • PESQ DL for one phone in a pair is also presented as PESQ UL for the other phone in that pair. so that they can be included in any presentation. The same family of information elements is used as for the Call Generator and MRU AQM setups. Presentation of AQM Data Information Elements All computed AQM data is available as information elements. 37.0 User’s Manual AQM script for two pairs of phones. Please note.2. Not all AQM information elements are obtained: see the Information Elements and Events volume. so they are not populated in this mobile-to-mobile setup.2.

AQM with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) Status windows named Speech Quality are provided where all AQM information elements (as well as some other data) are presented. PESQ scores obtained with various phones using the setup described in this chapter generally correlate closely with PESQ as measured with AQM modules (chapter 36). section 10. The reason is believed to consist in the different filtering applied to the audio output in the Xperia arc phone. 37. There is one exception. By contrast.0 385 . The described characteristics of the Xperia arc must be taken into account when evaluating PESQ scores obtained with the device.1.3. For CDMA. for audio samples received by the Xperia arc.2. NT12-2533 ver 1. the Huawei C8600 exhibits behavior similar to that of the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc. Tests consistently show markedly lower PESQ scores with this configuration compared to other phone model pairings. causing a lowering of PESQ scores. namely when the Sony Ericsson Xperia arc acts as sender (with any of the supported UMTS phones as receiver). the PESQ score is not affected. a kind of filtering that is judged unfavorably by the PESQ algorithm. Notes on PESQ Scores Obtained with Individual Phone Models For UMTS.Chapter 37. See the Technical Reference. PESQ Key Performance Indicator A PESQ-based KPI is computable on the basis of TEMS Investigation data.2.5. 37.

found on the TEMS Investigation installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. A quick overview of the measurement setup follows below: TEMS Investigation: VoIP client controlled by Service Control script PC #1 Reference audio Received degraded audio VoIP server VoIP calls TEMS Investigation: VoIP client controlled by Service Control script Reference audio PC #2 AQM calculation #1 Test terminals #2 Received degraded audio AQM calculation Logfile containing downlink AQM for test terminal #1 Logfile containing downlink AQM for test terminal #2 386 . please turn to the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. The AQM computation is done on the PCs. but instead two PCs are used.6. including AQM. no auxiliary hardware components are involved.16. and the audio quality measurement is governed by the VoIP Voice Quality activity. For a comprehensive treatment of VoIP testing. AQM for VoIP Audio quality measurement can also be performed during VoIP testing. Everything about the Service Control mechanisms is covered in section 20.0 User’s Manual 38. VoIP testing is controlled by special Service Control activities. In this measurement setup. each of which have a mobile phone connected.TEMS Investigation 14.

2. that is.9. Presentation of AQM Data This too is covered exhaustively in the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. Audio is sent in semi-duplex fashion between the parties. 38. NT12-2533 ver 1. section 3.1.Chapter 38.0 387 . 38. Each instance of TEMS Investigation has a built-in VoIP client. the VoIP clients thus reside in the PCs and not in the mobile devices. in both directions but only in one direction at a time. AQM for VoIP The calling device is connected to one PC and the called device to the other. The crucial information elements are the PESQ and POLQA IEs in the Media Quality category: see Information Elements and Events. Obtaining AQM Data Full instructions are given in the document “VoIP Testing with TEMS Investigation”. which see.

2. General Properties of VTQI Like SQI (chapter 34).1. Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI The information element VTQI (Video Telephony Quality Index) estimates the viewer-perceived video and audio quality achieved during video telephony calls. The output from the VTQI algorithm is expressed as a value between 1 and 5. However. See also the document “Video Telephony Quality Measurement with VTQI” which is included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents. 39. • What VTQI Is Based On The VTQI score is based on the following non-perceptual input: The quality of the encoded (compressed) signal prior to transmission.4. VTQI estimates the quality of the video call as perceived by the viewer at a moment in time. The unit for VTQI is called “MOS-VTQI”. conforming to the MOS (Mean Opinion Score) scale which is frequently used in subjective quality tests. This quality is straightforwardly a function of the codecs used and the bit rate.0 User’s Manual 39. It is updated continuously during the call. There is no overall assessment of entire calls analogous to static VSQI computed for entire streaming clips (as described in section 40. 39. VTQI is a no-reference method which judges the quality of the received signal on its own merits.1). The kind of subjective test which VTQI strives to imitate is one where viewers are instructed to assess both video and audio and combine their perception of each into an overall “multimedia quality” score.TEMS Investigation 14. since the radio bearer currently used in UMTS for video 388 . without knowledge of the original. How this algorithm works is the subject of the present chapter.

even slight degradations impacting video and audio perception will still be noticed by the algorithm and affect the VTQI score. (In the current implementation of VTQI in TEMS Investigation. This windowing procedure prevents short block error bursts from impacting the VTQI score in a disproportionate manner.263. Focusing on BLER means that VTQI will faithfully reflect the impact of air interface conditions on QoE. In practice.2 kbit/s. – • BLER (block error rate). NT12-2533 ver 1. is not reported by current WCDMA user terminals and so is not available for use in the VTQI model. What VTQI Does Not Consider VTQI does not directly consider the signal presented to the human viewer. This is the most important single cause of poor quality in video telephony.263 and MPEG-4 video codecs. Each VTQI score is a time average taken over the last 8 seconds. that is. This leaves the codecs: – For the H. bit rate variation is in fact not an issue. This element is updated regularly – at intervals of length 1–2 s depending on the phone model – throughout the video call. what codec is used in the video call is deduced from the signaling between server and client. 39. Update Rate VTQI is reported as the information element VTQI Realtime Score. the video codec is assumed to be H. 39. Bit error rate (BER). The transferred video is not analyzed frame by frame in any way. the “clean” quality in terms of VTQI has been computed in advance.3.4. Video Telephony Quality Index – VTQI telephony is always a 64 kbit/s bearer. but a VTQI model for MPEG-4 also exists. no analysis of perceptual input is performed to detect specific visible artifacts.) The audio codec is assumed always to be AMR-NB operating at 12.0 389 . however. on the other hand. Thanks to the monitoring of BLER.Chapter 39. the first score is thus obtained 8 s into the video call.

This chapter takes a look the VSQI algorithm. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI The information element VSQI (Video Streaming Quality Index) estimates the viewer-perceived video and audio quality achieved during video streaming sessions.0 User’s Manual 40. See also the document “Video Streaming Quality Measurement with VSQI” which is included on the installation CD in the subdirectory Documents.2. 40.TEMS Investigation 14. Compare chapter 41 on MTQI.1. The output from the VSQI algorithm is expressed as a value between 1 and 5. The information actually used by the VSQI algorithm is the video codec type and the total (video + audio) bit rate. What VSQI Is Based On The VSQI score is based on the following non-perceptual input: 1. The kind of subjective test which VSQI strives to imitate is one where viewers are instructed to assess both video and audio and combine their perception of each into an overall “multimedia quality” score. This quality is straightforwardly a function of the video and audio codecs used. The unit for VSQI is called “MOSVSQI”. General Properties of VSQI Like SQI (chapter 34).4. The “clean” quality has been computed in advance for the codecs listed in section 40. without knowledge of the original. conforming to the MOS (Mean Opinion Score) scale which is frequently used in subjective quality tests. 390 . The quality of the encoded (compressed) signal prior to transmission. 40. and their bit rates.1. VSQI is a no-reference method which judges the quality of the received signal on its own merits.

is contained in the information element Streaming VSQI. H.4.3. no analysis of perceptual input is performed to detect specific visible artifacts. Static VSQI The static version of VSQI takes an entire streamed video clip as input and assigns a single quality score to it.1. Dynamic VSQI. Static VSQI is presented in the event Streaming Quality VSQI. however. even slight problems with blockiness. 2 in section 40.4. 40. that is.0 391 . in the video streaming client). Input parameters to the static version of VSQI are as follows: • • • • • • Video codec used (H.2 above). The amount of initial delay and the subsequent interruptions during playback of the video sequence: that is. It does not appear as an information element. 40. 3.263. What VSQI Does Not Consider VSQI does not directly consider the signal presented to the human viewer. 40. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI 2. Thanks to the monitoring of packet loss (item no.264. we may describe the calculation of static VSQI with the following formula: NT12-2533 ver 1. The amount of packet loss at the application level (i.e. Static and Dynamic VSQI Two versions of the VSQI algorithm have been devised: one static and one dynamic version. or MPEG4) Total bit rate (video + audio) Duration of initial buffering Number of rebuffering periods Duration of rebuffering periods Amount of packet loss With some degree of simplification.Chapter 40. on the other hand. and so on will still be noticed by the algorithm and affect the VSQI score. The transferred video is not analyzed frame by frame in any way. the time required for initial buffering and the incidence of rebuffering. jitter.

This score is determined by the quality of the encoding. The size of the buffering penalty depends on the time taken for initial buffering. The video sequences must not be too short because of how the buffering works: each instance of rebuffering takes several seconds to complete. which is in turn dependent on the choice of codecs and bit rate. simply because the late ones are remembered more vividly. Dynamic (Realtime) VSQI The dynamic or realtime version of VSQI estimates the quality of a streaming video clip as perceived by viewers at a moment in time.) 40. It is updated regularly – at intervals of the order of 1 s – while the video clip is playing. VSQIclean is the “clean value” obtained for the clip prior to transmission. The design of dynamic VSQI is based on the following: • Previous research suggesting approximate times taken for the perceived quality to drop to MOS-VSQI 1 (during buffering) and to rise to the highest attainable VSQI (during normal replay) Modeling of the impact of packet loss on perceived quality • 392 . recent packet loss levels and possible recent buffering events). Therefore. the time spent rebuffering. and moreover if the clip is short enough it will have been buffered in its entirety before the replay starts. and the values thus obtained are weighted and summed to yield an appropriate overall measure of the packet loss. and the number of rebuffering events. A running packet loss average over the last 4 s is computed approximately every second. since the current VSQI algorithm does not take into account such memory effects.e. disturbances towards the end will be more harshly penalized by viewers than those occurring early on. The latter is then translated into a deduction from the VSQI score. For clips considerably longer than 30 s.4. it would probably perform slightly worse for long clips. so that no rebuffering will ever occur.TEMS Investigation 14. The static VSQI algorithm has been fine-tuned for clips of around 30 s and should therefore in practical use be applied to clips of similar duration. (The dynamic version of VSQI is naturally not affected by this limitation.0 User’s Manual Here. The size of the packet loss penalty is determined as follows. on the other hand.2. Each VSQI output value is dependent on the recent history of the streaming session (i.

Chapter 40. 4.e. If rebuffering occurs. VSQI recovers reasonably quickly. The best achievable quality. i. 1. Once the replay gets going. the more the user loses patience. NT12-2533 ver 1. Video Streaming Quality Index – VSQI • Tailoring of mathematical functions for expressing viewer annoyance/ satisfaction as a function of time (in each of the states that are possible during replay) Codec and bit rate parameters as in the static version • The graph below shows in rough outline the different ways in which dynamic VSQI can evolve during the replay of a streaming video clip. especially if repeated. VSQI deteriorates rapidly. 2. Rebuffering events are much less tolerated by viewers than initial buffering. but not infrequently from a rock bottom level. is dependent on the codec/bit rate combination but is also affected by the amount of packet loss. After the replay has recommenced. In this example the packet loss is assumed to be constant so that the influence of buffering can be clearly discerned. but the longer the buffering drags on. the perceived quality picks up again and soon approaches the highest achievable level. The user tolerates (and might even expect) a certain amount of initial delay. 3. VSQI captures the latter by making the slope of the curve steeper for each new rebuffering event.0 393 . the “ceiling” in the graph.

264. MPEG4 Supported video formats: QCIF. The MTQI algorithm can be concisely characterized as follows. QVGA • • 394 .TEMS Investigation 14. H. no skipping means that every frame is replayed. REAL.0 User’s Manual 41. Mobile TV Quality Index – MTQI MTQI (Mobile TV Quality Index) is a refinement of the video part of the VSQI quality measure (see chapter 40). Buffering with skipping means that frames are skipped in connection with buffering. MTQI does not include an assessment of audio quality. Supported video codecs: H. • Algorithm components: – – – • Modeling of clean quality Modeling of packet loss Modeling of corruption duration (total duration of corrupted frames) Buffering with and buffering without skipping are distinguished. Unlike VSQI.263.

Since such a scheme fails to allow for power control and DTX on the TCHs. It should however be noted that the C/I measure is just as useful in the context of packet-switched data services. To help resolve such ambiguities.1. particularly if EDGE is used.Chapter 42. it may produce misleading results. By NT12-2533 ver 1. something which comes in useful in the verification and optimization of frequency plans. C/I Measurement (GSM) This chapter explains in some detail how GSM C/I measurements are made and why they are useful.0 395 . SQI (see chapter 34). The C/I measurement function built into TEMS Investigation enables the identification of frequencies that are exposed to particularly high levels of interference. 42. towards the high end of the C/I range. while packet-switched transmissions very clearly do benefit from every extra dB. Requirements on a Robust C/I Measure Downlink quality in a radio network can be monitored using the TEMS Speech Quality Index. TEMS Investigation offers the possibility of measuring average C/I for each of the frequencies used in a call. rough C/I measurements have sometimes been carried out by comparing the BCCH signal power of the serving cell with that of neighboring cells using the same traffic channels (but different BCCHs). In fact. The discussion provided here is centered on the voice service. In this way. it is difficult to pin down the frequencies that are affected by the degradation. To obtain a correct C/I estimate. C/I can be measured in dedicated mode. areas with inadequate quality can be identified. if frequency hopping is used in the network. speech quality is not further improved. C/I Measurement (GSM) 42.2. However. Why Measure C/I? The carrier-over-interference ratio is the ratio between the signal strength of the current serving cell and the signal strength of undesired (interfering) signal components. 42. In the past. one must take into account the possible use of power control and/or discontinuous transmission (DTX).

the limitation of the measurement range is not a restriction. 35 dB.5. which is equal to the ordinary measurement interval. which reflects the performance of older technology.TEMS Investigation 14.1 If downlink DTX is used. 42. the measurement error is typically smaller than 1 dB. Details on C/I Measurements In dedicated mode. Accuracy The number of hopping frequencies determines the number of bursts used for the C/I measurement on each frequency. 25 bursts (on average) per frequency are received in each half-second (to be precise. The test drive lasts 40 seconds. TEMS Investigation does consider these network functions and is thus able to indicate the actual C/I experienced by the phone. For example. The C/I information elements preserve a wider value range –5 . in addition. average C/I is presented approximately twice a second.0 User’s Manual contrast. if four frequencies are used. EFR speech coding and cyclic 1. 396 . With more frequencies. 480 ms) interval. data from a test drive is depicted in the figure below. if the number of hopping frequencies is low. and there are no DTX interruptions. the number of bursts transmitted from the base station to the phone may be lower than the maximum. and four frequencies are used for transmission. A C/I below 0 dB can be regarded as highly unlikely. An Example To illustrate the use of C/I. TEMS Investigation makes measurements only on the bursts actually sent from the base station and disregards bursts not transmitted.. 42. Hence.3. the average C/I for each frequency is presented. there are fewer bursts for each frequency. The measurement range extends from 0 dB to 35 dB. the performance is not further improved (at least not with today’s modulation schemes). C/I values below this limit would normally result in a dropped call. If frequency hopping is employed. Beyond the upper limit. This implies that the accuracy of the measurements is better for small sets of hopping frequencies. 42.4. If true C/I is within the range 0 to 15 dB.. depending on the speech activity level on the transmitting side.

indicating poor speech quality.Chapter 42. and interestingly. In fact. Now. Such information can then be utilized in the process of optimizing the frequency plan for the area. This means that the dip in quality is not due to low signal power level. On the other hand. identifying precisely which channels are disturbed. RxLev stays about 50 dB above –110 dBm the whole time. The upper part of the graph shows SQI and RxLev. the quality problem is to do with interference rather than coverage. that is. This explains the poor speech quality. C/I Measurement (GSM) frequency hopping with four frequencies are employed throughout. one sees that two of the four frequencies (the thick lines) have a C/I worse than 10 dB during the SQI dip. NT12-2533 ver 1. looking at the C/I graph.0 RxLev [dB] SQI [dBQ] 397 . SQI dips sharply towards the end of the test drive (after 35 s). probably because the power of the interferer increases. RxLev increases during the SQI dip. while the lower part shows C/I for each of the four frequencies: 20 SQI 60 50 0 0 25 C/I [dB] 20 15 10 5 0 0 RxLev 40 10 15 20 25 time [s] 30 35 40 5 5 10 15 20 25 time [s] 30 35 40 As appears from the upper graph.

Sony Ericsson phones with both GSM and WCDMA capability must be locked on GSM (see section 9. 1. i. 398 .0 User’s Manual 43. To reduce the testing time. each row corresponds to a particular combination of BCCH and TCH. you can use several phones.e. GSM Channel Verification The GSM Channel Verification tool allows you to check the availability of a set of GSM traffic channels. • The GSM Channel Verification Window To perform GSM channel verification. open the GSM Channel Verification window from the Control folder on the Navigator’s Menu tab. one BCCH/TCH combination.1. Since there is no way for TEMS Investigation to control the timeslot allocation.1. In this window.TEMS Investigation 14. Throughout the present chapter. traffic channel verification may take a non-trivial amount of time to complete. TEMS Investigation lets one or several GSM-capable Sony Ericsson phones1 make calls repeatedly on the chosen channels until all timeslots of interest have been tested.8) to be able to perform GSM channel verification. the following terminology will be used: • Test case: One row in the GSM Channel Verification window. typically those used in one cell or a set of cells. 43.

The ARFCN of the BCCH to be tested. or in other words the complete contents of the *. with BCCH in timeslot 0 and TCHs in timeslots 2–7. then you must prepare two test cases: one with {BCCH = 10. The ARFCN of the TCH to be tested. Test case group: All test cases with the same BCCH.0 399 . • 43. GSM Channel Verification • Group. Test: All rows in the window. Band Timeslot The frequency band where the channels are located. The following dialog appears: MS BCCH ARFCN TCH ARFCN The phone that should execute this test case.11). TCH = 10} and one with {BCCH = 10. Check the timeslots you wish to test.Chapter 43.tch file (see section 43. corresponding to one cell. TCH = 20}. Note that test case groups are not explicitly separated in the user interface. Note that a special test case must be prepared to test TCH timeslots on C0. NT12-2533 ver 1.2. Adding a Test Case To add a test case. Example: If C0 has ARFCN 10. click Add. and C1 has ARFCN 20.

select it and click the Delete button. by clicking either of two buttons. select it in the GSM Channel Verification window and click the Edit button. • 400 .”).TEMS Investigation 14. To remove a test case.10) or save the test case in a special file format (section 43. • Automatic verification: For each timeslot.11). Manual verification: For each timeslot. but you do have the option to create a report on these results (section 43. while timeslots not concerned by the test are marked by underscores (“_”). and in addition a set of user-specified quality requirements must be satisfied. Automatic vs. That is. the call must be set up correctly and maintained for a user-specified period of time. 43.4. you must reset the test case (section 43. by entering the settings for one test case at a time and clicking Apply after each. Editing and Removing Test Cases To edit a test case. The result in the GSM Channel Verification window will look like this: Here. In order for a timeslot to pass. TEMS Investigation decides whether the timeslot can be accepted or not.3. Manual Verification There are two fundamentally different ways of performing channel verification. you cannot keep any of the old test results in the window. 43.0 User’s Manual You can add multiple test cases without exiting the dialog. Note that to edit a test case which has been partially executed.8). timeslots to be tested are indicated by full stops (“. you decide yourself whether to accept or reject the result of the test.

.Chapter 43. Valid characters in the phone number are {*. You might be content with assessing the downlink quality by calling a service such as the speaking clock. Manual verification is more work-intensive and probably more timeconsuming. +. Automatic verification can be done more quickly. #. GSM Channel Verification How to take this decision is up to the user. but also yields an improvement in reliability proportional to the work invested. NT12-2533 ver 1..10) for any test case that fails in automatic verification mode. or you might want to “call a friend” in each instance to have the uplink quality checked as well. but is a less reliable indicator of what a user’s experience of the radio conditions would be like. click the Properties button. 0–9}. Enter the phone number to call when testing. Choose Manual or Automatic (see explanation above). You choose how to perform the test in the Properties dialog. Verification mode Test phone number Add MAIO and HSN.0 401 . Check this to have the Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) and the Hopping Sequence Number (HSN) indicated in the test report (section 43. In the GSM Channel Verification window.

5.TEMS Investigation 14. and specify thresholds.e. Delay time before evaluation Approve timeslot if these conditions are met: The time to wait before evaluating the quality parameters. The conditions will be evaluated at one point in time. 402 .4. only one phone can be used. 43.0 User’s Manual • Choose the QoS parameters tab to stipulate conditions for accepting a timeslot in automatic verification mode. namely as soon as the delay period has expired. Note: In manual verification mode. Check the conditions you want to use. The checked conditions must all be satisfied in order for the timeslot to be accepted. Activating Phones Before running the test you must naturally activate the phones assigned to do the testing. they are ANDed together. i. See section 8.

GSM Channel Verification 43.0 403 .1. When the testing of a timeslot begins. The test cases currently executed are tagged with a blue arrow in the leftmost column.Chapter 43.4.1–43.6. although it may of course be practical to do so. handover is disabled.1). the status of the test case will change to Passed. Manual Verification If you have chosen manual verification. Note that there is no requirement to keep test case groups apart in the GSM Channel Verification window. this timeslot is tested for all channels in the hopping sequence at once. 43. • • • Running the Test Getting Started To be able to execute a test you must have done the following: Prepared your test cases according to sections 43. as are all other phone control functions in TEMS Investigation. Activated the phone or phones to be used in the test. Chosen manual or automatic verification mode. so that multiple gray boxes appear. While the test is running.6. they will be executed one at a time. in the order they have been entered. 43. having locked the phone on the corresponding BCCH. If you have listed several test case groups (see section 43. it is marked with a question mark in a gray box. and indicated a phone number to call: see section 43.3. the application will now wait for you to either accept or reject this timeslot. If all timeslots in the test case are now accepted. An accepted timeslot will be marked with a green rectangle (with an “h” for hopping channels). To accept a timeslot.6.2. to start running the test currently displayed in the GSM Channel Verification window: Click Start. TEMS Investigation will now start attempting calls on the TCHs specified. NT12-2533 ver 1. Then. In the frequency hopping case. click Accept.

though not until all timeslots have been either accepted or rejected. click Reject. A rejected timeslot will be marked with a red rectangle (with an “h” for hopping channels). the application proceeds to make a new call.4. and a new call is made within a few seconds. the Accept and Reject buttons are disabled. the user has accepted the performance 404 . 43. When a call is made in a previously accepted or rejected timeslot.3. Manual verification has been chosen. Automatic Verification If you have chosen automatic verification. otherwise it will try to make a new call the next time this timeslot is allocated. The test case will ultimately be put in status Failed. When you have made a decision. When a timeslot is allocated which has already been accepted or rejected. see section 43. Example Here is an example of an ongoing verification session: The cell described by the first three rows (tagged with blue arrows) is under test. so any timeslot tested will be verified for all three TCHs at once. and a new call is begun immediately.TEMS Investigation 14. 43.6. the call is aborted (not affecting the earlier result).13. but keeps attempting calls indefinitely. marking it green . the application will itself accept the timeslot (if possible).6. Frequency hopping is used in this cell (as shown by the “h” symbols). At this point.0 User’s Manual To reject a timeslot. Automatic verification never rejects a timeslot. within certain limits.

All timeslots in the test case have been accepted. To resume the test. All test cases that are in status Testing will change to Stopped. Resetting a Test Case You can erase the results for a test case by resetting it. The status value of the test case reverts to Not tested.8. Summary of Test Case Status Values A test case has one of the following status values: Status Value Not tested Testing Stopped Passed Timeslot(s) rejected Meaning No work done yet on this test case. All test cases that are not finished will be put in status Testing again. 43. which is indicated by question marks. GSM Channel Verification of timeslots 3 and 6 (green markers). 43. 43. Stopping the Test In order to stop the test currently running: In the GSM Channel Verification window. when execution is resumed.Chapter 43.7. while rejecting timeslot 7 (red markers). click Stop. Execution of this test case has been begun but the test is currently stopped. At least one timeslot in the test case has been rejected. The test will continue from the point where it was halted. or: The test case has been reset. Execution of this test case is ongoing. it must be stopped first. just click Start again.9. Timeslot 4 is currently being tested. This is also indicated in the leftmost column by a blue arrow . NT12-2533 ver 1.0 405 . If the test is executing. the test case will be processed from scratch again.

TEMS Investigation 14. Test of timeslot not yet completed.9. Status values are as in the GSM Channel Verification window. Timeslot rejected.13. see section 43. To generate a test report. Timeslot not included in test.) The report indicates • • • • the verification mode: manual or automatic the test phone number the QoS parameter settings the test result for each timeslot (where available) as well as the status of each test case at the time of creating the report. See section 43. In case of call setup failure. click the Report button. it must be stopped first. The error condition is also indicated in the leftmost column by the symbol . an HTML report can be generated summarizing the results obtained so far. Meaning 406 . Creating Test Reports At any stage of execution of a test. and select an output location for the HTML file. Timeslots are marked with one of the following: Timeslot Data OK FAIL TESTING – Timeslot accepted.10. 43. (If the test is executing.0 User’s Manual Status Value Call lost BCCH lost Invalid TCH Timeout MS not connected Call setup failure Meaning These status values signify errors. the used MAIO and HSN is indicated for that test case.

However. (The test must be stopped first. To open a previously saved *.) The file will include full information on the results obtained so far and on the status of each test case at the time of saving. 43. ongoing call has been lost). The test will be saved in a file with extension . Cause NT12-2533 ver 1. Saving and Opening Tests Channel verification tests can be saved to file at any stage of execution. click Open and select your file. 43. You may assign different test cases to different phones.tch.tch file.e. To save the complete current contents of the GSM Channel Verification window. as a rule.13. Error Conditions In certain situations the application judges it impossible to complete the verification and therefore aborts the test. The test cases affected by the error executed are tagged with the symbol in the leftmost column. or you may do both. it is marked green for all other identical test cases.0 407 .Chapter 43. as soon as a timeslot is accepted by one phone. lock on BCCH has broken down). or assign identical test cases to several phones. This will. and no phone will test it further. If several phones are set to execute identical test cases. click Save. The status value of the test case indicates what has gone wrong: Status Value Call lost Two possible causes: • • Two idle mode reports received while in dedicated mode (i.11.e.12. One idle mode report received from wrong cell while in dedicated mode (i. Notes on Performance It is possible to speed up the verification process by letting several phones share the work. considerably reduce the time taken to perform the test. to begin with they will all work independently. GSM Channel Verification 43.

e. Three idle mode reports from wrong cell or two no service reports received while trying to lock on BCCH (i. Timeout MS not connected 408 . Phone not activated at start of measurement. and no timeslots marked green or red (typically occurs when the chosen TCH is in fact not used where assumed). Ten consecutive calls made where the call setup procedure could not be concluded successfully. • Invalid TCH Test case attempted 10 times in a row without the right TCH being allocated. lock on BCCH has failed).e.0 User’s Manual Status Value BCCH lost Two possible causes: • Cause No channel report received from correct BCCH for 20 seconds after previous successful locking on this BCCH (i.TEMS Investigation 14. lock on BCCH has broken down).

Drive Testing Shortcuts Function Shortcut F2 Ctrl + F2 F5 F6 Activate all Deactivate all Insert filemark Start recording NT12-2533 ver 1.1.Appendix A. General Shortcuts Function Shortcut F1 Alt + F4 F11 F12 Ctrl + Tab Ctrl + M Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + P Ctrl + R Ctrl + S Help Exit application Previous worksheet Next worksheet Focus on next window in worksheet Open TEMS Settings Manager New workspace Open workspace Print workspace Generate logfile report Save workspace A. Keyboard Shortcuts A.2. Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix A.0 409 .

3. Shortcuts for Active Window Function Shortcut Ctrl + P Print window Status Window. Line Chart.4.0 User’s Manual Function Stop recording Shortcut Ctrl + F6 A.TEMS Investigation 14. Bar Chart Function Show properties Show setup wizard (status window only) Message Window Function Show only messages of this type Hide messages of this type Undo (show only/hide) Find next message of this type Shortcut Shift + P Shift + W Shortcut Ctrl + Y Ctrl + H Ctrl + Z Right arrow 410 . Logfile Load Shortcuts Function Shortcut Shift + F10 Ctrl + F10 Open logfile Stop logfile load A.

0 411 . Some route sample must already be selected.Appendix A. Keyboard Shortcuts Function Find previous message of this type Search for message Search again Map Window Function Open Layer Control dialog Open Theme Settings dialog Activate zoom in Activate zoom out Go to first route marker 1 Shortcut Left arrow Ctrl + F F3 Shortcut Alt + L Alt + T Shift + Z Alt + Shift + Z Home Left arrow Right arrow End Step to previous route marker Step to next route marker Go to last route marker1 1. Service Control Designer Window Function Select all Copy New script Open script Save script Shortcut Ctrl + A Ctrl + C Ctrl + N Ctrl + O Ctrl + S NT12-2533 ver 1.

0 User’s Manual Function Paste Cut Shortcut Ctrl + V Ctrl + X 412 .TEMS Investigation 14.

eth .mex . File Types in TEMS Investigation These TEMS-specific file types are used by TEMS Investigation: Extension .Appendix B.mw .svt .trp File Type Setup file for ArcView format logfile export Bar chart export file Cell file Service Control configuration set Setup file for Ethereal format logfile export User-defined event Logfile exported in text format Line chart export file TEMS Investigation logfile (old format) Map window export file Setup file for MapInfo format logfile export Message window export file Setup file for Planet format logfile export Setup file for logfile report Status window export file Audio indication for event TEMS Investigation workspace Setup file for text format logfile export TEMS Investigation logfile (current format) NT12-2533 ver 1.log .lch .evt .rpt .map .tex .tdc .pex .config .bch .0 413 . File Types in TEMS Investigation Appendix B.cel .stm .fmt .aex .

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual Extension .tsc Service Control script File Type 414 .

The “equipment channel” concept is not used in the Navigator or in the Service Control windows (where only the designation “EQ” appears).0 versions of TEMS Investigation. See section C. section 7. All of its functions were taken over by the newly introduced Equipment tab in the Navigator.0 User Interface The user interface in TEMS Investigation 12. Their functions were moved into the Navigator (Equipment tab.Appendix C.2. C. Status information is also provided by the Status Control Monitor window. Comparison with Pre-12. The instruction sequences used to control devices are now referred to as scripts. A few pointers regarding these changes may be helpful to users with experience of pre-12. The Command Sequence window was replaced by the windows Service Control Designer and Service Control Monitor.1. see the Getting Started Manual.0 User Interface Appendix C. The Equipment Configuration window and the Connections toolbar were removed. With regard to COM ports.0 415 . the equipment channels “MS” and “DC” still make an appearance. • • Equipment Handling The Equipment Control toolbar was removed. Comparison with Pre12.1 • • • 1. However. which serve similar purposes. in presentation windows.2 for a comparison of the old and new tools.0 underwent major changes compared to previous product versions. top pane). there is one exception. NT12-2533 ver 1. For devices there is no longer any need to deal directly with Windows COM port numbers or to configure dial-up connections in Windows dialogs (Dial-up Networking).1.

There are no longer any “enable” or “disable” operations for devices. This allows straightforward and unrestricted application of branching and other control structures.1. Terminology • In SCtrl.0 predecessor. the Command Sequence (“CSeq”) tool. An activated device is ready to be used. Service Control vs. then manually activated and deactivated. you compose scripts consisting of activities. bottom pane).2. and scanning commands are no longer issued from the Equipment Control toolbar but rather from the Navigator (Equipment tab. section 7. • Logical Structure • Activities in SCtrl scripts are always assigned simply to the device as a whole (i. Again. 1. and Synchronize operations. control commands. Manual voice dials. the sole exception is the devices covered in the Getting Started Manual. Inter-device synchronization is implicit in a SCtrl workflow wherever workflow branches converge. All supported devices are automatically detected1.0 User’s Manual • The procedure of preparing a device for use was simplified. Command Sequences This section contrasts the Service Control (“SCtrl”) feature with its pre-12. User Interface • SCtrl uses a graphical user interface where scripts are assembled in the form of flowcharts.TEMS Investigation 14. 416 . Wait. command sequences were built up of commands. to the “EQ”).2. There is therefore no element in SCtrl scripts equivalent to the CSeq practice of inserting a Synchronize command at each juncture where several devices need to finish their respective tasks before proceeding. There is no distinguishing of “MS” and “DC” channels as in CSeq. which in CSeq were limited to the Loop.e. • C. whereas in CSeq. The same component is also used to initiate data service sessions without running a script (a function which was previously unavailable).

).0 417 . as was the case in CSeq. In SCtrl. where the device must connect to an MMS Center. An exception is MMS. that is. “Data” Category Information Elements The generic “session” concept in pre-12. section 3. the details of that operation are specified as part of the MMS activity. This is because the KPI concept is no longer explicit in TEMS Investigation (see chapter 33). not to individual steps performed as part of the activity. There is no need (as there was with CSeq) to go outside TEMS Investigation to configure phonebook entries and the like in Windows.2. Instead. Old command sequences composed with CSeq cannot be run by SCtrl. they are never incorporated into activities for service testing as could optionally be done in CSeq. and along with it the old Data category information elements prefixed with “Session”. This property always applies to the activity as a whole. NT12-2533 ver 1. HTTP. In SCtrl you indicate the type of data connection (NDIS or RAS) using a parameter in the Network Connect activity.8. as detailed in Information Elements and Events. SCtrl does not have distinct activities for sessions run over an NDIS connection. See section 20. network connect and disconnect (corresponding to dialup and hangup in CSeq) are always performed as separate activities. all setups for data service testing are done from within TEMS Investigation. The timeout parameters provided with each CSeq command have their counterpart in the SCtrl general activity property Abort with the termination condition set to On Timeout. however. separate information elements are now provided for each data service type (FTP.0 TEMS Investigation versions has been abolished. SCtrl does not have distinct activities for KPI data collection as did CSeq. etc. See section 20.3. The easiest way to accomplish the latter is to base your scripts on the predefined snippets supplied for each service type. adequate data on which to base KPI computation in other TEMS products (TEMS Discovery.Appendix C. Comparison with Pre-12.9.3.17. • • • • • C. TEMS Automatic) is always collected with SCtrl scripts provided that they are suitably composed.0 User Interface • With SCtrl.

0 User’s Manual 418 .TEMS Investigation 14.

Index Index A Activate activity in scripts 220 activating external equipment in TEMS Investigation 43.0 419 . in Anritsu format) 87 plugging in ML8720 model 44 plugging in ML8780A model 44 WCDMA pilot scanning with 139 Answer activity in scripts for video call 246 for voice call 248 AQM 374 for VoIP obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 250. 55 ACU 381 analysis mode 26 Andrew scanners CDMA scanning with 172 LTE scanning with 155 plugging in 44 Anritsu scanners 132 importing files logged by Anritsu ML8720 (i.e. 379 obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 377 practical considerations regarding collection of AQM data 378 prerequisites for collecting AQM data 378 presentation of AQM data 379 NT12-2533 ver 1. 387 presentation of AQM data 387 measurement setups in TEMS Investigation 374 with Audio Capturing Unit (ACU) 381 notes on PESQ scores obtained with individual phone models 385 obtaining AQM data in TEMS Investigation 381 prerequisites for collecting AQM data 382 presentation of AQM data 384 recording AQM data 382 with Call Generator/MRU 375 manually entering phone number 47 merging uplink AQM data into logfiles 102.

TEMS Investigation 14. 97 arguments of information elements 6 AT activity in scripts 220 AT commands. 276 audio quality measurements (AQM) 374 autodetect function for equipment not covered by license 49 restarting 58 B Band Lock activity in scripts 220 band lock. issuing manually 62 Audio Capturing Unit 381 audio indications for events 274 activating 276 adding 275 deactivating 276 deleting 277 editing 276 muting 276 saving and loading 277 Audio Indications window 274. applying manually 62 limitations for Sony Ericsson phones 63 bar charts 314 adding charts 317 Additional Information pane 317 Chart pane 316 deleting a chart 317 editing general properties of individual chart panes 318 examples of presentations 330 exporting 332 interval on x-axis 328 labeling of x-axis 328 Legend pane 316 Multiple IE Components presentation mode 321 organization of window 315 parallel coordinates 324 420 .0 User’s Manual recording AQM data 378 setup with Call Generator 375 setup with MRU 377 AQM modules associating with phones in TEMS Investigation 68 plugging in 45 ArcView 90.

0 421 . presentation of (WCDMA) 146 C C/I measurements (GSM) 395 Call Generator 375 CAS Access Class (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 261 CAS Lock on PLMN (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 261 CAS Speech Codec (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 261 CDMA scanning 172 Cell Barred (manual control function) 63 cell data loading from Mentum CellPlanner 39 using in presentations 39 cell files creating in CEL format 39 creating in XML format 38 in CSV format 38 loading 39 Cell Lock (manual control function) 63 cell reselection behavior (Sony Ericsson phones) 263 channel verification (GSM) 398 color attribute (of information element) 280 editing 34 Configuration menu 31 contents of User’s Manual 3 Control menu 31 control structures in scripts 200 CPICH Best UARFCN Data window (WCDMA) 141 CPICH Data window (WCDMA) 141 CPICH Scan bar charts (WCDMA) 141 NT12-2533 ver 1.Index Parallel Coordinates/Stacked Bar Chart presentation mode 324 presentation mode 319 presenting data from a different device 329 selecting additional information 329 selecting colors 319 selecting data to display 319 setting up contents 318 setting up general properties 317 Single IE presentation mode 320 stacked bar chart 324 X-axis pane 316 Y-axis pane 316 basics of TEMS Investigation 23 BCH scanning.

98 Event Counter windows 292 changing contents and properties of 293 copying contents from 292 managing tabs in 292 resetting 293 Event Definition window 270 events 5. 278 audio indications for 274 deleting user-defined 273 editing user-defined 273 example of user-defined event 273 predefined and user-defined 270 422 .0 User’s Manual CPICH Scan line charts (WCDMA) 142 D data service testing 4. 220 video streaming 301 Deactivate activity in scripts 220 deactivating external equipment 56 definitions of TEMS Investigation concepts 5 device properties 258 Dial activity in scripts for voice call 247 drive testing mode 26 DRT scanners 183 detection of 48 LTE scanning with 155 plugging in 44 E editing settings in 214 E-mail Receive activity in scripts 242 E-mail Send activity in scripts 241 enhanced power scanning (LTE) 166 equipment cases 4 plugging in 45 equipment handling. 270.TEMS Investigation 14.0 versions 415 equipment properties 258 Ericsson Fixed Wireless Terminals plugging in 44 Ethereal 90. comparison with pre-12. 5 conducting manually 71 presentation of 72.

146. 53 F FAQ (on TEMS website) 5 File menu 31 File Transfer tool 87 file types in TEMS Investigation 413 Filemark activity in scripts 220 filemarks inserting in logfiles 78 fix source for GPS 304 FTP Download activity in scripts 232 FTP Upload activity in scripts 233 fundamentals of TEMS Investigation 2 G General window 39. setting up 270 external equipment 4 activating in TEMS Investigation 43.0 423 . 364 GeoSet 334 constructing from map files 334 GeoSet Manager 362 layer control 363 map projections 363 Getting Started Manual. 55 connectable devices 3 deactivating in TEMS Investigation 56 overview of user interface components dealing with 41 plugging in 43 user-assisted detection of 50. 170. 178.Index presentation of 270 user-defined. contents of 4 GPS fix source 304 GPS units in scanners 126 plugging in 45 properties of 269 selecting preferred GPS 57 GPS window 304 properties of 304 GSM Barred Cells (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 263 GSM Cell Selection (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 263 GSM channel verification 398 adding test cases 399 NT12-2533 ver 1. 163.

manual 400 creating test reports 406 editing test cases 400 error conditions 407 notes on performance 407 opening tests 407 removing test cases 400 resetting test cases 405 running the test 403 saving tests 407 status of test cases 405 stopping the test 405 test 399 test case 398 test case group 399 GSM EDGE Capability (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 264 GSM Handover (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 264 GSM scanning 127 GSM Tx Power (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 265 H handover behavior in GSM (Sony Ericsson phones) 264 Hang Up activity in scripts for video call 246 for voice call 248 Help menu 31 HTC Imagio detection of 48 HTC Touch Pro2 detection of 48 HTTP Get activity in scripts 235 I If--Else activity in scripts 222 IMSI 47 in-building positioning using Map window 79 using Pinpoint Window 112 indoor positioning using Map window 79 using Pinpoint Window 112 424 .TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual automatic vs.

278 Data category comparison with pre-12. 409 KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) 199.0 425 . 365 accessibility 366 integrity 366 obtaining with TEMS products 366 purpose of 365 retainability 366 L labels 334 Layer 3 Messages (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 265 layers in Map window 334.0 versions 417 installing TEMS Investigation 23 IPv6 216 K Key Performance Indicators 199 keyboard shortcuts 32.Index information elements 6. 358 licensing in TEMS Investigation 2 line charts 306 adding charts 309 Additional Information pane 308 changing contents and properties 309 Chart pane 307 deleting a chart 313 editing contents 309 editing general properties 309 exporting 313 Legend pane 308 organization of window 306 presenting data from a different device 313 selecting additional information 313 selecting events 312 selecting information elements 310 time scale 308 Y-axis pane 308 loading a logfile for analysis 81 loading logfiles 86 loading logfiles from other sources 86 Logfile menu 31 NT12-2533 ver 1.

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual logfile recording 76 clearing history buffer 79 default folder 79 inserting filemarks 78 other options 78 Recording Properties dialog 78 logfile reports 104 contents 110 event statistics 107 external devices to include 108 saving and loading setups 110 scanned channels 108 thresholding of information elements 105 user details 110 logfiles activities performed in 84 equipment used when recording 83 exporting 90 ArcView settings 97 Ethereal (Wireshark) settings 98 executing export orders 99 from command prompt 99 MapInfo settings 96 MDM settings 98 Planet settings 98 saving and loading setups 98 text file settings 94 general information on 82 loading 86 loading contents of 86 progress indication on status bar 86 loading for analysis 81 loading from other sources 86 metadata on 82 opening 81 recording 76 searching 87 statistics on activities in 85 transferring via FTP 87 viewing metadata of 81 viewing statistics on activities in 81 viewing summary of activities in 81 426 .

31 merging uplink AQM data into logfiles 102 message windows 294 catch-up function 296 changing contents and properties of 294 filtering contents of 297 NT12-2533 ver 1. 337 zooming 361 Marconi Planet 90. 338 Legend tab 358 previous view. 98 MDM 98 export in MDM format 90 loading MDM files in TEMS Investigation 87 Mentum CellPlanner 39 menu bar 25.0 427 . returning to 360 right-hand pane 355 scale bar 360 setting projection for 361 statistics 357 toolbar 361 viewing entire layer 361 MapInfo 90. 96 maps 333 centering 362 constructing a GeoSet from map files 334 GeoSet 334 labels 334 notes on route plotting and updating 341 panning 362 positioning maps in bitmap or TIF format 336 themes 334.Index LTE scanning 155 M managing external equipment (general) 41 manual operation of external equipment 61 Manual UE Configuration utility 50 Map window 333 information on theme markers 355 layers 334. 358 adding presentation layers 358 control of 359 map layer 334 presentation layers 334.

TEMS Investigation 14.0 User’s Manual freezing 297 highlighting messages in 299 plain-text message decoding 296 presentation of discarded messages 296 searching contents of 298 synchronization of 296 messages 6. 278 MMS Receive activity in scripts 243 MMS Send activity in scripts 242 Mobile Receiving Unit 375 mode reports 6 Mode Reports window adjusting updating frequency for Qualcomm reports 300 Motorola UEs reading EFEM logfiles from 87 MRU 375 MTQI 394 MTR files 87 N narrowband interference scanning (CDMA) 180 Navigator 24 Equipment tab basics 45 device context menu 46 refreshing 58 re-pairing phones with AQM modules 58 saving equipment configuration 60 Info Element tab 34 Logfile tab 36 Menu tab 33 Worksheets tab 37 Navigator pane 33 NDIS data connection 56 Network Bandwidth activity in scripts 239 Network Connect activity (in scripts) prerequisites for various devices 228 Network Connect activity in scripts 226 Network Disconnect activity in scripts 230 network scanning (WCDMA scanning mode) 152 presentation 154 setting up 153 Network Search window (WCDMA) 154 428 .

Index Nokia phones. technology-specific control functions 70 sector lock control 268 Nonvolatile Item Read/Write (Qualcomm device control function) 67 O online help 31 P package options for TEMS Investigation 2 Parallel activity in scripts 223 parallel coordinates presentation 324 PCTel scanners CDMA scanning with 172 detection of SeeGull EX 48 detection of SeeGull MX 48 GSM scanning with 127 LTE scanning with 155 plugging in 44 WCDMA pilot scanning with 136 WCDMA scanning with 132 PESQ 374 PESQ devices See AQM modules PESQ Measurement activity in scripts 248 phone number of user terminal 47 phones 6 plugging in 44 properties of 260 pilot scanning (CDMA) 173 pilot scanning (TD-SCDMA) 169 pilot scanning (WCDMA) 134 Ping activity in scripts 237 Pinpoint Window 112 creating planned routes in 112 relation to other TEMS Investigation functions 121 walking planned routes in 118 pinpointing in Map window 79 presentation 354 in Pinpoint Window 112 NT12-2533 ver 1.0 429 . properties of channel lock control 268 GSM cell barring control 268 RAT lock vs.

0 User’s Manual planned routes creating 112 walking 118 repeating parts of 120 skipping waypoints 121 plotting density in Map window 341 preamble scanning (WiMAX) 184 preferred GPS unit 57 presentation attributes of information elements 34 presentation layers 338 Presentation menu 31 presentation of data 278 presentation windows export/import of 281 synchronization 280 types of 278 updating 280 PS Attach activity in scripts 230 PS Detach activity in scripts 230 Q Qualcomm chipset based devices Nonvolatile Item Read/Write control function (UMTS) 67 properties of 269 Qualcomm devices with LTE capability 53 quick guide to user interface 23 R Radio Access Technology lock (manual) 69 Radio Access Technology Lock activity in scripts 221 RAT lock 221 applying manually 69 recommended skills 23 recording logfiles 76 Release Note 4 Report Generator 104 reports on logfiles 104 Rohde & Schwarz scanners 127. 132 detection of 48 LTE scanning with 155 plugging in 44 WCDMA pilot scanning with 138 routes 6 430 .TEMS Investigation 14.

properties of 269 scanners 7 plugging in 44 scanning general 123 notes on scanner multitasking 125 performing a scan 72. 155 methods 127. CDMA 172 "PN Scan" bar charts 178 general settings 173 methods 172 Narrowband Interference Scan Bar Chart 180 narrowband interference scanning 180 of pilots 173 RSSI Scan Bar Chart 179 RSSI scanning 179 sorting of PNs in presentations 178 spectrum analysis 181 Strongest Scanned PN Bar Chart 178 scanning. 123 presenting scan data 124 recording scan data 124 setting up a scan 123 technical data on scanning devices 124 scanning.Index RRC WCDMA Capability Control (manual control function) 71 RSSI scanning CDMA 179 GSM 128 LTE 164 TD-SCDMA 171 WCDMA 149 WiMAX 187 S Samsung Galaxy S 4G properties of 260 Samsung LTE modems. 129 C/I measurements 129 device capabilities 127. GSM 127 BSIC decoding in RSSI Scanning mode 128.0 431 . 155 RSSI scanning 128 spectrum analysis 131 System Information Decoding 130 NT12-2533 ver 1.

0 User’s Manual scanning. WiMAX 183 general settings 183 methods 183 preamble scanning 184 presentation 187 432 . 167 RSSI scanning 164 sorting of cells in presentations 163 spectrum scanning 164 scanning. 164. WCDMA 132 CPICH Best UARFCN Data window 141 CPICH Data status window 141 CPICH pilot pollution 143 CPICH Scan bar charts 141 CPICH Scan line charts 142 CPICH scanning 134 device capabilities 132 Finger Info status windows 146 methods 132 network scanning 152 number of active set members 143 of P-SCH and S-SCH channels 145 of synchronization channels (SCHs) 134 of timeslots on SCH 147 presenting scrambling codes from multiple UARFCNs together 147 RSSI Scan Bar Chart 150 RSSI scanning 149 SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart 148 sorting of scrambling codes in presentations 146 spectrum analysis 151 Spectrum Analysis bar charts 152 Synch Channel Data status window 145 scanning. LTE 155 enhanced power scanning 166 LTE signal scanning 156 presentation 163. TD-SCDMA 168 general settings 168 methods 168 of pilots 169 presentation 170.TEMS Investigation 14. 165. 171 RSSI scanning 171 sorting of cells in presentations 170 scanning.

setting up 196 Deactivate activity 220 Dial activity (for voice call) 247 editing workflows 214 E-mail Receive activity 242 E-mail Send activity 241 failure handling properties 251 Filemark activity 220 FTP Download activity 232 FTP Upload activity 233 general activity properties 251 Hang Up activity (for video call) 246 Hang Up activity (for voice call) 248 HTTP Get activity 235 If--Else activity 222 if--else constructs 201 importing and exporting 253 introduction to 189 IP activities 226 Messaging activities 241 MMS Receive activity 243 MMS Send activity 242 moving activities in 214 NT12-2533 ver 1.0 433 .Index RSSI scanning 187 spectrum analysis 187 SCH scanning 134 SCH Timeslot Scan Bar Chart (WCDMA) 148 scripts 214 Activate activity 220 activity filter 256 Answer activity (for video call) 246 Answer activity (for voice call) 248 AT activity 220 Band Lock activity 220 basics of creating 192 capabilities of devices 189 comparison with old command sequences 416 context menu in workflow pane 256 Control activities 220 Control Flow activities 222 control structures 200 copy--paste 214 data services.

0 User’s Manual Network Bandwidth activity 239 Network Connect activity 226 network connection. setting up 195 Network Disconnect activity 230 Parallel activity 223 parallel construct 204 PESQ Measurement activity 248 Ping activity 237 PS attach 198 PS Attach activity 230 PS detach 198 PS Detach activity 230 Radio Access Technology Lock activity 221 running 216 saving and loading 254 saving workflow as image 256 Sequence activity 223 sequences 200 SIP Register activity 231 SIP Unregister activity 231 SMS Receive activity 245 SMS Send activity 244 snippets 199 Start IP Sniffing activity 231 Start Logfile Recording activity 221 Stop IP Sniffing activity 232 Stop Logfile Recording activity 221 Streaming activity 246 supported services by cellular technology 190 suppressing parts of 218 Terminate activity 213.TEMS Investigation 14. creating script for 192 VoIP Answer activity 249 VoIP Dial activity 249 VoIP Hang Up activity 249 434 . 223 termination properties 252 UDP activity 237 UE control 215 validating 215 Video activities 245 Video Dial activity 245 Voice activities 247 voice.

technology-specific control functions 70 NT12-2533 ver 1. 217 SIP Register activity in scripts 231 SIP Unregister activity in scripts 231 size attribute (of information element) editing 36 skills recommended for TEMS Investigation users 23 SMS Receive activity in scripts 245 SMS Send activity in scripts 244 snippets in scripts 199 Sony Ericsson phones GSM scanning with 127 properties of 260 WCDMA pilot scanning with 134 Sony Ericsson phones. 224 Wait For activity 211 WAP Get activity 236 WAP Streaming activity 247 While activity 223 while loops 202 workflow control structures 200 zooming the workflow pane 257 searching a logfile 87 searching in message windows 298 Sequence activity in scripts 223 Service Control 189 See also scripts Service Control Designer 190 Service Control Monitor 216. properties of CAS Access Class 261 CAS Lock on PLMN 261 CAS Speech Codec 261 EDGE Capability 264 Extended Reports 260 GSM Adjacent Scan 262 GSM Barred Cells 263 GSM Cell Selection 263 GSM Handover 264 GSM Tx Power 265 Layer 3 Messages 265 messages and mode reports 260 RAT lock vs.0 435 .Index VoIP Voice Quality activity 250 Wait activity 210.

properties of 260 Stop IP Sniffing activity in scripts 232 Stop Logfile Recording activity in scripts 221 Streaming activity in scripts 246 support contact information 5 436 .TEMS Investigation 14. 45 statistics presentation in Map window 357 status bar 25.0 User’s Manual WCDMA Barred Cells 265 WCDMA BLER Target 266 WCDMA Cell Selection 266 WCDMA RRC Radio Capability 267 sounds for events 274 spectrum scanning CDMA 181 LTE 164 WCDMA 151 WiMAX 187 speech codec information elements populating with Qualcomm chipset based devices 269 speech codecs (of Sony Ericsson phones) 261 Speech Quality Index (SQI) 368 SQI 368 SQI-MOS 368 alignment with PESQ 371 comparison with RxQual (GSM version) 373 input to algorithm 369 output 370 SRUs 132 GSM scanning with 127 plugging in 44 WCDMA pilot scanning with 134 stacked bar chart 324 Start IP Sniffing activity in scripts 231 Start Logfile Recording activity in scripts 221 starting TEMS Investigation 23. 30 Status Control Monitor 73 status windows 282 changing font size in 289 changing properties of 286 repeating columns in multiple groups 289 setting up contents of 282 ST-Ericsson chipset based phones.

337 Cell ARFCN theme 352 Cell Color theme 350 Cell Line theme 347 Cell theme 344 cell themes 338 constructing cell themes 343 event themes 342 IE themes 339 deleting 355 editing 354 event themes 337 information element (IE) themes 337 Pinpoint theme 338.Index symbol attribute (of information element) editing 36 Synch Channel Data window (WCDMA) 145 T TD-SCDMA scanning 168 TEMS Bulletins 5 Terminate activity in scripts 223 themes 334. dialing manually 71 NT12-2533 ver 1. 354 reordering 355 visibility of 354 toolbars 24.0 versions 415 quick guide to 23 user modes 26 user-assisted detection of external devices 50 user-defined events 270 V video calls. 29 File and View toolbar 30 Record toolbar 29 Replay toolbar 29 Report toolbar 29 track (walk along planned route) 118 tracks 7 U UDP activity in scripts 237 user interface 26 comparison with user interface in pre-12.0 437 .

dialing manually 71 VoIP 386 VoIP Answer activity in scripts 249 VoIP Dial activity in scripts 249 VoIP Hang Up activity in scripts 249 VoIP Voice Quality activity in scripts 250 VSQI 303.0 18 what was new in TEMS Investigation 13.TEMS Investigation 14.1 13 what’s in this manual 3 what’s new in this TEMS Investigation version 8 While activity in scripts 223 Wi-Fi access points presentation on map 343 WiMAX cells. 98 Worksheet menu 31 438 . 390 VTQI 388 W Wait activity in scripts 224 WAP Get activity in scripts 236 WAP Streaming activity in scripts 247 WAP-based video streaming 247 WCDMA Barred Cells (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 265 WCDMA BLER Target (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 266 WCDMA Cell Selection (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 266 WCDMA RRC Radio Capability (Sony Ericsson phone properties) 267 WCDMA scanning 132 what was new in TEMS Investigation 13. 390 evaluating performance of 303 how to test 301 troubleshooting 303 WAP-based 247 video telephony 388 View menu 31 voice calls.0 User’s Manual Video Dial activity in scripts 245 Video Monitor 302 properties of 302 video streaming 301. presenting on map 343 WiMAX scanning 183 Window menu 31 Windows 7 216 Windows Vista 216 Wireshark 90.

Index worksheets 24. 28 workspaces 24. 27 opening from Command Prompt 28 predefined 28 NT12-2533 ver 1.0 439 .

ascom. equipment vendors. All rights reserved. and our products are  supplied to the world’s top mobile operators. ANd opTiMizE MobilE NETworkS. and analyzing network performance. ANAlyzE.com/tems 04.  monitoring. Virginia 20190 | USA www.  www.com/tems  The  TEMS™  Portfolio  offers  a  complete  set  of  trusted  solutions  for  drive  testing. Ascom reserves the right to change specifications without notice. optimization. and maintenance of mobile  networks. Ascom Network Testing Inc. We are the industry leader. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Ascom acknowledges all registered trademarks appearing herein. AScoM NETwork TESTiNg lEAdS ThE world iN providiNg bEST-iN-clASS SoluTioNS To MEASurE. and professional service providers.ascom. 1943 Isaac Newton Square Reston.2012 © Ascom 2012. TEMS is a trademark of Ascom . These  state-of-the-art  offerings  facilitate  the  deployment. .  benchmarking.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful